~

هلسو ُلآو دنم اىديس ىلع لا ىلصو
يلاعلا بر ل دنلاو

Any part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a
retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means,
electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise,
without the prior permission of the publisher.





PDF Edition
1430 H – 2009



Matn Safīnat al-najāʾ: Arabic and English.
Sālim ibn ʿAbdullah ibn Saʿd ibn Samīr al-Haḍramī al-Shāfiʿī.
The Ship of Salvation:
A classic manual of Islāmic Doctrine and Jurisprudence
In Arabic with English text, commentary and appendices,
Edited and translated by:
ʿAbdullah Muḥammad al-Marbūqī al-Shāfiʿī.
Cover designed by: Mawlānā Yusūf ibn Yaʿqūb
Ṣafar 1430 H


Indeed Allah , Has Intelligent Servants,
Who Have Divorced the World and Who Fear Temptations,
They Pondered in the World and When They Knew,
That it is Not a Homeland for a Living Person,
They Took it as a Deep Sea and They Made,
Good Actions in the World Their Ships.

ٌِّإ ل ًاداَبِع ًََطُف ا
اوزَظَى اََيف اّنَلَف اوُنِلَع
اٍوُلَعَج ًةّجُل اوُذَخّتاو

اوُقّلَط اَيِىّدلا اوُفاَخو اَيَتِفلا
اََّىَأ ِتَسِيَل ّيَحِل اَيَطَو
َحِلاَص ِلانعَلا اَيف ايُفُس

Contents

i

Contents

Contents .................................................................................................... i
Transliteration Key ..................................................................................... v
Translator’s Preface ................................................................................... vi
Muqaddimah ............................................................................................. 1
Islam and Iman .......................................................................................... 2
The Integrals of Islām ......................................................................... 3
The Integrals of Īmān.......................................................................... 4
Al-Ahkam al-Sharʿiyyah ............................................................................. 7
Taharah .................................................................................................... 8
The Signs of Puberty .......................................................................... 9
The Conditions for Using a Stone ..................................................... 10
The Sunnah Way for Using a Stone .............................................. 11
The Obligatory Acts of Wuḍūʾ ......................................................... 12
The Intention..................................................................................... 12
The Sunnah Way to Perform Wuḍūʾ ............................................ 13
The Cleanliness of the Body ......................................................... 15
Water is Either a Little or Abundant ................................................. 15
The Things Make a Ritual Bath Compulsory ................................... 16
The Compulsory Acts of a Ritual Bath ............................................. 17
The Sunnah Way to Perform a Ritual Bath .................................. 18
The Conditions of Wuḍūʾ ................................................................. 19
The Factors that Nullify the Wuḍūʾ .................................................. 20
The forbidden Actions in the State of Impurity ................................ 21
The Causes of Tayammum ............................................................... 23
The Conditions of Tayammum ......................................................... 24
The Integrals of Tayammum ............................................................ 25
The Factors That Nullify Tayammum .............................................. 26
The Sunnah Way to Perform Tayammum .................................... 27
Three Types of Impurities That Can Be Purified .............................. 28
Impurities .......................................................................................... 29
The menstrual period ........................................................................ 31
Salah ...................................................................................................... 34
The Valid Excuses for Delaying the ṣalāh ........................................ 35
The Conditions of the ṣalāh .............................................................. 36
Ritual Impurities are of two types ..................................................... 37
The ʿAwrahs ..................................................................................... 39
Contents

ii

The conditions for the muadhdhin: ............................................... 43
The Integrals of the ṣalāh .................................................................. 44
Description of the ṣalāh ................................................................ 47
Three Degrees of Intention ............................................................... 52
The Conditions of Takbīrat al-iḥrām ................................................ 53
The Conditions of Sūrah al-Fātiḥah .................................................. 55
Tashdīds of Sūrah al-Fātiḥah ............................................................ 56
Sunnah to Raise the Hands ............................................................... 57
The Conditions of Sajdah ................................................................. 58
The Seven Limbs of Prostration ................................................... 58
Tashdīds of ṣalāh Upon Nabi ¸ ........................................................ 60
Salām ................................................................................................ 60
The Times of ṣalāh ........................................................................... 61
Times When the ṣalāh is ḥarām ........................................................ 63
The Pauses in ṣalāh ........................................................................... 64
Ṭumaʾnīnah ....................................................................................... 65
The Causes for Sajdah Sahw ............................................................ 66
The Sunan Abʿaḍ .............................................................................. 67
The Factors Which Nullify the ṣalāh ................................................ 68
Sunan Rawatib .............................................................................. 70
Witr ṣalāh ...................................................................................... 71
Tarāwīḥ ṣalāh:............................................................................... 72
Ḍuḥā ṣalāh: ................................................................................... 72
Taḥajjud ṣalāh: .............................................................................. 72
Taḥiyyat al-masjid: ....................................................................... 72
The Intention of Being an Imām ....................................................... 73
The Conditions for Following an Imām ........................................... 74
The Forms of Following the Imām ................................................... 77
The Conditions of Jamaʿ Taqdim ..................................................... 78
The Conditions of Jamaʿ Taʾkhir ...................................................... 79
The Conditions of Qasr ..................................................................... 80
Salat al-Jumuʿah...................................................................................... 82
The Conditions of Jumuʿah .............................................................. 82
Sunan and Adab of Jumuʿah ......................................................... 83
The Integrals of the Two Khuṭbahs .................................................. 84
The Conditions for Delivering the Two Khuṭbahs............................ 85
Janazah .................................................................................................. 88
Four Things Compulsory for the Deceased ............................................ 88
Washing the Deceased ...................................................................... 89
Shrouding the Deceased ................................................................... 90
Contents

iii

The Integrals of ṣalāh Janazah .......................................................... 91
The Grave ......................................................................................... 92
The Exhumation of the Deceased ..................................................... 93
Seeking Assistance ........................................................................... 94
Zakah ..................................................................................................... 96
The Wealth upon Which Zakāh is Compulsory ................................ 97
The Zakāh of ʿEid al-Fitr .............................................................. 99
The Eight Categories of Recipients ............................................ 100
Saum .................................................................................................... 102
Fasting of Ramaḍān ........................................................................ 103
The Conditions for the Validity of Fasting ..................................... 105
The Conditions for Fasting Becomes Wājib ................................... 105
The Integrals of Fasting of Ramaḍān .............................................. 107
Qaḍāʾ of Fasting and Kaffarah........................................................ 107
The Factors That Nullify Fasting .................................................... 109
The Breaking of the Fast in Ramaḍān ............................................ 110
The Types of Breaking the Fast ...................................................... 112
The Things Do Not Break the Fast ................................................. 113
Hajj and ʿUmrah.................................................................................... 114
The Conditions for Ḥajj being Wājib ............................................. 115
The Integrals of Ḥajj ....................................................................... 116
The Integrals of ʿUmrah ................................................................. 116
The Wājibat of Ḥajj ........................................................................ 117
Unlawful Things While in Iḥrām .................................................... 118
The Expiations of Ḥajj and ʿUmrah ................................................ 118
To Visit the Tomb of Rasūlullah ¸ ................................................ 123
Khatimah .............................................................................................. 124
Appendices ............................................................................................ 126
Appendix 1: Selected Duʿās and Adhkar................................................ 127
Ṭahārah – Purification ................................................................ 127
Ṣalāh – Prayer ............................................................................. 130
Duʿā and Dhikr after ṣalāh: ......................................................... 136
Prophetic Duʿā: ........................................................................... 140
Appendix 2: Authorized Books in Shāfiʿī Madhhab ................................ 148
Appendix 3: ʿAlam – Biographical Notes .............................................. 152
Al-Imām al-Shāfiʿī ..................................................................... 152
Imām al-ḥarāmain ....................................................................... 155
Al-Imām Abū Ishaq al-Shīrāzī .................................................... 156
Al-Imām al-Ghazālī .................................................................... 157
Contents

iv

Al-Imām al-Rāfiʿī ....................................................................... 159
Al-Imām al-Nawawī ................................................................... 160
Shaykh al-Islām Zakariyyā al-Anṣārī ......................................... 161
Al-Imām Ibn Ḥajar al-Haytamī................................................... 162
Al-Imām Muḥammad al-Shirbīnī al-Khāṭib ............................... 163
Bibliography .......................................................................................... 165



__
Transliteration Key

v

Transliteration Key
a r f
b z q
t s k
th sh l
j ṣ m
ḥ ḍ n
kh ṭ w
d ẓ h
dh gh y

Long wovels Short wovels
ā a
ī i
ū u
Diphtong Doubled
aw uwwa
ay iyya

The letter hamzah “ء” is transliterated as a right half ring (ʾ) and is not
expressed when at the beginning.
The letter ʿayn “ ” is transliterated as a left half ring (ʿ).
ةـ is transliterated as “ah” in pause form and “at” in construct form.
لا is transliterated as “al” in both; pause and construct form, “al” is used
with all letters; hurūf al-shamsiyyah or hurūf al-qamariyyah.

Honorific

, Glorified and Most High.
¸ May Allah‟s blessings and peace be upon him.
~ May peace be upon him.
; May Allah be pleased with him/her.
¸ May Allah be pleased with them
Translator’s Preface

vi

Translator’s Preface
+

In the name of Allah, the Merciful, the Compassionate.
All praise is to Allah, the Lord of all the worlds. Peace and
blessings be upon His noble Slave and Messenger, Muḥammad
and upon his family and Companions.

;
¸

Amīr al-Muʾminīn Abū Ḥafs Sayyidunā ʿUmar ibn al-
Khaṭṭab ; narrated that he heard Rasūlullah ¸ saying, “Verily
the reward for deeds depend upon intentions and indeed every
Translator’s Preface

vii

person shall receive what he intended for. Thus, he whose
emigration was for Allah and His Messenger, his emigration will
be considered for Allah and His Messenger. He whose
emigration was towards the world or to be married to a woman,
his emigration will be for whatever he migrated for.”
This book has been prepared for the beginner, especially
those students studying at a “madrasah”. Many Arabic
terminologies have been maintained with the translation in the
bracket.
Footnotes provide assistance for teacher in explaining the
text. The students are required to be familiar with the text of
Safīnat al-najāʾ. It is better if the students can memorize the
Arabic text so that they gain acquaintance with the jurisprudence
or at least be able to read it fluently.
Every effort was made to present a precise and accurate
translation with proper explanations. The explanations were
mostly derived from “Kāshifat al-sajāʾ sharh Safīnat al-najāʾ”,
“Reliance of the Traveller” and “al-Iqnāʿ fī halli alfāẓi matn Abī
Shujāʿ”. The additional chapter of Ḥajj and ʿUmrah was taken
from the “Al-Fiqh al-manhaji ʿalā madhhab al-Imām al-Shāfiʿī,”
and “Reliance of the Traveller”.The measurements and
conversions were based on the book, “al-Maqādīr al-sharʿiyyah”
by Dr. Najm al-dīn al-Kurdī. The biographical notes were taken
from the book, “Reliance of the Traveller”.
Translator’s Preface

viii

I would like to take this opportunity to pay a particular
tribute to my mother. It is through her sacrifice and duʿā that I
was able to reach this stage. It is incumbent upon me to extend
my deepest gratitude to my elders: Muftī Ibrahīm Desai and
Mawlānā Muḥammad Ṭaha Karan for their encouragement and
support.
This work is completed with the tremendous help and
assistant of my ustadh, Mawlānā Muḥammad ibn Harun
ʿAbasoomar, my brother Hāfiẓ Luqmān Hasbi, my friends Hāfiẓ
Reeaz Iqbal and Hāfiẓ Ziyād Danka. This book could not have
been published without significant aid from Mawlānā Ibrahim
Muḥammad and Mawlānā Imran Hatia. May Allah , reward
them and all those who were involved directly or indirectly in
completing this task, here and in the hereafter.
Lastly, I beseech Almighty Allah , for His acceptance and
that He , makes this a source of benefit for all. Āmīn.


ʿAbdullah Muḥammad al-Marbūqī al-Shāfiʿī
Shah Alam, Selangor
Ṣafar 1430 H









ُقفلاو ًيدلا لوصأ ف
يعفاشلا واملا بٍذم ىلع
The Ship of Salvation
The Doctrine and Jurisprudence
of the School of al-Imām al-Shāfiʿī

Muqaddimah
1

Muqaddimah

For whomsoever Allah , intends goodness, He gives him the
understanding of Dīn. [al-Bukhārī]




In the name of Allah, the Merciful, the Compassionate.
All praise is to Allah, the Lord of all the worlds. We seek help
from Him in worldly affairs and in matters of Dīn. Salutation and
peace on our Master, Muḥammad ¸, the Seal of Prophethood,
and upon all his family and Companions. There is no power and
might except through Allah, the Most High, the Most Great.


2









Islam and Iman


__

Islam and Iman
3

Islam and Iman

The Integrals of Islām
Section: The Integrals of Islām are Five:
1. To bear witness that there is no god except Allah and that
Muḥammad ¸ is the messenger of Allah.
2. To establish ṣalāh.
1

3. To discharge zakāh.
2

4. To fast in the month of Ramaḍān.
3

5. To perform ḥajj for those who are able.
4


1
The most virtuous physical worship is ṣalāh, then fasting, then ḥajj and
then zakāh. As for worship pertaining to the heart like imān (belief),
maʿrifah (gnosis), tafakkur (reflection), trust in Allah ,, patience, hope,
contentment with Allah‟s decree, love of Allah ,, repentance,
purification of blameworthy traits like greed, anger, pride, malice etc.
these are far more superior than physical worship. The most virtuous of
them being īmān.
2
Zakāh literally means growth, blessings, purification or praise. In
Sacred Law it is the name for a particular amount of property that must
be paid to certain kinds of recipients under certain conditions.
3
Fasting was made farḍ in Shaʿbān, the second year Hijrī. Rasulullah ¸
fasted for nine complete Ramaḍāns.
4
Both ḥajj and ʿumrah are wājib in the Shāfiʿī‟s madhhab (school of
thought).
Islam and Iman
4


The Integrals of Īmān
Section: The Integrals of Īmān (Faith) are Six:
1. To believe in Allah.
5

2. To believe in His Angels.
6

3. To believe in His Books.
7


5
[Īmān Mujmāl (in brief)] To believe in Allah‟s , existence, His sole
godhood, that no one else participates in His attribute of divinity or in
the rights He has over His creation, His oneness and uniqueness and
that He is characterized by every perfection and exalted above any
imperfection or impossibility. [Īmān Mufaṣṣal (in detail)] It is wājib to
know the attributes of Allah ,: (1) al-Wujūd (Being), (2) al-Qidām
(Pre-eternity), (3) al-Baqāʾ (Everlastingness), (4) Mukhālafatuh taʿāla
bi al-hawādith (Absolute dissimilarity to created things), (5) Qiyāmuh
taʿāla bī nafsih (Self-subsistence), (6) al-Wahdāniyah (Oneness), (7) al-
Qudrah (Power), (8) al-Irādah (Will), (9) al-ʿIlm (Knowledge), (10) al-
Hayāh (Life) (11) al-Samʿ (Hearing), (12) al-Baṣr (Sight), (13) al-
Kalām (Speech).
6
To believe that the Angels are the honourable servants of Allah ,,
who do not disobey Him and do as they are commanded. They are
created from light, not characterized by gender, neither male nor female,
nor do they eat or drink. It is wājib to know ten of them: (1) Jibrīl, (2)
Mīkāʾīl, (3) Isrāfīl, (4) ʿIzrāʾīl, (5) Munkar, (6) Nakīr, (7) Riḍwān, (8)
Mālik, (9) Raqīb, and (10) ʿĀ tīd.
7
To believe in all the Books revealed by Allah to His messengers. It is
wājib to know four books in particular: (1) the Tawrah of Nabī Mūsā
Islam and Iman
5

4. To believe in His Messengers.
8

5. To believe in the Final Day.
9

6. To believe in Destiny, good and evil, is from Allah the
Exalted.
10



~, (2) the Zabur of Nabī Dāwud ~, (3) the Injīl of Nabī ʿĪsā ~ and
(4) the Qurʾān of Nabī Muhammad ¸.
8
To believe in the Prophets and Messengers of Allah ,, that Allah ,
sent them to man and jinn to guide them to the path of the Truth. Four
attributes are necessary for all Messengers (1) Truthfullness, (2)
Trustworthiness, (3) Conveying the message, and (4) Intelligence. It is
wājib to know twenty-five of them: (1) Adām, (2) Idrīs (Enoch), (3)
Nūh (Noah), (4) Hūd, (5) Ṣalīh, (6) Lūṭ (Lot), (7) Ibrāhīm (Abraham),
(8) Ismāʿīl (Ishmael), (9) Ishāq (Isaac), (10) Yaʿqūb (Jacob), (11)
Yūsuf (Joseph), (12) Shūʿaib, (13) Ayyūb (Job), (14) Dhul Kiflī
(Ezekiel), (15) Mūsā (Moses), (16) Hārūn (Aaron), (17) Dāwud
(David), (18) Sūlaymān (Soloman), (19) Ilyās (Elias), (20) al-Yāsaʿ
(Elisha), (21) Yūnus (Jonah), (22) Zakariyyā (Zacharias), (23) Yahyā
(John), (24) ʿĪsā (Jesus), and (25) Muḥammad (Peace and Salutation
upon him and upon all of them).
9
To believe that everyone will die, and will then be resurrected. It also
means to believe without doubt in Jannah (Heaven) and Jahannam
(Hell), the Mīzān (Scale), the Ṣirāṭ (Path - the bridge over the Fire), the
Questioning in the grave, the Reckoning (after the Resurrection), the
Recompense (in Paradise), Punishment (for some sinful believers) and
Torment (eternal for the unbeliever). Some will be put in Hell out of
justice and some in Paradise out of Allah‟s sheer generosity.
10
To believe that Allah , has ordained both good and evil before
creating the creation and that all that has been and all that will be exists
only through Allah‟s Qaḍāʾ (Decree), Qadr (Foreordinance) and Irādah
(Will).
Islam and Iman
6


Section: The meaning of the Kalimah is “In reality none is
worthy of worship except Allah”.

Al-Ahkam al-Sharʿiyyah
7

Al-Ahkam al-Sharʿiyyah

Note: Al-Ahkam al-Sharʿiyyah - The Rulings of the Sacred
Law:

In the Shāfiʿī Madhhab (school of thought), the actions of those
who are obligated to observe the precepts of religion take one of
five rulings:
1. The Wājib (obligatory) action: One will be rewarded for
performing them and will be liable for punishment upon
abandoning them.
2. The Mandūb (recommended) action: One will be rewarded
for performing them and will not be liable for punishment
upon abandoning them.
3. The Mubāḥ (permissible) action: One will not be rewarded
for performing them and will not be liable for punishment
upon abandoning them.
4. The Makrūh (offensive) action: One will be rewarded for
abandoning them and will not be liable for punishment upon
performing them.
5. The Ḥarām (forbidden) action: One will be rewarded for
abandoning them and will be liable for punishment upon
performing them.

8









Taharah


__


Taharah

9

Taharah

The Signs of Puberty
Section: The Signs of Puberty are Three:
1

1. Reaching the age of 15 (lunar) years for a male or a female.
2. Experiencing a wet dream by a 9 year old boy or girl.
3. Menstruation for a 9 year old girl.
2



1
When a child reaches the age of seven and is mumayyiz (discerning)
i.e. he can eat, drink and clean himself after using the toilet unassisted,
he is ordered to perform ṣalāh and all other injunctions pertaining to
ṣalāh (e.g. wuḍūʾ). When he reaches ten, he will be beaten for
neglecting it, not severely, but so as to discipline the child, and not more
than three strikes. ṣalāh and other injuctions of Sharīʿah become wājib
when a child reaches the age of puberty.
2
Pregnancy is not a sign of puberty, rather an emission of sexual fluid
prior to pregnancy is.
Taharah

10

The Conditions for Using a Stone
Section: The Conditions for Using a Stone
3
(to clean the
private parts) are Eight:
4

1. Three
5
stones should be used.
6

2. It should purify.
7

3. The impurity should not be completely dry.
8

4. The impurity should not have spread out.
9

5. No other impurity should come upon it.

3
Stones suffice to clean oneself, though it is best to follow this up by
washing with water.
4
It is wājib to use water if one of these conditions is not found.
5
It is wājib to use either three stones or even three sides of one stone
when one is sufficient to remove impurities. Otherwise one needs to
repeat using a stone that suffices in removing the impurity. It is sunnah
to use an odd number of stones (meaning three, five, seven etc.).
6
Anything that is solid, pure and removes filth. Something deserving
respect (e.g. paper; an instrument of knowledge) or something edible
can not replace the use of stones.
7
It means to remove the filth so that nothing remains but a trace that
could not be removed unless one were to use water. When this has been
done, any remaining effect of impurity is excusable.
8
If the impurity becomes dry, using a stone will no longer suffice.
9
Impurity should not reach another part of the body.
Taharah

11

6. The impurity should not go beyond the inner buttock
10
and the
head of the penis.
7. Water should not splash onto the stone.
11

8. The stones to be used should be pure.
The Sunnah Way for Using a Stone
Note: The Sunnah Way for Using a Stone:
1. Begin to wipe from front to back on the right side with the
first stone, similarly wipe the left with the second, and wipe
both sides and the anus with the third. Each wiping must
begin at a point on the skin that is free of impurity.
2. It is sunnah (recommended) to add an odd number of stones
e.g. five, seven and so on.
3. It is makrūh (offensive) to use the right hand to clean the
impurity.

10
Inner buttock refers to that which is enfolded when standing.
11
It will not be valid to use a wet stone.
Taharah

12

The Obligatory Acts of Wuḍūʾ
Section: The Obligatory Acts of Wuḍūʾ (Ritual Ablution) are
Six:
1. Intention.
12

2. Washing the face.
13

3. Washing both hands and arms including the elbows.
14

4. Wiping any part of the head.
15

5. Washing the feet including the ankles.
6. Tartīb (to observe the above-mentioned sequence).

The Intention

12
The person performing ablution either intends removing a state of
ḥadath (ritual impurity) or purification for the ṣalāh.
13
Washing the entire face, from the point where the hairline usually
begins to the chin in length, and from ear to ear in width.
14
Washing both arms completely, up-to and including the elbows once.
15
The minimum is to wipe part of a single hair, provided this part does
not hang below the limit of the head (i.e. below the hairline).
Taharah

13

Section: Intention is to intend something simultaneously with the
action; its place is in the heart. To make a verbal intention is a
sunnah; its time is at the beginning of washing the first portion of
the face. Tartīb (sequence) is to observe the sequence of the
wuḍūʾ, such that no latter limb of wuḍūʾ should precede a former
limb.
The Sunnah Way to Perform Wuḍūʾ
Note: The Sunnah Way to Perform Wuḍūʾ (Ritual Ablution):
1. Recite taʿawwudh: I take refuge in Allah from the accursed
Shaitan (to recite Aʿudhubillah completely), and basmalah:
In the name of Allah, Most Merciful, Most Compassionate
(to recite Bismillah completely).
2. Wash the hands up-to and including the wrists three times.
3. Use the miswāk (toothstick), and then rinse the mouth and
nose out three times, with three handfuls of water. One takes
in a mouthful from a handful of water and snifts up some of
the rest of the handful into the nostrils thrice.
4. Wash the entire face, from the point where the hairline
usually begins to the chin in length, and from ear to ear in
width, three times. It is obligatory to wash all facial hair –
inner, outer, as well as the skin beneath the hair, whether the
hair is thick or thin – such as the eyebrows, moustache and so
forth except for a thick beard.
Taharah

14

5. Wash both arms completely, up-to and including the elbows,
three times. It is sunnah to pass the fingers through each
other.
6. Wipe the head by passing the wet hands from the front of the
head, sliding the paired hands to the back up to the nape of
the neck, and then return them to point of commencement,
three times.
7. Wipe the inside of the ears with the fingertips and their
outside with the thumbs, with fresh water, three times.
8. Wash the feet up-to and including the ankles, three times.
Allow the water to pass between the toes by using the little
finger of the left hand, beginning with the little toe of the
right foot, and ending with the little toe on the left.
9. During wuḍūʾ, it is sunnah:
- to wash the limbs successively,
- to begin with the right when washing the arms and legs, but
both hands, cheeks, or ears, are washed simultaneously,
- to begin with the top of the face and not to splash the water
onto it,
- to avoid splashing water onto oneself,
- to face the qiblah, not to talk except for a necessity, and
- not to waste water.
Taharah

15

The Cleanliness of the Body
Note: The Cleanliness of the Body:
It is sunnah (1) to trim the fingernails and toenails, (2) to clip
moustache to the extent that the pink of the upper lip is visible, it
should not be plucked or shaved, (3) to pluck (or to shave) the
hair of the underarms and nostrils, and to shave the pubic hair (4)
to apply kuhl (an antimonic compound), (5) to apply henna for
women.
Circumcision is wājib for both men and women.
It is ḥarām for both; men and women to dye their hair black,
except with the intention of jihād.

Water is Either a Little or Abundant
Section: Water
16
is Either a Little or Abundant.
17

 A little amount of water is that which is less than two
qullahs.

16
The definition of māʾ al-mutlaq (general water) is that water which is
without any attributes.
17
It is not permissible to remove hadath (wuḍūʾ or ritual bath) or
remove impurity except with “general water”.
Taharah

16

 Abundant water that which is two qullahs (approximately
190 litres) or more.
 A little amount of water will become impure when any
impurity
18
falls into it, even though the water does not
change.
19

 Abundant water will not become impure except when its
taste, colour or smell changes.

The Things Make a Ritual Bath Compulsory
Section: The Things Make a Ritual Bath Compulsory are Six:
1. Insertion the head of the penis into the vagina.
20

2. Discharge of semen.
21


18
If an impurity which is so small (e.g. impurity on the leg of a fly) that
it is indiscernible by eyesight (meaning an average look that is neither a
negligent glance nor a detailed inspection) or a dead creature without
flowing blood falls into it, in both cases the water remains purifying.
This applies to both running or stagnant water.
19
Even though none of the water‟s characteristics (i.e. taste, colour or
smell) have changed.
20
Insertion of the head of the penis into the front or back private part of
a male or female human, or animal, adult or minor, living or dead, will
necessitate a ritual bath.
Taharah

17

3. Menstruation.
22

4. Postnatal bleeding.
23

5. Childbirth.
24

6. Death.
25


The Compulsory Acts of a Ritual Bath
Section: The Compulsory Acts of a Ritual Bath are Two:
1. Intention.
26

2. To ensure that water reaches the entire body.
27


21
Male sperm and female sexual fluid are recognized by the fact that
they (1) come in spurts by contractions, (2) with sexual gratification and
(3) when moist, smell like bread dough, and when dry, like egg-white.
22
Periodic discharge of blood from the vagina.
23
Blood discharged after giving birth.
24
Ritual bath becomes wājib even in the case of dry birth or
miscarriage.
25
It is wājib to give a bath to a Muslim who is non-martyr. It is not
wājib to give a bath to a disbeliever, though it is permissible. It is ḥarām
to give a bath and to offer ṣalāh upon a martyr.
26
The intention is of removing hadath or janābah (major ritual
impurity) or removing the impurity of haiḍ (menstruation). One bath
will suffice with the intention of removing both major ritual impurity
and the sunnah of the Friday prayer, though if only one intention is
made, the bath counts for that one but not the other.
27
The water reaches all of the hair and skin, to the roots of the hair,
under the nails and the outwardly visible portion of the ear canals,
including the area under the foreskin of an uncircumcized man, and the
Taharah

18

The Sunnah Way to Perform a Ritual Bath
Note: The Sunnah Way to Perform a Ritual Bath:
4. To begin in the name of Allah, the Merciful, the
Compassionate (to recite Bismillah completely).
5. To remove any dirt or impurity on the body.
6. To perform wuḍūʾ as the wuḍūʾ of ṣalāh.
7. To pour water over the head three times intending to remove
a major hadath (ritual impurity) or haiḍ (menstruation).
8. To pour water over the right side of the body three times and
then left side three times, ensuring that water reaches all
joints and folds, and to rub oneself.
9. It is sunnah to apply musk (or any other fragrance) on a piece
of cotton and insert it into the vagina if the bath was taken
because of haiḍ.


private part of a non-virgin woman which is normally exposed when
she squats to relieve herself.
Taharah

19

The Conditions of Wuḍūʾ
Section: The Conditions of Wuḍūʾ are Ten:
28

1. Islām .
2. The age of understanding.
29

3. Cleanliness from menstruation and postnatal bleeding.
4. Being free from that which prevents the water from reaching
the skin.
5. Nothing should be upon the limb that will change the
(qualities of the) water.
6. Knowledge of it (wuḍūʾ) being obligatory.
7. Not to assume the farḍ (obligatory) acts as sunnah
(recommended).
30

8. Pure water.
9. – 10. Entering of the time (of ṣalāh)
31
and Continuity, for a
person who constantly remains in the state of impurity.

28
The conditions for the validity of wuḍūʾ, these conditions are also
applied for a ritual bath.
29
A child reaches the stage of mumayyiz (discerning) when he can eat,
drink and clean himself after using the toilet unassisted.
30
For the general public, it is suffice to know some of its acts are farḍ
and some are sunnah.
31
Wuḍūʾ or a ritual bath should be performed after the entering of the
ṣalāhs‟ time for farḍ ṣalāh or at a particular time for sunnah ṣalāh (e.g.
dhuhā).
Taharah

20

The Factors that Nullify the Wuḍūʾ
Section: The Factors that Nullify the Wuḍūʾ are Four:
1. Anything that exits from either the front or the rear private
parts, whether wind or anything else,
32
except semen.
33

2. Loss of intellect
34
through sleep or other causes,
35
except
sleep while firmly seated on the ground.
3. Skin-to-skin contact between an adult,
36
non-mahram
(marriageable), male and female without any barrier.
37


32
Or anything else whether common or uncommon such as a worm or
stone but not manī (semen).
33
An example of this being someone firmly seated who sleeps and has a
wet dream, or someone who looks at something lustfully and sperm or
sexual fluid are emitted.
34
Meaning the loss of the ability to distinguish.
35
Or other causes like insanity, drunkenness etc. excludes drowsing and
daydreaming, which do not break wuḍūʾ. Among the signs of drowsing
is that one can hear the words of those present, even though without
comprehension.
36
Adult means the age that usually stirs up sexual desire in a person.
Wuḍūʾ will not break if this is only found in one of the two.
Taharah

21

4. Touching the private parts of a human with the palm or inner
surface of the fingers.
38


The forbidden Actions in the State of Impurity

37
The wuḍūʾ will break even if they touch without sexual desire, or
unintentionally, and even if be with the tongue or a malfunctional
surplus limb. Touching does not include contact with teeth, nails, hair or
a severed limb. Wuḍūʾ is also broken by touching an aged person or a
corpse of the opposite sex.
38
Those parts of the palm which touch each-other when the hands are
put together palm to palm.
Taharah

22

Section:
The Forbidden Actions for a Person in the State of Minor
Impurity (in need of wuḍūʾ) are Four:
(1) Ṣalāh, (2) ṭawāf, (3) touching or (4) carrying the Qurʾān.
39

The Forbidden Actions for a Person in the State of Major
Impurity (in Need of Ritual Bath) are Six:
(1) Ṣalah, (2) ṭawāf, (3) touching, (4) carrying or (5) reciting the
Qurʾān and (6) to remain in the masjid.
The Forbidden Actions for a Person in the State of
Menstruation are Ten:
(1) Salat, (2) ṭawāf, (3) touching or, (4) carrying the Qurʾān, (5)
to remain in the masjid, (6) reciting the Qurʾān, (7) fasting, (8)
divorce, (9) to pass through the masjid for a woman who thinks
her blood might soil the masjid, and (10) to take sexual pleasure
from what is between the navel and the knees.


39
It is not permissible to touch the Qurʾān, whether its writing, the
spaces between its lines, its margins, binding, the carrying strap
attached to it, or the bag or box it is in. However, it is permissible to
carry a Qurʾān in baggage and to carry money, rings, or clothes on
which Qurʾān is written.
Taharah

23

The Causes of Tayammum
Section: The Causes of Tayammum (Dry Ablution) are Three:
1. Absence of water.
40

2. Illness.
41

3. Need for water exists by (oneself or) worthy animals.
42

The following six people or animals are classified unworthy:
1. A person who forsakes ṣalāh.
2. A convicted married adulterer.
3. An Apostate.
4. A non-Muslim from a non-Muslim country that has
war with the Muslim country.
5. A vicious dog.
6. A pig.


40
If there is a little water that is insufficient for attaining purity, water
should be used as much as possible and then tayammum should be
performed for the rest of the limbs.
41
An ailment that a person fears water would cause, (1) harm to life or
limb, (2) disability, (3) becoming seriously ill, (4) an increase in one‟s
ailment, (5) a delay in recovering from one‟s illness, (6) considerable
pain, or (7) a bad effect from the water such as a radical change in one‟s
skin colour or a visible part of the body.
42
There is fear of one‟s own thirst, or that of worthy companions and
animals with one, even if be in the future.
Taharah

24

The Conditions of Tayammum
Section: The Conditions of Tayammum are Ten:
1. It must be performed with (dust of) the earth.
43

2. The dust must be pure.
3. The dust must not be used (i.e. already used on a limb or has
been dusted off a limb).
4. The dust must not be mixed with flour or anything like flour.
44

5. A person should intend the earth.
45

6. He should wipe his face and both hands with two strikes of
dust.

43
It does not matter whether the earth is red, black, yellow or salty in
which nothing grows. It is not permissible to perform tayammum with
earth that has been turned to ashes or with clay pottery that has been
pounded and softened.
44
Like saffron or lime.
45
Therefore, if the wind blew earth onto a person and one then passed
one‟s hands over one‟s face and arms, the tayammum will not be valid
even though one stood in the wind with intention of having sand blown
over one.
Taharah

25

7. He should first remove any impurity.
8. He should determine the direction of the qiblah before
commencing the tayammum.
46

9. He should make tayammum after the entering of the time (of
the ṣalāh).
10. He should make tayammum for every farḍ (ṣalāh).
47


The Integrals of Tayammum
Section: The Integrals of Tayammum are Five:
1. Transfer of earth (to the body).
48

2. Intention.
49

3. Wiping of the face.
50


46
The preferred view is that tayammum will be correct if it has been
performed after the entering of the time of ṣalāh even before a person
determines the direction of the qiblah.
47
Several sunnahs ṣalāh can be performed with the farḍ ṣalāh, either
before or after the farḍ ṣalāh.
48
Therefore, it will not suffice to merely pass the hands over the face or
arms with the intention of tayammum when they already have dust on
them.
49
The intention of making ṣalāh permissible – it will not suffice to
make the intention of removing the hadath.
Taharah

26

4. Wiping of the two hands including the elbows.
5. Following the sequence between both wipings.
51


The Factors That Nullify Tayammum
Section: The Factors That Nullify Tayammum are Three.
1. Those things which nullify the ablution.
2. Apostacy.
3. Presumption that one can now obtain water (in the case where
tayammum was made due to lack of water).
52


50
It is not necessary to make the earth reach the skin under the hair of
the face and arms. It is however necessary to pass the hands over that
part of the beard which is visible.
51
It is necessary to pass the hand over the face before passing them over
the arms.
52
This will apply even if one sees a mirage (thinking it to be water), or
sees people who may have water, but it will not break if something
prevents usage of the water for wuḍūʾ. For example, one sighted water
but it is only sufficient for drinking or an enemy prevents one from
acquiring it.
Taharah

27

The Sunnah Way to Perform Tayammum
Note: The Sunnah Way to Perform Tayammum (Dry
Ablution):
1. Begin in the name of Allah, Most Merciful, Most
Compassionate (to recite Bismillah completely).
2. Wipe the upper face before the lower.
3. Wipe the right arm before the left.
4. For wiping the arms, hold the palms up, placing the left hand
crosswise under the right with the left hand‟s fingers
touching the back of the fingers of the right hand, passing the
left hand up-to the right wrist. Then, curling the fingers
around the side of the right wrist, one passes the left hand to
the right elbow, then turns the left palm so it rests on the top
of the right forearm with its thumb pointed away from one
before passing it back down to the wrist, where one wipes the
back of the right thumb with the inside of the left thumb. One
then wipes the left arm in the same manner, followed by
interlacing the fingers, rubbing the palms together, and then
dusting the hands off lightly.
5. One separates the fingers when striking the earth each of the
two times, and one must remove one‟s ring for the second,
before wiping the arms.
Taharah

28

Three Types of Impurities That Can Be Purified
Section: Three Types of Impurities That Can Be Purified:
1. Wine
53
that becomes vinegar on its own.
54

2. The hide of a dead animal that is tanned.
55

3. Creatures that are born out of filth.
56




53
Wine or any liquid intoxicant is impure, but solid intoxicants are pure
although they are unlawful to take, eat or drink.
54
“On its own” without anything being mixed with it. If anything was
mixed with the wine before it became vinegar, then turning it to vinegar
does not purify it.
55
Tanning means removing from a hide all excess blood, fat, hair, and
so forth by using an acrid substance, even if be impure. Other measures
such as using salt, earth, or sunlight, are insufficient. Hides of dog or
pig cannot be purified by tanning. Any hair that remains after tanning
has not been purified. However, a little is excusable.
56
Such as worms that grow in carrion.
Taharah

29

Impurities
Section: Impurities are of Three Types:
1. Mughallaẓah (heavy).
2. Mukhaffafah (light).
3. Mutawassiṭah (moderate).
Heavy impurity is the impurity from a dog, pig, or their
offspring.
Light impurity is the urine of a baby (boy) which only feeds on
milk
57
and is not yet two years of age.
58

All other remaining impurities are moderate impurities.
59



57
Whether the milk of his mother or an animal‟s milk, pure or impure,
it will not change the ruling of it being considered a light impurity.
58
Making “taḥnīk” (introducing something sweet, such as a date, into
the mouth of a newborn child) or giving a child medicine will not
change the ruling.
59
Example of a moderate impurity: urine, excreta, blood, pus, vomit,
wine, any liquid intoxicant, wadī, madhī, slaughtered animals that may
not be eaten, unslaughtered dead animals (other than aquatic life,
locusts or human beings), the milk of animals that may not be eaten
(other than human), the hair of unslaughtered dead animals and the hair
of animals that may not be eaten (other than human) when separated
from them during their life.
Taharah

30




Section:
 Heavy impurity becomes pure by removing it and then
washing it seven times,
60
one of which should be with earth.
61

 Light impurity will be purified by removing the actual
impurity and sprinkling adequate water upon it (the amount
of water sprinkled should be greater than the amount of
urine).
 Moderate impurity is of two kinds: (1) that which has a
substance and (2) that without a substance.
1. That which has a substance is that which has a colour, smell
and taste. It is necessary to remove its colour, smell and
taste.
62


60
Something that becomes impure by contact and that is restricted to
contamination by traces of moisture from dog or pig, whether saliva,
urine or anything moist from them, or any of their dry parts that have
become moist. If something dry such as the animal‟s breath or hair
touches a person, it need only be removed.
61
Earth cannot be substituted with something else like soap or detergent
etc.
62
It is wājib to remove all of its taste, even if it be difficult, and to
remove both colour and smell if not difficult. If any of the smell or
Taharah

31

2. The one which has no substance is the one that does not have
a colour, smell and taste. It is sufficient that water flows over
it.
63


The menstrual period
Section:
 The minimum menstrual period is a day and a night.
64
It
generally lasts for six or seven days and the maximum period
is 15 days and nights.
65


colour alone is difficult to remove, then the fact that one of these two
remains does not affect the purity. However, if both the colour and
smell remain in a spot, it is not considered pure.
63
If the effects of sun, fire, or wind remove the traces of the impurity,
the ground is still not pure until water has been poured over it.
64
It the blood ceases to flow in less than twenty-four hours, then it is
not considered haiḍ (menstruation) and the woman must make-up the
ṣalāh she omitted during it. If it ceases at twenty-four hours, within
fifteen days, or between the two (the blood discharged discontinuously
Taharah

32

 The minimum interval of purity between two menstruations
is 15 days. Generally it lasts for 23 or 24 days and there is no
maximum limit to the number of days between two
menstruations.
 The minimum postnatal bleeding is a single discharge of
blood. Generally it lasts for 40 days and the maximum period
is 60 days.

within 15 days and the duration of the blood discharged is 24 hours or
more), then it is haiḍ.
65
If it exceeds fifteen days, then she is a woman with istihāḍah (chronic
vaginal discharge).

33



34









Salah


__
Salah

35

Salah

The Valid Excuses for Delaying the ṣalāh
Section: The Valid Excuses for Delaying the Ṣalāh from its
Prescribed Time are Two:
1

(1) Sleep
2
and (2) forgetfulness.
3




1
A third excuse is for a person who delayed the ṣalāh to combine two
ṣalāhs during a journey.
2
A person was asleep before the time of ṣalāh commenced and
remained asleep until the time ended. When any ṣalāh is due but not yet
performed, and one wishes to lie down for a while and he is certain to
awaken in time to carry out this duty, it will be makrūh for him to sleep
or lie down. However, if he is not at all certain as to whether he will
wake up in time or not, it is ḥarām.
3
A person forgot that he did not perform the ṣalāh and only
remembered after the time of ṣalāh expired. This should not be due to
unmindfulness due to engrossment in playing chess etc. in which case
he will be sinful.
Salah

36

The Conditions of the ṣalāh
Section: The Conditions of the ṣalāh are Eight:
4

1. Purity from the two ritual impurities.
5

2. Purity of the clothing, the body,
6
and the place
7
(of
performing ṣalāh).
3. Covering the ʿawrah (private parts).
8

4. Facing the qiblah.
9


4
The author does not mention Islām and Mumayyidh as a condition
because they are well known.
5
Purification from minor and major ritual impurity (hadath and
janabah through wuḍūʾ and ritual bath respectively as well as from haiḍ
and nifas).
6
One‟s ṣalāh is invalid if one is holding the end of a rope connected
with something impure.
7
One‟s ṣalāh is valid if performed on the pure portion of a rug which is
affected with some impurities, even if the rug or bed moves when one
moves. The principle is that it is not permissible for a person in ṣalāh to
support or carry any impurity but it is permissible for him to be
supported by it, provided he is not in direct contact with the impurity.
8
It is a necessary condition that the clothing prevents the colour of the
skin from being exposed and covers the ʿawrah from all sides including
above. It is not necessary to cover the ʿawrah from below. A thin
garment through which the colour of the skin is visible is not sufficient.
Salah

37

5. The commencement of the time of ṣalāh.
10

6. Knowledge of it being farḍ.
7. Not to regard any of its farḍ acts as sunnah.
11

8. To abstain from those factors that nullifies the ṣalāh.

Ritual Impurities are of two types
Ritual Impurities are of two types: (1) minor ritual impurities
and (2) major ritual impurities.
(1) A minor ritual impurity is that which makes wuḍūʾ wājib and
(2) a major impurity is that which is makes bath wājib.


9
This is a necessary condition for the five farḍ ṣalāh which must be
performed while facing the proper direction of qiblah whether a person
is a musāfir (traveller) or a muqīm (non-traveller), riding in a vehicle or
not. A musāfir may perform sunnah ṣalāh without facing the direction
of qiblah.
10
A person must be certain about the commencement of the time of
ṣalāh. If a person is uncertain about the commencement of the time of
the ṣalāh which he has performed, that particular ṣalāh will not be
correct, even if the ṣalāh was in fact carried out in its required time,
unless he applies his ijtihad (discretion) to determine the time of the
ṣalāh, in which case it will be correct. If he applies ijtihad and the ṣalāh
was carried out before or after the time of the ṣalāh, the ṣalāh performed
will be considered a qaḍāʾ ṣalāh if he has qaḍāʾ ṣalāh in his
responsibility otherwise it will be considered a nafl ṣalāh.
11
A person‟s ṣalāh is not invalidated if he thinks that all of the actions
in ṣalāh are farḍ.
Salah

38

Salah

39

The ʿAwrahs
The ʿAwrahs (Private parts) are Four Types:
1. The ʿawrah of a man generally
12
and that of a slave-girl in
ṣalāh is the area between the navel and the knees.
13

2. The ʿawrah of a free woman in ṣalāh includes the whole body
except the face and the two palms.
3. The ʿawrah of a free woman and that of a slave girl in the
presence of a stranger is the entire body.
4. The ʿawrah of a free woman and a slave girl in the presence
of a mahram (unmarriageable kin) or women is the area
between the navel and the knees.

12
Men includes young boys, even if they are not yet of the age of
understanding. It generally means in all conditions; wether in ṣalāh or
outside ṣalāh.
13
The knees and the navel themselves are not part of the ʿawrah, but it
is wājib to cover them in order to fulfil the command of covering the
ʿawrah completely.
Salah

40

Adhān and Iqāmah
Note: Adhān (The Call for ṣalāh) and Iqāmah (The Call to
Commence the ṣalāh)
 Adhān and Iqāmah are both sunnah for the farḍ ṣalāh, wether
praying alone or in a second jamaah of ṣalāh.
 To call out the adhān is better than being the imām for the
ṣalāh.
 The words of the adhān:
 It is sunnah to recite the two testifications in a low voice
before calling it aloud:

Salah

41

 To add in the ṣubh ṣalāh before the final takbir (Allahu
Akbar):


 The words of the iqāmah:

When giving the adhān and iqāmah, it is mustaḥab
(recommended):
 To be in the state of wuḍūʾ, to stand, to face the qiblah, to
turn the head (not the chest or feet) to the right when saying,
“ ” and to the left when saying, “ ”.
 To call out the adhān calmly and slowly, pausing for an
interval after each phrase of the adhān equal to the duration
of the phrase (except for repetitions of “Allahu akbar”),
Salah

42

which are said in pairs and to give iqāmah rapidly without
pausing.
 To repeat each phrase after the muadhdhin, even if in the
state of janābah (major ritual impurity), during menstruation,
or when reciting the Qurʾān.
 It is makrūh to call out the adhān in the state of hadath
(minor ritual impurity), more severe to do so in a state of
janabah (major ritual impurity), and even worse to give
iqāmah while in either of these two states.
 After the words “ ” and “ ” one
replies:
 After the words “ ” one replies:
 After the words “ ” one replies:
 To recite the following duʿā after the adhān:
Salah

43


The conditions for the muadhdhin:
 (1) Islām, (2) mumayyidh (the age of understanding), (3)
sanity and, (4) male if the adhān is for a jamāʿah of men.

Salah

44

¸
The Integrals of the ṣalāh
Section: The Integrals of the ṣalāh are Seventeen:
1. Intention.
14

2. Takbīrat al-iḥrām (The opening statement: “Allahu Akbar”).
15


14
To make intention in the heart is wājib and mustaḥab to utter it with
the tongue. The intention should be simultaneous with the takbīrat al-
iḥrām and remains till the completion of the takbīr.
15
Takbīrat al-iḥrām can only be in Arabic with the word, “Allahu
akbar,” or “Allahul akbar”. The minimal valid audibility is that it can
be heard through normal hearing. The imām calls out the takbīr aloud
every time in ṣalāh. It is mustaḥab to raise the hands from the beginning
of the takbīrat al-iḥrām to shoulder level, meaning that one‟s fingertips
are even with the tip of the ears, thumbs with the earlobes, and palms
with one‟s shoulders, fingers slightly outspread, the palms face the
direction of qiblah and the hands are uncovered (i.e. not hidden beneath
a shawl). After the takbīr, one places the hands below the chest and
above the navel, grasping the left wrist with the right hand, and fixing
Salah

45

3. Standing in the farḍ ṣalāh for those who have the ability.
16

4. Recitation of Sūrah al-Fātiḥah.
17

5. Rukuʿ (bowing).
18

6. Remaining motionless for a moment therein (rukuʿ).
7. Iʿtidāl (Straightening up after rukuʿ).
19

8. Remaining motionless for a moment therein (iʿtidāl)
9. Two sajdahs (prostrations).
20

10. Remaining motionless for a moment therein (sajdah).
11. Sitting between the two sajdahs.
21

12. Remaining motionless for a moment therein (sitting).

one‟s gaze on the place where one‟s forehead will prostrate. The
complete takbīrat al-iḥrām must be made while standing.
16
Standing is a rukn (integral) in all farḍ ṣalāh for one who can stand,
whether by himself or assisted by another, however it is not a rukn in
nafl ṣalāh. Standing requires that the spine be straight. One is not
standing if one leans so forward that the backbone is no longer straight,
or bends so that one is closer to rukuʿ (bowing) than to standing.
17
Sūrah al-Fātiḥah can be recited from memory or by looking into the
muṣḥaf etc. It is wājib to recite it in every rakʿah of ṣalāh whether
loudly or silently, whether an imām, a follower or alone.
18
The best method is to raise one‟s hands and say, “Allahu Akbar” so
that a person begins raising the hands as he starts the takbīr and when
the hands are at shoulder level, he bows. It is mustaḥab to prolong the
words of takbīr until one reaches the next posture in every takbīr so that
no part of the ṣalāh is without dhikr. Thereafter, the hands are placed on
the knees, fingers apart, with back and neck extended, leg straight and
elbows out, although women keep them close, then one recites tasbih
three times.
19
The iʿtidāl is to return to the posture one was in before the rukuʿ,
whether one was standing or sitting. It is wājib to intend nothing by
one‟s movement except iʿtidāl.
20
In every rakʿah.
21
In every rakʿah and to intend nothing but sitting by one‟s movement.
Salah

46

13. Recite tashahhud at the end of ṣalāh.
14. Sitting therein (tashahhud).
15. Ṣalāh upon Nabi ¸ therein (tashahhud).
16. Salām.
22

17. To follow the sequence (of the above integral postures of
ṣalāh).

22
Ending the ṣalāh with salām. Someone who is not a masbūq
(latecomer) to a jamāʿah ṣalāh may sit as long as he wishes after the
imām‟s salām to supplicate, finishing with his own salām whenever he
wishes.
Salah

47

Description of the ṣalāh
Note: Description of the Ṣalāh:

Sunan Before Commencing the Ṣalāh:
To stand for the ṣalāh after the completion of the iqāmah, to
be in the first row, to make the row straight, especially for the
imām when he should enjoin upon the jamāʿah to do so and to fill
up the first row first, then the second, and so on.

Commencing the Ṣalāh:
One starts to make the takbīrat al-iḥrām with the intention
in the heart. It is mustaḥab to recite the duʿā iftitah after the
takbīrat al-iḥrām.
After the duʿā iftitaḥ, it is mustaḥab to recite the
taʿawwudh. Taʿawwudh is mustaḥab in every rakʿah and more
emphasized in the first rakʿah. Then a person recites Sūrah al-
Fātiḥah in every rakʿah and the basmalah is one of its verses.
One says “Āmīn” at the end of the al-Fātiḥah, when following an
imām, one says “Āmīn” when he does, and then a second time
when he completes his own recital of the al-Fātiḥah.
If one is the imām or praying alone, it is mustaḥab in the
first and second rakʿah only to recite one complete sūrah even if
it be short after the al-Fātiḥah. It is mustaḥab to recite the Qurʾān
in a tartīl (distinct and pleasant way) observing the rules of tajwīd
Salah

48

and to reflect upon its meanings and lessons. One recites a longer
sūrah in the first rakʿah than in the second.
Then one makes rukuʿ (bows) from the waist. The best way
is to raise one‟s hands and say, “Allahu akbar” so that a person
begins raising the hands as he starts the takbir and when the
hands are at shoulder level, he bows. It is mustaḥab to prolong
the words of takbir until one reaches the posture of rukuʿ.
Then one makes iʿtidāl (straightening up), the best way is to
raise the hand lifting them from the knees as one starts
straightening up, raising them to shoulder level and the head
together, saying, “samiʿallahu liman ḥamidah.” When one is
standing upright, one says, “Rabbanā lakal ḥamd.”
Then one makes sajdah (prostrates), the best way is to say,
“Allahu Akbar,” and to put the knees down first, then the hands,
and then the forehead and nose, keeping the hands directly under
one‟s shoulders, with the fingers together, extended towards the
direction of qiblah, and the hands uncovered. For men to
maintain a one span gap between the two knees and two feet
whilst women keep them together. For men to keep the stomach
away from the thighs, and forearms from the sides, whilst women
keep them together, and to recite “tasbīh” three times. It is
commendable to supplicate before Allah , while prostrating.
Then one raises the head and sits before prostrating a
second time, the best way is to say, “Allahu akbar,” as one raises
Salah

49

the head, to sit in “iftirāsh,” which is to place the left foot on its
side and to sit upon it while keeping the right foot on the bottom
of its toes, heel up. To place both one‟s hands on the thighs near
the knees, fingers extended and held together and to recite the
duʿā, “Rabbighfirlī, warḥamnī, wajburnī, warfaʿnī, warzuqnī,
wahdinī, waʿāfinī, waʿfuʿannī.”
Then one prostrates again just as before and after this one
raises the head, saying, “Allahu akbar,” as one first raises it,
prolonging the takbir until one is standing upright.
It is sunnah, here and in each rakʿah that is not followed by
the tashahhud, to briefly rest in the iftirāsh style of sitting before
rising. Then one rises, supported by both hands, palms down, and
prolonging the takbir until standing. This is called “jilsat al-
istirāhah” and is not done after “sajdah al-tilawah”.
Then one performs the second rakʿah of the ṣalāh just like
the first, except for the initial intention, the takbīrat al-iḥrām, and
duʿā iftitah.
If one‟s ṣalāh exceeds two rakʿahs, one sits in iftirāsh after
the first two rakʿahs and recites the tashahhud and the ṣalāh upon
the Nabi ¸, but not upon his family (which is done in the final
tashahhud). Then one rises, saying, “Allahu akbar,” and
supported on one‟s hands as before. When standing, one raises
the hands to shoulder level (which one does here, but not after
rising form the first or third rakʿah), and then goes on to perform
Salah

50

the remainder of the ṣalāh as one did in the second rakʿah, except
that one recites the al-Fātiḥah to oneself and does not recite a
sūrah after it.
One sits at the end of one‟s ṣalāh for the last tashahhud in
the “tawarruk” style of sitting, with one left posterior on the
ground and left foot on its side, emerging from under the right,
which is vertical.
In the two tashahhuds, the left hand rests on the left thigh
near the knee, its fingers extended and held together. The right
hand is similarly placed, but is held closed with its thumb
touching the side of the index finger, which alone is left
extended. One raises the index finger and points with it when one
says the words, “illallah,” in the tashahhud.

Closing the ṣalāh:
Then one says the final “salām”. The best way is to say,
“Assalāmu ʿalaykum waraḥmatullah,” and to turn the head to the
right enough to show the right cheek to those behind. One
thereby intends to finish the ṣalāh and intends to make salām to
the Angels and Muslims whether human or jinn on the right.
Then turns one‟s head to the left and repeat the salām, intending
to greet those on the left. The follower may intend one of the
salāms to be a response to the salām of the imām.
Salah

51

It is mustaḥab to make dhikr and duʿā silently after ṣalāh.
Al-Imām al-Shāfiʿī mentioned in al-Umm, “I prefer that the
imām and follower make dhikr after the salām, and do so silently,
unless the imām wants to be learned from, in which case he says
the dhikr aloud until he believes that the congregation has learned
from him, after which he will say it silently.”
The imām turns for dhikr and duʿā so that his right side is
towards the jamāʿah and his left side towards the qiblah. He
leaves his place as soon as he finishes. If there are no women (in
which case he waits for them to leave first). It is mustaḥab for the
followers to remain seated until the imām stands.

Salah

52

Three Degrees of Intention
Section: There are Three Degrees of Intention:
If the ṣalāh is farḍ, it is compulsory to intend:
23

a. The act of ṣalāh – the intention of performing ṣalāh.
b. The actual ṣalāh that is being offered e.g. Ẓuhr or ʿAṣr.
c. It being a farḍ ṣalāh.
If the ṣalāh is a periodic nafl like “rawātīb”
24
or it has a specific
reason
25
, it is compulsory to intend:
a. The act of ṣalāh – the intention of performing ṣalāh.
b. The actual ṣalāh that is being offered e.g. sunnah before
ṣubh or “Istisqāʾ” (ṣalāh seeking rain).
If the ṣalāh is a muṭlaq nafl,
26
it is compulsory to intend:
a. The act of ṣalāh – the intention of performing ṣalāh.


23
It is sufficient for a person to make intention to offer the farḍ ṣalāh of
Ẓuhr.
24
Those sunnah ṣalāh performed either before or after the five farḍ
ṣalāh.
25
Like the ṣalāh of ʿEid al-Fiṭr or ṣalāh al-istisqāʾ (seeking rain). It is
sufficient that a person makes intention to offer ṣalāh of „Eid al-Fiṭr or
al-istisqāʾ.
26
Those nafl ṣalāh that have no time or cause. A person performs them
when one wants for additional rewards. It is sufficient to merely make
the intention of performing ṣalāh for these ṣalāh.
Salah

53

The Conditions of Takbīrat al-iḥrām
Section: The Conditions of Takbīrat al-iḥrām are Sixteen:
1. That it is pronounced while standing in the farḍ ṣalāh.
2. That it be in Arabic.
3. That it be with the word “Allahu”.
4. That it be with the word “akbar”.
5. The sequence between these two words “Allahu akbar” is
followed.
6. Not to lengthen the hamzah of the word “Allah”.
27


27
By reciting it as “Āllahu akbar,” this can result in the meaning
changing.
Salah

54

7. Not to lengthen the letter of “ba” of “akbar”.
28

8. Not to double the letter of “ba”.
29

9. Not to add a “waw” sakin or mutaharrik between these two
words.
30

10. Not to add a “waw” before the word “Allah”.
11. Not to pause for a long or short while between these two
words.
12. To hear oneself uttering its entire letters.
31

13. Entering of the time of ṣalāh.
14. For it to occur while facing towards the qiblah.
15. Not to change even a single letter.
16. To delay the takbir of the maʾmūm (follower) till after the
takbir of the imām.


28
By reciting it as “Allahu akbār,” this can result in the meaning
changing.
29
By reciting it with the tashdīd.
30
By reciting it as “Allahū akbar” or “Allahu wakbar”.
31
That one can hear them oneself, given normal hearing and lack of
extraneous noise. There is no need to raise one‟s voice if there is lot of
noise.
Salah

55

The Conditions of Sūrah al-Fātiḥah
Section: The Conditions of Sūrah al-Fātiḥah are Ten:
1. Sequence.
2. Continuity.
32

3. To perfect (pronunciation of) it‟s letters.
4. To perfect it‟s tashdīds.
5. Not to pause for a long or short while with the intention of
terminating the recitation.
6. Reciting all its verses including the “basmalah”.
7. Not to commit a mistake that alters the meaning.
33

8. To recite it while standing in the farḍ ṣalāh.
34

9. To hear one‟s own recitation.

32
The al-Fātiḥah is not considered to be interrupted if a one replies to
the “Āmīn” of the imām, reminding him of the right ayat (verse) when
he errs, prostrates with the imām in “sajdah tilāwah”, forgetfully falls
silent or absentmindedly adds some dhikr in it.
33
If one omits one of the al-Fātiḥah‟s letters, fails to double a letter that
should be doubled, or substitutes a wrong letter for the right one, it
invalidates one‟s recital of that particular word, and one must recite that
word again. This will not invalidate one‟s ṣalāh unless it changes the
meaning and was done deliberately. Mistakes in a harakah (short vowel)
are not harmful as long as they do not alter the meaning.
34
Its entire letters should be recited while standing.
Salah

56

10. No foreign dhikr or recitation should be recited in-between
(the al-Fātiḥah).
Tashdīds of Sūrah al-Fātiḥah
Section: There are 14 tashdīds that are recited on various word of
Sūrah al-Fātiḥah which are demonstrated in the following
diagram:

Salah

57

Sunnah to Raise the Hands
Section: It is Sunnah to Raise the Hands in Four Places:
35

1. During the takbīrat al-iḥrām.
36

2. When going into rukūʿ.
37

3. When straightening up (iʿitidāl).
38

4. When standing up from the first tashahhud.



35
It is from the “sunan hayʾah” of the ṣalāh, the wisdom being to show
respect and reverence to Allah ,.
36
Begin raising the hands at the beginning of the takbīr and put them
down at the end of the takbīr, means that raising of the hands must be
simultaneous with the takbīr from the beginning till the end.
37
A person starts raising his hands at the beginning of takbīr and
prolongs the takbīr until he places his hands upon his knees, fingers
spread apart and backbone and head are straight.
38
A person begins raising his hand with the raising of the head and the
takbīr; when he straightens, he lowers his hands.
Salah

58

The Conditions of Sajdah
Section: The Conditions of Sajdah (Prostration) are Seven:
1. To prostrate upon seven limbs.
39

2. The forehead should be exposed.
40

3. To make sajdah by resting on the head.
41

4. Not to intend anything but sajdah.
42

5. Not to prostrate on something that moves with one‟s own
movement.
6. That one rear‟s be higher than one‟s head.
7. Remain motionless for a moment whilst prostrating.
The Seven Limbs of Prostration
The Seven Limbs of Prostration are:
The forehead, both palms, both knees and the portion under the
toes of each foot.

39
It is sunnah to place the nose on the ground, however, sajdah will be
in order if the nose does not touch the ground.
40
If one is wearing a bandage over the forehead because of an injury,
sajdah may be made on the bandage without the need of repeating it
afterwards with the condition that the bandage was put on while one
was in the state of purity.
41
The weight of the head and neck should be applied to the place of
sajdah so that the forehead is firmly stationed on the ground.
42
If one merely fell down after the iʿtidāl, this will not be regarded as
sajdah. The person will have to return to iʿtidāl and then go into sajdah.
Salah

59

Tashdīds of Tashahhud
Section: There are 21 tashdīds that are recited in tashahhud, five
are their completion and 16 are minimal of the tashahhud
43
, all
are demonstrated in the following diagram:

43
The minimal tashahhud is:


Salah

60


Tashdīds of ṣalāh Upon Nabi ¸
Section: There are 4 tashdīds for the minimal ṣalāh upon Nabi ¸:

Salām
Section: The minimal salām is “Assalāmu ʿalaykum”:
There is one tashdīd in salām:

Salah

61

The Times of ṣalāh
Salah

62

Section: The Times of ṣalāh are Five:
44

 The time of Ẓuhr begins after the sun descends from its
zenith (zawāl) and it ends when an object‟s shadow equals its
length in addition to the length of its shadow at the time of
zawāl.
 The time of ʿAṣr begins when the object‟s shadow equals its
length in addition to the length of its shadow at the time of
zawāl, and ends when the sun sets.
 The time of Maghrīb begins from sunset and ends with the
disappearance of the red horizon.
 The time of ʿIshāʾ begins from the setting of the red horizon
and it ends at ṣubh sadiq.
 The time of Ṣubh begins from the dawn until sunrise.

There are three types of horizons; red, yellow and white:
 The red horizon is at the time of Maghrīb, while the yellow
and white are at the time of ʿIshāʾ. It is sunnah to delay the
ṣalāh of ʿIshāʾ till the yellow and white horizons disappear.

44
It is best to pray every prayer at the beginning of its time, taking the
necessary steps at its outset, such as purification, clothing one‟s ʿawrah,
giving the adhan and iqamah, and then praying. If less than one rakʿah
of one‟s ṣalāh occurs within the proper time (meaning that one does not
raise one‟s head from the second sajdah of the rakʿah before the time
ends) and the remainder takes place after it, then the entire ṣalāh is
considered as qaḍāʾ. It is not permissible to intentionally delay the ṣalāh
until part of it is prayed after the time has terminated.
Salah

63

Times When the ṣalāh is ḥarām
Section: There are 5 times in a day during which it is ḥarām
45

to offer those ṣalāhs which do not have an immediate or
preceding cause:
46

1. At the time of sunrise until the sun rises to the extent of the
height of a spear.
2. At the time when the sun is at its zenith until it declines,
except on Fridays.
3. At the time the sun becomes yellow/pale until sunset.
4. After Ṣubh ṣalāh until sunrise.
5. After ʿAṣr ṣalāh until sunset.

45
It is neither ḥarām nor makrūh to offer ṣalāh within the Sanctuary of
Makkah at any time.
46
The ṣalāh is unlawful and invalid and it will not discharge a person
from a vow. It is permissible at the above times to offer ṣalāh that are
performed for a particular reason, such as the salat al-janazah (funeral
ṣalāh), taḥiyyat al-masjīd (greeting the mosque), sunnah after wuḍūʾ,
and is also permissible to make qaḍāʾ ṣalāh though one may not
perform the two rakʿahs that are sunnah before entering the state of
iḥrām.
Salah

64

The Pauses in ṣalāh
Section: The Pauses in ṣalāh are Six:
47

1. Between the takbīrat al-iḥrām and the “duʿā iftitah” (the
opening duʿā).
48

2. Between the “duʿā iftitah” (the opening duʿā) and
taʿawwudh
49
.
3. Between the taʿawwudh and Sūrah al-Fātiḥah.
4. Between the completion of Sūrah al-Fātiḥah and saying,
“Āmīn”.
5. Between “Āmīn” and the sūrah.
6. Between the sūrah and bowing (rukuʿ).


47
It is mustaḥab to pause for the duration of one tasbih (duration of
reciting one “subḥānallah”).
48
It is mustaḥab for the imām to remain silent for the time that a
follower can recite Sūrah al-Fātiḥah and for him to engage in the
recitation of the Qurʾān or duʿā silently.
49
Taʿawwudh is to recite “Aʿūdhubillahi minash shaiṭānir rajīm”.
Salah

65


Ṭumaʾnīnah
Section: There are Four Postures in Which Ṭumaʾnīnah
(Composure) is Compulsory:
1. In rukuʿ.
2. In iʿtidāl (when straightening up after rukuʿ).
3. In sajdah.
4. While sitting between the two sajdahs.
Ṭumaʾnīnah (composure) is a pause after movements to such an
extent that every limb remains in its place for the duration of
reciting one “subḥānallah”.

Salah

66

The Causes for Sajdah Sahw
Section: The Causes for Sajdah Sahw
50
(Prostration of
Forgetfulness) are Four:
1. Leaving out some of the “sunan abʿaḍ” (main sunnah), either
completely or partly.
51

2. To forgetfully do an action that would nullify the ṣalāh if it
was done intentionally.
52

3. To recite a verbal integral of ṣalāh in an inappropriate place.
53

4. To perform a physical integral with the possibility of it being
an extra integral.
54



50
The sajdah sahw, even if there are numerous reasons for it in one
ṣalāh, is only two sajdahs (prostrations).
51
If one misses a sunnat abʿaḍ (main sunnah) even purposely, one
performs sajdah sahw. If one misses anything besides a rukn (integral)
or sunnat abʿaḍ (main sunnah), then one does not postrate for it. If one
forgets the first tashahhud and stands up, it is not permissible to retun to
it. If one intentionally returns to it, this invalidates one‟s ṣalāh, but if
one returns to it absentmindedly or out of ignorance, one merely
prostrates for it, though one must stand up as soon as one remembers.
52
Such as turning the head, taking one or two steps, lengthening a short
integral like iʿtidāl or a little speech, provided it is not the type of action
whose unintentional performance also invalidates the ṣalāh such as
much speech or action, since doing it would in any case invalidate the
ṣalāh.
53
Such as reciting a part or all of the al-Fātiḥah or tashahhud at the
wrong place. This will not apply to the tasbīḥāt even though one did so
purposely.
54
When one is uncertain whether he or she has prayed three rakʿahs or
four, one should assume that he or she did not perform it.
Salah

67

¸
¸
The Sunan Abʿaḍ
Section: The Sunan Abʿaḍ
55
(Main Sunnahs) of ṣalāh are Seven:
1. The recitation of the first tashahhud.
56

2. The sitting therein (in the first tashahhud).
3. The recitation of ṣalāh upon Nabi ¸ therein (in the first
tashahhud).
57

4. The recitation of ṣalāh upon his family in the final tashahhud.
5. The recitation of duʿā Qunūt.
6. The recitation of ṣalāh and salām upon Nabi ¸ (in duʿā Qunūt).
7. The recitation of ṣalāh and salām upon his family and his
Companions therein (in duʿā Qunūt).

55
Sunan abʿaḍ are those sunnah acts that if omitted can be compensated
for by sajdah sahw. On the other hand, those sunnah acts that cannot be
compensated for by sajdah sahw are called sunan hayʾah.
56
If the imām left out the first tashahhud, it is not permissible for the
follower to act contrary to the imām i.e. the follower will have to also
follow the imām in this act.
57
If the imām lengthens the first tashahhud for a valid reason and the
follower completed the first tashahhud before the imām, the follower
should not continue and recite the ṣalāh upon the family of Nabī ¸,
rather he should occupy himself with duʿā.
Salah

68

The Factors Which Nullify the ṣalāh
Section: The Factors Which Nullify the ṣalāh are Fourteen:
1. Hadath (ritual impurity).
58

2. Impurity falling on the body or clothes
59
if not removed
immediately
60
without carrying it.
61

3. Exposing of the ʿawrah if it was not covered immediately.
62


58
Even unintentionally, if a person forgot to perform wuḍūʾ and offers a
ṣalāh, this ṣalāh will not be valid.
59
If an imām led a jamāʿah while there was impurity on his clothes, the
entire jamāʿah will have to repeat the ṣalāh if the impurity was visible to
others or if it was in such a place that all could have seen it. If it was not
visible, the imām alone will have to repeat the ṣalāh.
60
Not more than the minimum amount of one tasbih.
61
By removing the impurity – for example with the side of a stone or a
stick without carrying the stone or stick.
Salah

69

4. Intentionally uttering one or two letters which can be clearly
understood.
63

5. To break the fast intentionally (in ṣalāh).
64

6. To forgetfully eat a lot.
65

7. Three consecutive motions even if involuntarily.
66

8. Extra movement that is contrary to the habit of a sane
person.
67

9. An excessive strike of the hand.
68


62
When the ʿawrah of a person becomes exposed even slightly, the
ṣalāh is invalidated. However, if it was exposed because of wind and it
is covered up immediately with little movement, the ṣalāh remain valid.
If much movement is done to cover the exposed part, the ṣalāh will be
invalidated.
63
The ṣalāh is invalidated when two or more letters worth of sounds
such as laughter, crying, groaning, clearing the throat, blowing, sighing,
or similar are audible. If the need to cough arises involuntarily, a person
should try his utmost to suppress it. However if after trying hard, the
need still subsists, he may cough for relief even if a sound of two or
more syllables is formed.
64
Any action that invalidates the fast like inserting a stick into the body
cavity.
65
The ṣalāh is invalidated when any (even if a little) substance reaches
the body cavity intentionally. It also invalidates the ṣalāh if it occurs
absentmindedly or in ignorance of its prohibition, provided the amount
of the substance is commonly acknowledged to be much, though not
invalidated if it is little.
66
The ṣalāh is invalidated by adding, even if absentmindedly, a motion
that is not one of the actions of ṣalāh, provided it is both considered by
ʿurf (common acknowledgement) to be much and uninterruptedly
consecutive, such as three steps or successively moving three separate
body parts – like the head and two hands, though an up-and-down
motion is considered as just one – or three or more consecutive motions.
67
Such as jumping, it invalidates the ṣalāh.
Salah

70

10. To intentionally add an extra physical integral of ṣalāh.
69

11. To precede the imām in two physical integrals of ṣalāh.
70

12. To delay with the two integrals without an excuse.
71

13. The intention of terminating the ṣalāh by suspending its
termination on a foreign action.
72

14. By doubting its termination.
73

Sunan Rawatib

68
One or two slight movements do not invalidate the ṣalāh. If a person
only moves a finger e.g. to scratch an itching place on the body, the
ṣalāh does not break even if he moves his finger tip many times.
69
When a person intentionally performs extra integral e.g. three sajdahs
or two rukuʿs in one rakʿah.
70
To complete two integrals before the imām does invalidates the ṣalāh.
If one does so absentmindedly or in ignorance of its prohibition, it does
not invalidate the ṣalāh, but the rakʿah is not counted and one must now
add an additional rakʿah after the imām finishes with salām to complete
the ṣalāh.
71
Without an excuse, it is makrūh to lag behind the imām until he
completed an integral, and it invalidates one‟s ṣalāh to lag behind the
imām until he completed two integrals. If the imām bows and
straightens-up while without excuse one has not yet bowed, it does not
invalidate one‟s ṣalāh until the imām actually begins going down
towards prostration and one still not bowed.
72
To decide to break one‟s ṣalāh if such and such a thing happens,
regardless whether the event will definitely occur during the ṣalāh or
whether it may happen, such as, “I will stop if Zayd enters.”
73
Not to know whether one has terminated or not; means one hesitates
in one‟s heart, saying, “Shall I stop intending ṣalāh or continue?” The
mere thought of how it would be if one were to hesitate during the ṣalāh
is of no consequence, rather the occurrence of doubt that negates one‟s
resolve and certainty is what is considered here.
Salah

71

Note: Sunan Rawātib – The Sunnah ṣalāh Before and After
the Farḍ ṣalāh:
The optimal numbers of these are:
 Two rakʿahs before Ṣubh ṣalāh.
 Four rakʿahs before and after Ẓuhr ṣalāh.
 Four rakʿahs before ʿAsr ṣalāh.
 Two rakʿahs after Maghrīb ṣalāh.
 Two rakʿahs after ʿIshāʾ ṣalāh.

The sunnah muakkadah (emphasized sunnah) consist of ten
rakʿahs:
 Two rakʿahs before Ṣubh ṣalāh.
 Two rakʿahs before and after Ẓuhr ṣalāh.
 Two rakʿahs after Maghrīb ṣalāh.
 Two rakʿahs after ʿIshāʾ ṣalāh.

It is recommended to pray two rakʿahs before Maghrīb ṣalāh.
The sunan of Jumuʿah are the same as for Ẓuhr ṣalāh.
Witr ṣalāh
Witr ṣalāh – The Final ṣalāh at Night:
The best time for Witr is after the sunnah of ʿIshāʾ ṣalāh, unless
one intends to offer the Taḥajjud ṣalāh. Witr is a minimum of one
rakʿah and the optimal is to perform eleven rakʿahs. Three
rakʿahs is the minimal optimal number of rakʿah and one
Salah

72

separates them by completing two rakʿahs with salām and then
performs the final rakʿah. One recites Sūrah al-ʿAlā in the first
rakʿah, Sūrah al-Kāfirūn in the second rakʿah, and Sūrah al-
Ikhlaṣ, Sūrah al-Falāq and Sūrah al-Nās in the third rakʿah.

Tarāwīḥ ṣalāh:
It is sunnah to perform tarāwīḥ, which is twenty rakʿahs of group
prayer on each night of Ramaḍān.

Ḍuḥā ṣalāh:
It is sunnah to pray the Ḍuḥā ṣalāh (midmorning prayer), which
minimum of two rakʿahs, is optimum eight rakʿahs, and a
maximum of twelve. One completes a pair of rakʿahs with salām.

Taḥajjud ṣalāh:
Nafl ṣalāh (superogatory prayer) at night is an emphasized
sunnah, even if one can only do a little. The last part of the night
is the best time to offer taḥajjud ṣalāh.

Taḥiyyat al-masjid:
It is sunnah for one who enters a masjid to greet the masjid by
praying two rakʿahs each time he enters. One is no longer entitled
to pray it after sitting.

Salah

73

The Intention of Being an Imām
Section: The Intention of Being an Imām is Compulsory
74
in
Four Conditions:
1. The Friday Prayer.
75

2. To repeat the farḍ or nafl ṣalāh in its time hoping for reward.
76

3. A vowed ṣalāh that is to be performed in congregation.
77

4. A ṣalāh offered before its time due to rain.
78


74
The intention of being an imām is compulsory upon the imām during
takbīrat al-iḥrām. As for the follower, the intention of being a follower
is wājib if he intends to follow the imām even in the middle of ṣalāh
besides in these four conditions in which case it is wājib for him to
intend being a follower during takbīrat al-iḥrām.
75
If the imām leaves out the intention of being an imām during takbīrat
al-iḥrām, his ṣalāh will not be valid.
76
To repeat the farḍ ṣalāh that was performed in its time or nafl ṣalāh,
which was sunnah to perform in jamāʿah (except Witr ṣalāh in the
month of Ramaḍān because there is no repetition for Witr). And to
repeat them (once) both on their time with jamāʿah (in the entire ṣalāh)
hoping for the reward of jamāʿah.
77
If a person leaves out the intention of being an imām during takbīrat
al-iḥrām, his ṣalāh alone is valid but he will be sinful.
78
A group of people who are gathered because of rain and they perform
jamaʿ taqdim, if the imām left out the intention of being an imām, his
ṣalāh will not be valid.
Salah

74

The Conditions for Following an Imām
Section: The Conditions for Following an Imām
79
are Eleven:
1. The maʾmūm (follower) shouldn‟t know of any invalidity of
the ṣalāh of his imām due to ritual impurity or anything else.
80


79
Ṣalāh jamāʿah is farḍ al-kifayah (communal obligation) upon all
males, free persons, muqīm (non-travellers), sane individuals and those
that have reached the age of puberty for the five farḍ ṣalāh and sunnah
for female, such that the rite of the ṣalāh be public in a manner that the
manifestation of obedience to Allah‟s command are evident. If held in
houses where the rite of ṣalāh is not public, the obligation remains
unfulfilled though a house with a sign on it is sufficient. It is best for
men to offer ṣalāh in jamāʿah at the masjid and better for women to pray
at home than at the masjid.
80
It is valid for a Shāfiʿī to follow an imām of a different madhhab
whenever the follower is not certain that the imām has omitted an
obligatory component of ṣalāh. However, if certain that the imām has
omitted one, it is not valid to follow him. The validity is based solely on
the madhhab of the follower as to whether or not something
obligatory has been omitted. Example, a Shāfiʿī followed a Hanafi
imām who touched his private part. According to the madhhab of the
Salah

75

2. It should not be such that according to the madhhab of the
maʾmūm, the ṣalāh of the imām is invalid and has to be
repeated.
81

3. The imām should not be a follower.
82

4. Nor an illiterate person.
83

5. The maʾmūm should not stand ahead of the imām.
84

6. The maʾmūm should be aware of the movements of his
imām.
85

7. The imām and the maʾmūm are in the same masjid
86
or
approximately 300 arm lengths apart.
87


follower the wuḍūʾ of the imām is invalidated but not in the madhhab of
the imām.
81
It should not be such a follower following the ṣalāh of a person which
will have to be repeated, like a person offering ṣalāh with tayammum
because of cold, a muqīm who made tayammum in a place where
normally water can be found easily or a person who does not find
neither water for wuḍūʾ nor earth for tayammum. In these situations, the
ṣalāh should be repeated, although the ṣalāh was valid according to the
madhhab of the imām.
82
It invalidates one‟s ṣalāh to take a maʾmūm as one‟s imām when the
maʾmūm is concurrently praying behind an imām, though if his imām
finishes with salām and the maʾmūm is still praying, he may then be
taken as one‟s imām.
83
A qari, one who recites Qurʾān properly, may not follow one who is
unable to recite Al-Fātiḥah properly, irrespective of him being unable to
recite other verses properly beside Al-Fātiḥah or not.
84
The follower‟s ṣalāh is invalid if his heel is in front of the imām‟s.
His heel should be behind the imām‟s heel, even if it be a little, but not
more than three arms length, in which case, the merit of jamāʿah is lost.
85
Whether by seeing the imām, or hearing his muballigh (the person
who repeats the imām‟s takbīr in a loud voice so people can hear).
86
Whenever an imām leads a follower in a masjid, the jamāʿah is valid
even if they are at a distance from each other. Multiple interconnected
Salah

76

8. The maʾmūm intends to follow the imām or the
congregation.
88

9. The imām and the maʾmūm conform to each other in the
movement of ṣalāh.
89

10. The maʾmūm should not differ with the imām regarding those
sunnahs which do not permit contradiction.
90


masjid openings unto each other are considered as one masjid. So too, is
the masjid‟s outer courtyard, even when there is a walkway between the
courtyard and masjid.
87
When the imām and maʾmūm are not in a masjid, but are in an open
expanse such as a desert or large house, their jamāʿah is valid as long as
the distance between them does not exceed approximately 144 meters.
If they are farther apart than this, their jamāʿah is not valid.
88
The follower intends to follow the imām whether at the takbīrat al-
iḥrām or thereafter. If the follower neglects to do so, his ṣalāh is as if he
had performed it alone. It invalidates one‟s ṣalāh to purposely omit the
intention to follow the imām while at the same time praying behind him
and following his motions by awaiting them for a long period of time.
Awaiting the motion of the imām for a short period of time or
performing one‟s own ṣalāh simultaneously with his does not invalidate
it.
89
A person who is offering a farḍ ṣalāh cannot follow a person who is
offering a salat al-kusuf (eclipse ṣalāh). The jamāʿah is valid when (1)
the imām is performing a farḍ ṣalāh and the follower is performing a
nafl ṣalāh or vice versa, (2) the imām is performing the Ẓuhr and the
follower is praying the ṣubh or vice versa, (3) the imām is praying while
sitting and the follower is praying standing, or vice versa and, (4) the
imām is performing qaḍāʾ ṣalāh while the follower is performing his
current one or vice versa.
90
If the imām omits a sunnah that the maʾmūm cannot add without
considerably lagging behind, such as the first tashahhud, then it is
unlawful for the maʾmūm to perform the missing sunnah. He must
follow the imām. If he performs it anyway intentionally knowing that it
is unlawful, it invalidates his ṣalāh. If the sunnah omitted by the imām
can be done without much of a lag, such as jilsat al-istirāḥah, then the
Salah

77

11. The maʾmūm should follow his imām.
91



The Forms of Following the Imām
Section: The Forms of Following the Imām are Nine:
Five of which are valid:
1. For a male to follow a male.
2. For a female to follow a male.
3. For a hermaphrodite to follow a male.
4. For a female to follow a hermaphrodite.
5. For a female to follow a female.

maʾmūm may add it without ceasing his participation in the jamāʿah.
This also applies to when the imām omits the Qunūt in Subh ṣalāh,
which the maʾmūm may perform it if he can catch up with the imām
before the imām raises his head from second sajdah. If the imām raises
his head before the maʾmūm makes sajdah even once and he has not
intended to cease his participation in the jamāʿah, then the maʾmūm´s
ṣalāh is invalid.
91
It invalidates one‟s ṣalāh to say takbīrat al-iḥrām simultaneously with
the imām, or to be uncertain as to whether one did so or not. It is
makrūh to perform some other part of the ṣalāh simultaneously with the
imām, thereby losing the merit of jamāʿah.
Salah

78

Four of which are invalid:
1. A man following a woman.
2. A man following a hermaphrodite.
3. A hermaphrodite following a woman.
4. A hermaphrodite following a hermaphrodite.

The Conditions of Jamaʿ Taqdim
Section: The Conditions of Jamaʿ Taqdīm
92
are Four:
1. To begin with the first ṣalāh.
93

2. To intend joining the ṣalāhs.
94


92
It is permissible to join Ẓuhr ṣalāh and ʿAsr ṣalāh during the time of
either of them. Similarly it is permissible to join the Maghrīb ṣalāh and
Isha ṣalāh, provided one joins them during a journey in which ṣalāh
may be shortened or because of severe rain.
93
If one prays the second of the two ṣalāhs before the first, then that
ṣalāh is invalid and must be repeated after the first, if one still wants to
join them.
Salah

79

3. Performing them consecutively.
95

4. The continuity of the excuse.
96


The Conditions of Jamaʿ Taʾkhir
Section: The Conditions of Jamaʿ Taʾkhīr are Two:
1. To have the intention of delaying a ṣalāh up-to after its time
and to have this intention in its proper time.
97

2. The remaining of the excuse until the completion of the
second ṣalāh.


94
That the intention to join the two ṣalāhs occurs before finishing the
first, either coinciding with the takbīrat al-iḥrām or occurring during
the ṣalāh.
95
Not to pause at length between them.
96
That continues until one finishes both ṣalāhs.
97
To make the intention before the end of the first ṣalāh‟s time by an
interval which could contain at least one rakʿah. If one neglects this
intention, one has sinned, and praying the first ṣalāh during the second
ṣalāh‟s time is considered qaḍāʾ.
Salah

80

The Conditions of Qasr
Section: The Conditions of Qaṣr (to shorten the ṣalāh)
98
are
Seven:
1. His journey should be at least two marhalahs
99
(approximately
81 kilometers one way).
2. The journey should be a permissible one in Sharīʿah.
100

3. Knowledge of the permissibility of qaṣr.
4. Intention of qaṣr during takbīrat al-iḥrām.
101

5. The ṣalāh should be a four rakʿahs ṣalāh.

98
It is permissible to shorten the Ẓuhr, ʿAsr, and Isha ṣalāh to two
rakʿahs each. To shorten the ṣalāh of a musāfir (except a sailor and a
perpetual traveller) is more virtuous if the journey reaches three
marhalahs.
99
The journey‟s destination must be known. If a wife travelling with her
husband or a soldier with his leader does not know the destination, they
may not shorten their ṣalāh as long as they have not yet travelled the
distance that permits shortening. When they have travelled it, then only
may they shorten it. If they know the destination and the journey meets
the condition, then they may shorten their ṣalāhs from the beginning of
the journey.
100
Travelling for a reason that is not disobedience to Allah , as there is
no concession to shorten ṣalāh on such a journey.
101
It not being valid if made after takbīrat al-iḥrām.
Salah

81

6. The continuity of travel till the completion of the two rakʿah
ṣalāh.
102

7. That he should not follow one who is performing ṣalāh
completely in any portion of his ṣalāh.


102
The ṣalāh takes place from start to finish while on the journey. If
one‟s vehicle arrives before the ṣalāh is completed, one will have to
perform the full ṣalāh.
Salat al-Jumu’ah

82

Salat al-Jumuʿah

The Conditions of Jumuʿah
Section: The Conditions of Jumuʿah
1
are Six:
1. The complete ṣalāh be performed in the time of Ẓuhr.
2

2. It should be within a district of the town.
3

3. To perform the ṣalāh in congregation.
4. There should be forty free males who are mature and
permanent residents of the town.
4

5. No other congregation of Jumuʿah in the same town should be
offered either before it or at the same time.
5


1
To attend the ṣalāh of Jumuʿah is farḍ ʿayn. It is the most virtues of
ṣalāh, and its day, Jumuʿah, is the best day of the week.
2
If the jamāʿah commenced the Jumuʿah ṣalāh late and they doubt
before commencing if they will be able to finish it within its time, then
they must begin it as a Ẓuhr ṣalāh.
3
In places where there is no hardship upon anyone to pray at one
location.
4
Permanent residents means that they live there and do not leave except
when they need to. The minimum according to Imām Abū ḥanīfah
rahimahullah is three participants besides the imām.
Salat al-Jumu’ah

83

6. To deliver two khuṭbahs before the ṣalāh.
Sunan and Adab of Jumuʿah
Note: Sunan and Adab of Jumuʿah:
 It is mustaḥab to perform a sunnah bath and makrūh not to do
so before going to the Jumuʿah ṣalāh, though it may be
performed anytime after dawn.
 It is also mustaḥab to clean the teeth with miswāk, trim the
nails, remove body hair, eliminate offensive odours, and
wear perfume and one‟s finest clothes (white being the best).
 To arrive early to the masjid, the best time being from dawn
on.
 To come on foot in tranquility and dignity, and not to ride to
the masjid unless there is an excuse.
 To sit near to the imām and to recite dhikr, Qurʾān and ṣalāh
in abundance upon Nabi ¸.
 It is recommended to recite Sūrah al-Kahf and ṣalāh upon
Nabi ¸ on the night before Jumuʿah and during its day.
 It is recommended to supplicate to Allah , excessively on
Jumuʿahs, seeking the moment when duʿās are answered.


5
There be no other Jumuʿah ṣalāh prior to or simultaneous with the
takbīrat al-iḥrām of the ṣalāh. That jamāʿah where the intention was
made later, will have to perform Ẓuhr ṣalāh.
Salat al-Jumu’ah

84

¸
The Integrals of the Two Khuṭbahs
Section: The Integrals of the Two Khuṭbahs are Five:
1. Praising Allah , in both the khuṭbahs.
6

2. Ṣalāh upon Nabi ¸ in both the khuṭbahs.
7

3. Enjoining taqwa in both the khuṭbahs.
8

4. Recitation of one verse of the Qurʾān in one of the khuṭbahs.
9

5. To make duʿā for the believers, males and females in the
second khuṭbah.
10



6
Saying “Alhamdulillah” (praise be to Allah) i.e. this particular
utterance being prescribed.
7
Ṣalāh upon Nabī ¸ (Blessings on the Prophet ¸), which is also a
prescribed utterance.
8
Enjoining taqwa (fear of Allah ,), for which a particular expression is
not prescribed, it being sufficient to say, “Obey Allah”.
9
That conveys an intended meaning, such as a promise, threat,
exhortation, or similar.
10
The duʿā must be for their ākhirah (hereafter) as duʿās for this world
alone do not fulfil the integral of the khuṭbah.
Salat al-Jumu’ah

85

The Conditions for Delivering the Two Khuṭbahs
Section: The Conditions for Delivering the Two Khuṭbahs are
Ten:
1. Purity from minor and major ritual impurities.
11

2. Purity from impurity on the clothes, body and place.
3. Covering the ʿawrah (private parts).
12

4. To stand; this applies to those who have the ability to.
5. To sit between the two khuṭbahs for the duration that one
pauses between two postures in ṣalāh.
6. Continuity between the two khuṭbahs.

11
If the khāṭib (speaker) breaks his wuḍūʾ during khutbah, the khutbah
has to be repeated. But there is no harm if the khāṭib breaks his wuḍūʾ
after delivering both the khutbahs and before performing ṣalāh.
12
The khāṭib‟s ʿawrah (private parts) should be covered. However, this
is not a condition for the listener (for the validity of the khutbah).
Similarly, the conditions of purity, to be in the place of ṣalāh and to
understand the khutbah are not conditions for the maʾmūm.
Salat al-Jumu’ah

86

7. Continuity between the two khuṭbahs and the ṣalāh.
13

8. The khuṭbah should be in the Arabic language.
14

9. Forty people should hear the khuṭbah.
15

10. It should be done in the time of Ẓuhr.

13
The pause between these integrals should not be too long but should
rather be according to the common understanding of people and not
more than the shortest two rakʿahs of ṣalāh.
14
All the integrals of the khuṭbah should be in the Arabic Language.
15
Forty people including an imām.
Salat al-Jumu’ah

87

The Sunan of the Khuṭbah
Note: The Sunan of the Khuṭbah:
 The Khāṭib (speaker) stand on a minbar (pulpit) or a high
place and that it be to the right of the miḥrab (prayer niche)
and that the khāṭib stand on the right side of the minbar.
 The khāṭib says, “Assalāmu ʿalaykum” to those present when
he enters the masjid and again when he ascends the minbar
and reaches his seat there.
 The khāṭib sits until the muadhdhīn has completed the second
adhān.
 When speaking, the khāṭib lean on a sword, bow or stick
which is in his left hand. It is desirable for him to put his
other hand on the minbar. If he does not have a sword or the
like, he keeps his hand still by placing the right upon the left,
or dropping them to his sides. He does not move them or
fidget with one, as the aim is stillness and humility.
 The khāṭib face the jamāʿah during both khuṭbahs and should
not turn to the right or left during the khuṭbahs, for it is a
reprehensible innovation. It is desirable for the listener to
face the khāṭib.

Janazah
88

Janazah

Four Things Compulsory for the Deceased
Section: There are Four Things Compulsory for the Preparation
of the Deceased:
1

1. To wash the deceased.
2

2. To shroud the deceased.
3

3. To perform ṣalāh upon the deceased.
4

4. To bury the deceased.
5


1
For the Muslim deceased who did not die in the state of iḥrām nor as a
martyr. When a person dies, it is mustaḥab (recommended) that his
closest maḥram (unmarriageable kin) closes his eyes and jaws in order
to make his joints flexible, gently removes his clothes and covers him
with a light cloth and places something heavy on his stomach.
2
It is mustaḥab that the one washing the deceased be trustworthy so that
he can be relied on to wash the deceased completely and so forth. If he
notices something good, it is sunnah to mention it, but if he notices
something bad, it is unlawful to mention it as this is backbiting.
3
It is ḥarām to look at the ʿawrah of the deceased or touch it except
with a cloth. It is mustaḥab not to look at or directly touch the other
parts of the body save with a cloth.
4
It is wājib to perform ṣalāh over the deceased. However, it is ḥarām to
give a bath and to offer ṣalāh upon a martyr. The obligation is fulfilled
if a single Muslim male who has reached the age of mumayyiz
(discrimination) prays over the deceased. It is recommended to perform
the janazah ṣalāh (funeral prayer) in a jamāʿah (group). It is mustaḥab to
pray it at a masjid and makrūh to offer the ṣalāh at a cemetery.
Janazah
89


Washing the Deceased
Section: The minimum wash is to pass water over the entire
body and the best is to wash the private organs, to remove filth
from the nose, to wash the limbs of wuḍūʾ, to rub the body with
lotus leaves and to pour water over the body thrice.
6



5
Then the deceased is buried obligatorily. It is best to bury him in the
cemetery.
6
It is wājib for the one washing the deceased to cover the ʿawrah of the
deceased. It is sunnah that no one be present except him (one washing)
and his assistant. Incense should be burned from the start of washing till
the finish. It is best to wash the body under a roof, and best that cold
water be used, heating it when necessary so as to remove filth that could
not otherwise be removed or when the weather is cold, since the
deceased suffers from it just as a living person would.
Janazah
90

Shrouding the Deceased
Section: The minimum shrouding is one cloth that covers the
whole body. The perfect shroud for a male is three cloths and for
a female, a shirt, a scarf, an upper garment and two cloths.
7


7
It is mustaḥab to scent the shroud with incense, to sprinkle on it an
aromatic compound of camphor, reed perfume etc., to place cotton and
perfume on the apertueres of the body such as the eyes, mouth, nostril,
and ears and on places that touch the ground in prostration, and to
perfume the entire body except if a person dies while in a state of iḥrām
.
Janazah
91

¸
The Integrals of ṣalāh Janazah
Section: The Integrals of ṣalāh Janazah (Funeral Prayer) are
Seven:
8

1. Intention.
9

2. Four takbirs.
10

3. To stand for those who are able.
4. Recitation of Sūrah al-Fātiḥah.
11

5. Ṣalāh upon Nabi ¸ after the second takbir.
12


8
The conditions of janāzah ṣalāh (funeral prayer) are the same as other
ṣalāh, but in addition require: that the deceased‟s body has been washed
before the ṣalāh and that the imām and the maʾmūm do not stand ahead
of the body during the ṣalāh.
9
It suffices that one merely intends to pray four takbīrs over the
particular deceased person as a farḍ kifāyah act. The intention must
coincide with the takbīrat al-iḥrām.
10
One says, “Allahu Akbar”, four times in the janāzah ṣalāh, raising
one‟s hand to shoulder level at each one, and it is mustaḥab each time to
fold the right hand over the left.
11
After takbīrat al-iḥrām, it is wājib to recite Sūrah al-Fātiḥah. It is
mustaḥab to recite taʿawwudh before it and “Amin” after it, but not to
recite the “du„ā iftitah” or a sūrah therein.
12
It is wājib to recite ṣalāh upon Nabī ¸ after which it is sunnah to
supplicate for the believer. It is also sunnah to recite ṣalāh upon the
Janazah
92

6. Duʿā for the deceased after the third takbir.
13

7. Salām.
14


The Grave
Section: The minimum depth for a grave is a hole that conceals
the odour of the body and protects it from animals. The perfect
depth is the height of a man with his arms raised and fingers
open, his chest should be placed on the soil, and it is wājib to
make him (the deceased) face the qiblah.
15



family of Rasulullah ¸ and to say, “Alhamdulillah” before the ṣalāh
upon Nabī ¸.
13
The supplication for the deceased, the minimum being, “O Allah,
forgive this deceased”.
14
Then one says, “Assalāmu ʿalaykum” twice, the first being wājib and
the second sunnah.
15
It is mustaḥab for the person burying the deceased: (1) to say,
“Bismillahi wa ʿala millati Rasūlillah ¸“, (2) to supplicate to Allah for
the forgiveness of the deceased, (3) to place a block as a pillow for him
and to pull-back the shroud enough to lay his cheek directly on the
surface of the block and, (4) to place the deceased upon his right side.
Janazah
93

The Exhumation of the Deceased
Section: There are Four Factors That Permit the Exhumation
of the Deceased:
1. To give a bath as long as the (body of the) deceased has not
decomposed.
16

2. To make the deceased face towards the qiblah.
17

3. For wealth if it was buried with the deceased.
18

4. For a woman when her foetus is buried with her and there is
a possibility that it is still alive.
19



16
It is wājib to exhume a deceased who was buried without been given
a bath or tayammum contrary if the deceased was buried without being
shrouded. In such a case he should not be exhumed.
17
As long as the body of the deceased has not decomposed.
18
It is wājib to exhume a deceased even after the body of the deceased
has decomposed; to take that wealth that has been buried with the
deceased whether the owner demands it or not.
19
That foetus which is six months of age or more because it is
necessary to remove a living baby from the womb of the deceased
before burial.
Janazah
94


Seeking Assistance
Section: There are Four Rulings for Seeking Assistance:
1. Permissible.
2. Undesirable.
3. Makrūh (disliked).
4. Wājib (compulsory).
 It is permissible to ask for water to be brought close.
20

 It is undesirable to ask for water to be poured towards the
one making wuḍūʾ.
21

 It is makrūh for someone else to wash the limbs.
 It is wājib for a sick person who is incapable.
22


20
For the purpose of making wuḍūʾ.
21
Because this is the ʿibadah (act of worship), it is preferable to show
the humility and slavery in the ʿibadah and this is attained by doing it by
oneself.
22
It is wājib for one who is incapable to seek assistance even though by
paying the normal salary for that task.

95


96









Zakah


__
Zakah
97

Zakah

The Wealth upon Which Zakāh is Compulsory
Section: The Wealth upon Which Zakāh is Compulsory are
Six Types:
1

1. Livestock.
2

2. Money.
3

3. Crops.
4


1
Zakāh is wājib on every Muslim (male, female, adult or child) who has
possessed a zakāh-payable amount for one lunar year.
2
Zakāh on livestock is limited to camels, cattle, sheep and goats. Zakāh
is wājib when one has owned (1) a zakāh-payable number of livestock,
(2) for one lunar year and (3) has been grazing them on unowned open
range pasturage for the entire year. There is no zakāh on cattle that were
fed fodder or grain only even if they could have otherwise been grazed.
3
Zakāh is wājib for anyone who has possessed the zakāh-payable
amount of gold or silver for one lunar year. Niṣab, the minimum that
necessitates zakāh for gold is 20 mithqals (84.8 grams), on which 2.5%
is due and for silver is 200 dirhams (594 grams), on which 2.5% is due.
While there is a considerable difference between the value of the gold
and silver zakāh minimum, the minimum for monetary currency should
correspond with that of silver, since it is more beneficial for the poor.
4
The zakāh for crops is only on the staple types that people cultivate,
dry, and store, such as wheat, barley, millet, rice etc. There is no zakāh
on fruit except for raw dates and grapes. There is no zakāh on
vegetables nor is there zakāh on seasonings such as cumin or coriander
Zakah
98

4. Wealth acquired from business in which two and half percent
of the value of the commodity should be discharged.
5

5. Treasure troves.
6

6. Mines.
7


since the aim in using them is preparation of food, not nourishment. The
minimal quantity on which zakāh is payable for crops is 618.8
kilograms of net dried weight, free of husks or chaff. The zakāh for
crops that have been watered without effort, as by rain and the like, is
10 percent of the crop. The zakāh for crops that have been watered with
effort, such as on land irrigated by ditches is 5 percent of the crop.
One is obligated to pay zakāh as soon as one possesses the zakāh-
payable amount of grain, or when the ripeness and wholeness of a
zakāh-payable amount of dates or grapes is apparent, otherwise, one is
not obligated.
5
Zakāh on trade goods is wājib for anyone who: (1) has possessed trade
goods for a year, (2) whose value at the zakāh year‟s end equals or
exceeds the zakāh minimum of gold or silver, (3) that the trade goods
have been acquired through a transaction, or received as a gift given in
return for something else, or such as an article rented from someone in
order to rent them out to others at a profit, or land rented from someone
in order to rent it out to others at a profit and, (4) that at the time of
acquisition, the owner intended to use the goods for trade.
6
An immediate zakāh of twenty percent is due when one finds a
treasure trove that was buried in pre-Islamic time or by non-Muslims,
ancient or modern, if it amounts to the zakāh minimum and the land is
not owned. If such a treasure is found on owned land, it belongs to the
owner of the land. If found in a masjid or street, or if it was buried in
Islamic times, it is considered as a lost and found article.
7
A zakāh of 2.5 percent is immediately due on (1) the zakāh minimum
or more of gold or silver (excluding anything else such as iron, lead,
crystal, emerald, or other, on which there is no zakāh), (2) extracted
from a mine located on land permissible for the miner to work or owned
by him, and, (3) that this amount of ore has been gathered by working at
the site one time, or several times uninterrupted by abandoning or
neglecting the project. The zakāh is only paid after the ore is refined
into metal.
Zakah
99

The Zakāh of ʿEid al-Fitr
Note: The Zakāh of ʿEid al-Fiṭr:

 The zakāh of ʿEid al-Fiṭr is wājib for every free Muslim,
male, female or child, provided that one has the necessary
amount of food (2.036 kgs of wheat) or in money value
thereof for the day of ʿEid for himself and those whom one is
obliged to support, what one needs to clothe them, and in
excess of one‟s debts and housing expenses.
 The Zakāh of ʿEid al-Fiṭr becomes wājib when the sun sets
on the night before the ʿEid.
 The zakāh of ʿEid al-Fiṭr consists of 2.036 kgs of the main
staple of the area in which it is given, of the kinds of crops on
which zakāh is payable (if the main staple is bread, only
wheat may be given).
 It is permissible to give the zakāh of ʿEid al-Fiṭr to deserving
recipients anytime during Ramaḍān, though the best time is
on the day of ʿEid al-Fiṭr before the ṣalāh. It is not
permissible to delay giving it until after the day of the ʿEid,
that is one may give it until sunset, and is a sin to delay until
after this, and one must make it up.


Zakah
100

The Eight Categories of Recipients
Note: The Eight Categories of Recipients:

1. Faqīr (destitute) – someone who does not have wealth or
earning that is sufficient for himself.
2. Miskīn (poor) – someone who has something to spend for his
needs but it is not sufficient.
3. ʿĀmil – Zakāh collector.
4. Muallafat al-qulūb – those whose hearts are to be reconciled.
5. Riqāb – those slaves who are purchasing their freedom.
6. Those in debt
7. Sabīlullah (those fighting for Allah) – people enganged in
Islāmic military operations for whom no salary has been
allotted in the army roster.
8. Ibn al-sabīl – the traveller in need of money.



101


102









Saum


__
Saum

103

Saum

Fasting of Ramaḍān
Section: Fasting of Ramaḍān Becomes Compulsory With the
Attainment of One of Five Things:
1. On completion of thirty days of Shaʿban.
2. By sighting the moon for the person who sees it, even though
he is a fāsiq (sinner).
1

3. The testimony of a just person (non-fāsiq) for those who do
not sight it.
2


1
For those who do not see it, it only becomes wājib when the sighting is
established by the testimony of an upright witness.
2
The testimony of a single witness that the new moon has been seen is
sufficient to establish that the month of Ramaḍān has come, provided
the witness is upright (male, and responsible for the duties of Islam
which excludes boys who have reached the age of discernment but not
puberty) and together with the decree of the ruler.
Saum

104

4. The informing of a just person whose information is reliable,
whether the heart is inclined to it being or not, and also with
the information of an unreliable source if one is inclined to it
being true.
5. With the perception that Ramaḍān has commenced (this is) for
that person who is doubtful of it.
3



3
If it is difficult to learn which month it is, for someone imprisoned or
the like such as someone being held in a dark place who cannot tell
night from day, or someone who does not know when Ramaḍān has
come because of being in a land without habituations or people who
know when it is, then such a person is obliged to reckon Ramaḍān as
best as he can and to fast it. Such a fast is valid if it remains unknown as
to whether the month fasted actually coincided with Ramaḍān, or if it
did coincide with it, or if the month fasted occurred after it, though if
the month fasted was before Ramaḍān, it is not valid.
Saum

105

The Conditions for the Validity of Fasting
Section: The Conditions for the Validity of Fasting are Four:
1. Islām .
4

2. Sane.
3. Purity from haiḍ (menstruation).
5

4. Knowledge of its appropriate time.

:
The Conditions for Fasting Becomes Wājib

4
A non-Muslim will not be asked to fast nor would it be valid if he did,
though he is punished in the next life for not doing so.
5
A woman whose period ends during a day of Ramaḍān is mustaḥab to
fast the rest of the day and is wājib to make-up the fast and the fast-days
prior to it when missed during her period or postnatal bleeding.
Saum

106

Section: The Conditions for Fasting Becoming Wājib are
Five:
1. Islām .
2. Mukallaf (reaching the age of puberty and sanity).
6

3. Ability.
7

4. Health.
8

5. Muqīm (non traveller).
9



6
A child of seven is ordered to fast, and at ten is beaten for not fasting
(not severely, but so to discipline the child, and not more than three
blows).
7
One is capable of bearing the fast. Someone whom fasting exhausts
because of advanced years or having an illness from which he is
unlikely to recover are not required to fast.
8
The illness that permits not fasting being that which fasting would
worsen, delay recovery from, or cause one considerable harm with, the
same dispensation applying to someone who needs to take medicine
during the day that breaks the fast and that he can not delay taking until
night.
9
It is permissible not to fast when traveling, even when the intention to
fast has been made the night before, provided that the journey is at least
80.64 km one way, and that one leaves town before dawn. If one leaves
after dawn, one is not entitled to omit the fast. It is preferable for
travellers not to fast if fasting would harm them, though if not, then
fasting is better.
Saum

107

The Integrals of Fasting of Ramaḍān
Section: The Integrals of Fasting of Ramaḍān are Three:
1. To make an intention at night for each day of the farḍ (fast).
2. To refraining from intentionally doing things which break the
fast, for the one who is conscious of his fast and is not
ignorant.
3. The fasting person himself.

Qaḍāʾ of Fasting and Kaffarah
Saum

108

Section:
Major kaffārah (expiation) and specified punishment are
compulsory, together with making-up the fast for he who breaks
his fast of Ramaḍān a complete day by having complete
intercourse in which he becomes sinner in his fast.
10

There are six situations in which it is compulsory for one to
abstain from things which break the fast
11
and also necessitate the
making-up of that fast later.
1. Breaking his fast with a wrong act from his side in the month
of Ramaḍān only.
12

2. Upon one who omits the intention at night for the farḍ fast.
3. Upon one who has sahur (a meal before dawn) thinking that
the night still remains, but it was not so.
4. Upon one who breaks the fast thinking that the sun has set but
it was not so.
13


10
The legal occasion of the offense is the particular day of fasting, so
that if it were committed on two separate days, two separate expiations
would be necessary, though if it were committed twice in one day there
would be only one expiation.
The expiation consist of freeing a sound Muslim slave, or if not
possible, then to fast the days of two consecutive months. If this is not
possible, then the expiation is to feed sixty poor persons (509 grams of
food to each poor person). If one is unable to do this, the expiation
remains as an unperformed obligation upon the person concerned.
The woman with whom intercourse is performed is not obliged to
expiate it.
11
Wājib to fast the remainder of the day.
12
Like a person who is intoxicated from the night until the morning of
Ramaḍān, it is binding for him to abstain from things which break the
fast and also to recover that fast later.
Saum

109

5. Upon one who has reckoned the 30
th
of Shaʿbān to be the first
of Ramaḍān.
6. Upon one who was excessive in gargling and in putting water
into the nostrils to such an extent that the water goes down the
throat.
14


The Factors That Nullify Fasting
Section: Fasting is nullified with apostasy, menstruation,
postnatal bleeding, childbirth, insanity even for a moment,
unconsciousness and unlawful intoxicants if they last for the
entire day.


13
It is best to hasten breaking the fast when one is certain that the sun
has set.
14
If some water slips down when a lot has not been used, it does not
break the fast.
Saum

110

The Breaking of the Fast in Ramaḍān
Section: The Breaking of the Fast in Ramaḍān are Four
Types (In Respect to Rulings):
1. Wājib, like for a woman who experiences haiḍ and postnatal
bleeding.
2. Permissible, like a traveller and a sick person.
3. That which is neither wājib nor permissible, like insanity.
4. Ḥarām, like he who delays the making-up of Ramaḍān despite
having the capability to do so, until the time does not permit
it.
15



15
Someone obliged to make-up some fast-days of Ramaḍān is
recommended to do so consecutively and immediately. It is not
permissible for a person with some unperformed fast-days of Ramaḍān
to delay making them up until the next Ramaḍān unless there is an
excuse for delaying.
Saum

111

c
Saum

112

The Types of Breaking the Fast
The Types of Breaking the Fast are Four:
1. The things that make qaḍāʾ and fidyah
16
wājib are two:
 Breaking the fast due to the fear of harm for others.
17

 Breaking the fast and thereafter delaying to make-up for it
until the next Ramaḍān comes.
18

2. Those for which qaḍāʾ is compulsory but not the fidyah, like
one who is unconscious.
3. Those for which fidyah is compulsory but not the qaḍāʾ, like
a very old man.
4. That which is neither wājib nor permissible,
19
like the insane
person who‟s insanity is not caused by transgression.


16
One must pay 509 grams of food to the poor for each fast-day missed,
in addition to making it up.
17
A woman who is breast-feeding a baby or is pregnant and apprehends
harm to herself or her child may omit the fast and make it up later,
though if she omits it because of fear of harm for the child alone not for
herself then she must give 509 grams of food in charity for each day
missed as an expiation in addition to making-up each day.
18
When making-up, if a fast-day is delayed until a second Ramaḍān
comes, then one must pay an additional 509 grams to be paid for that
day.
19
A person who is forced, his fast will not break because he is not
responsibled for what he has been forced to do.
Saum

113

The Things Do Not Break the Fast
Section: The Things Which by Reaching the Stomach, Do Not
Break the Fast are Seven:
1. – 3. That which reaches the body cavity
20
out of forgetfulness,
ignorance or force.
21

4. The mixing of saliva with what is between the teeth
22
and he is
unable to discharge it, he is therefore excused.
5. The dust of the road which reaches to the body cavity.
6. - 7. The dust of sifted flour or flies etc. which reach the body
cavity.



20
Through an open passage-way
21
The deliberate intake of anything besides air or saliva into the body
cavity breaks the fast.
22
Food etc. provided this is after having cleaned between them after
eating, by using a toothpick or the like between them.

114









Hajj and ʿUmrah


__
Hajj and ‘Umrah

115

Hajj and ʿUmrah.
The Conditions for Ḥajj being Wājib
The Conditions for Ḥajj being Wājib are Six:
1. Islām.
2. Sanity.
3. Reached puberty.
4. Free person.
5. The way towards Makkah is safe.
1

6. Having ability (Sufficient provision and conveyance for the
journey).
2


1
Safety for one‟s person and property from predators and enemies,
whether the latter be non-Muslims or highway robbers, even when the
amount is inconsiderable including ḥajj fees.
2
To be able to pay for the provision and transportation for the journey,
with money one has that is in excess of the amount one requires to
support and cloth the members of one‟s family. This applies to one who
is travelling there and back, and while obtaining lodgings for oneself,
and that is in excess of any money one owes for debts, even those not
yet due. It is also a condition that one have sufficient time to travel to
Makkah al-Mukarramah means that one can reach Makkah and having
sufficient time to perform all the rituals of ḥajj.
Hajj and ‘Umrah

116

The Integrals of Ḥajj
The Integrals of Ḥajj are Six:
1. Iḥrām – to make the intention of performing ḥajj in the heart
and to recite the talbiyah.
2. Wuqūf – To stay in ʿArāfah; even if it be for a little while after
zawāl of the 9
th
of Dhul Ḥijjah until the dawn of the 10
th
of Dhul
Ḥijjah.
3. To make “ṭawaf al-Ifāḍah” which is performed after the stay
in ʿArāfah.
3

4. Saʿī - going between ṣafā and Marwah.
4

5. Ḥalq – shaving or shortening the hair.
5

6. Tartīb (sequence).
The Integrals of ʿUmrah
The Integrals of ʿUmrah are Five:
1. IḤrām – to make the intention of performing ʿumrah in the
heart.
2. To make ṭawaf of ʿumrah.

3
On the 10
th
Dhul ḥijjah, one enters Makkah and performs ṭawāf al-
Ifāḍah, which is an integral without which the ḥajj remains unfinished
(meaning that, it may not be compensated for by merely slaughtering,
though the time it may be performed is anytime thereafter.).
4
Seven times, one begins at ṣafā and ends at Marwah
5
The best way for men is to shave the entire head, though one may
confine oneself by removing, by any means, three hairs thereof from the
head, not something such as the beard or moustache, or may merely
shorten it, for which the optimal is to clip a little less than two
centimetres from all the hair. As for women, it is optimal for them to
shorten their hair in the latter way, it being makrūh (offensive) for a
woman to shave her head.
Hajj and ‘Umrah

117

3. Saʿī - going between Safā and Marwah.
4. Shaving or shortening the hair.
5. Tartīb (sequence).
The Wājibat of Ḥajj
The Wājibat (Requisites)
6
of Ḥajj are Five:
1. One enters iḥrām at the miqat (proper site).
2. Staying the night at Muzdālifah.
7

3. Stoning the three “al-Jamrat” (the stoning site).
4. Staying the night following the ʿEid
8
at Mīnā.
9

5. ṭawāf al-wadaʿ

6
Arkān (integrals) and wājib (requisites) are synonyms except in this
chapter, the integral means that ḥajj will not exist except with it, and the
requisite means the dam (expiation) becomes compulsory by leaving it.
7
When the sun sets on 9 Dhul ḥijjah, those on ḥajj go forth to
Muzdālifah occupied with dhikr and talbiyah proceeding with
tranquillity and dignity, and they join the Maghrīb and ʿIshāʾ at
Muzdālifah.
8
Ayyām al-tashrīq – 11, 12, 13 of Dhul ḥijjah.
9
When finished with the ṭawāf al-Ifāḍah and going between ṣafā and
Marwah, [doing the latter if one had not yet previously performed it
after the ṭawāf qudūm (arrival circumambulation)], one is obliged to
return to Mina to stay overnight there and to stone on the days
following the ʿEid (Ayyām al-Tashrīq). It is desirable to arrive before
noon to perform the Ẓuhr prayer there as the Prophet ¸ did, and to
spend the night there.
One picks up twenty-one pebbles from Mīnā on the days after the ʿEid,
taking care to shun the three places of stoning.
Hajj and ‘Umrah

118

Unlawful Things While in Iḥrām
Unlawful Things While in Iḥrām are Ten:
1. Men wearing sewn garments.
2. Men covering their head.
3. Combing hair.
4. Shaving hair or plucking it.
5. Trimming nails.
6. Applying perfume.
7. Killing a game animal.
8. Performing nikāh.
9. Having sexual intercourse
10. Sexual foreplay other than intercourse.
The Expiations of Ḥajj and ʿUmrah
The Expiations of Ḥajj and ʿUmrah are Four Categories:
(I) Dam tartīb wa taqdīr – expiation consist of alternatives in a
fixed precedence order and predetermined amount:
 One must slaughter a sheep and distribute its meat to the poor
in the ḥarām, or if unable to slaughter, then,
 One must fast three days during the Ḥajj and seven more at
home, making ten days, or if one fails to do so while there, as
is obligatory,
 They become a makeup fast that must be performed before
the other seven fasted at home by an interval equal to the
days of oneʿs journey home.
Hajj and ‘Umrah

119


There are nine things which necessitate this type of expiation:
1. Performing an ʿumrah first (tamattuʿ ḥajj).
2. Performing ḥajj and ʿumrah simultaneously (qiran).
3. Not standing at ʿArāfah.
4. To miss stoning at the stoning sites of Mīnā on the three days
after the ʿEid, the time for which ends at sunset on the third
day if one does not leave early.
5. To miss all three nights at Mīnā after the ʿEid, though if one
only misses a single night, one distributes 509 grams of
wheat to the poor of the ḥarām, and if two nights, then double
this amount.
6. To miss spending the night at Muzdalifah.
7. Not entering iḥrām at the mīqāt (proper site).
8. Breaking one‟s vow.
9. Not performing the Ṭawāf al-Wadaʿ (farewell
circumambulation).

(II) Dam takhyīr wa taqdīr – expiation in which one is free to
choose one of three predetermined alternatives namely:
 To slaughter and distribute a sheep.
 To fast three days, even if unconsecutive, wherever one
wishes.
Hajj and ‘Umrah

120

 To give 2.036 kgs of wheat to each of six of the poor of the
ḥarām.

There are eight things which necessitate this type of expiation:
1. Removal of three hairs at one time and place, meaning that
the interval between removing each is not considered long,
and one has remained at the same place, though if their
removal does not occur at a single time and place, one must
pay 509 grams of wheat to the poor or fast one day for each
hair, even if their number exceeds three.
2. Trimming three nails at one time and place, with the same
rules and restriction as just mentioned.
3. Men wearing sewn garments or covering their head, or
women covering their faces.
4. Using oil.
5. Using scent.
6. Sexual foreplay other than intercourse.
7. Having sexual intercourse a second time after having spoiled
one‟s ḥajj by an initial sexual intercourse.
8. Having sexual intercourse between partial and full release
from iḥrām.
10


10
The release from iḥrām in ḥajj is in two stages, partial and full:
Partial release from iḥrām occurs when any two of the three rites of
stoning, cutting the hair and ṭawāf are performed. Doing any two of
them accomplishes partial release from iḥrām, rendering permissible all
Hajj and ‘Umrah

121


(III) Dam tartīb wa taʿdīl – expiation in a fixed precedence
order of alternatives involving estimate-based substitutes:

It is necessary due to two things:
1. Being prevented by another from completing all the integrals
of the ḥajj or ʿumrah, in which case one must release oneself
from iḥrām by:
 One must slaughter a sheep and distribute its meat to the poor
in the ḥarām, or if unable to slaughter, then,
 One must fast three days during the ḥajj and seven more at
home, making ten days, or if one fails to do so while there as
is obligatory,
 They become a makeup fast that must be performed before
the other seven fasted at home by an interval.
2. Having spoiled one‟s ḥajj or ʿumrah by sexual intercourse
11

in which case one must slaughter a camel, or if unable to,

things that were made unlawful by iḥrām except those relating to
women, such as sexual intercourse, getting married, or touching with
desire.
Full release from iḥrām occurs when all three rites have been
performed, and it renders permissible everything made unlawful by
iḥrām, though one still has to stone at the three jamrat and stay
overnight at Mīnā during the days following the „Eid (Ayyām al-
Tashrīq).
11
If one intentionally has sexual intercourse before finishing one‟s
ʿumrah, or while on ḥajj before partial release from iḥrām. It is wājib to
pay the expiation for the male, not the female.
Hajj and ‘Umrah

122

then one must slaughter, (2) a cow, but if not possible, then,
(3) seven sheep, but if not possible, then, (4) one estimates
the cost of a camel and how much food this would buy, and
then gives that much food to the poor in the ḥarām, but if not
possible, then, (5) one fasts one day for every 509 grams of
food that would have been given had (4) been done. (One
may fast anywhere, but it is not permissible to delay it
without an excuse.)

(IV) Dam takhyīr wa taʿdīl - expiation in which one is free to
choose between alternatives consisting of estimate-based
substitutes.

It is necessitated by two things:
1. Killing a game animal while in iḥrām, one may fulfil the
expiation either by slaughtering a domestic animal that is like
the wild animal which was killed, or to distribute funds to the
poor, which equal the value of the game animal or to buy
food equal to the animal‟s value and to distribute it as charity
or to fast one day for each 509 grams of food. Although if the
animal was a pigeon, one is obliged to slaughter a sheep
which is obligatory for killing even a single pigeon.
Hajj and ‘Umrah

123

2. Destroying a tree of the ḥarām, where, if it is large in relation
to other trees of its kind, one slaughters and distributes a
cow, and if small, one slaughters a sheep.

To Visit the Tomb of Rasūlullah ¸

It is mustaḥab when one has finished the ḥajj to visit the
tomb of Rasūlullah ¸ in al-Madīnah al-Munawwarah.


Allah knows best.


__

Khatimah
124

Khatimah

We ask Almighty Allah through the dignity of His graceful
prophet that He takes me, my parents, my beloved ones, and
those who were related to me, from this world as Muslims, and
that He forgives me and them for our recklessness and weakness.
Peace be upon our master Muḥammad ibn ʿAbdullah ibn ʿAbdul
Muṭṭalib ibn Hāshim ibn ʿAbd Manaf, the Messenger of Allah to
the entire creation, the Warrior Prophet, the Beloved of Allah, the
Conqueror and the Seal, and peace be upon his entire family and
all his Companions. All praise is due to Allah, Lord of all the
worlds.
The text of “Safinat al-najāʾ” (The Ship of Salvation) is complete
with the help of Allah the Exalted.

125


126










Appendices


__

Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar

127

Appendix 1: Selected Duʿās and Adhkar

Duʿā for Seeking Knowledge:
ً
ل

َ
ؼَ
ُ
ً
َ
ؿ
َ

َ
و
ً
و
ن
ق
َ

ً
و
ْ
ز
ِ
ر
َ
و
ً
وع
ِ
اوَ ك
ً

ْ
ؾ
ِ
َ ك
ُ

َ
ل
ْ

َ

ن

ِ

ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ
َ
.
Duʿā for all conditions:
َ ك
ُ

َ
ل
ْ

َ

ن

ِ

ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ
َ
َ ك
ُ

َ
ل
ْ

َ

ن

ِ

ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ
َ
،
َ
ي
َ
ق
ِ
او
َ
ع
ْ

َ
و
َ
و
ْ
ػ
َ
ع
ى
َ
ؼّ
َ
و ىَ د
ُ
ل ىَـ
ِ
غ
ْ

َ
و َ فو
َ
ػ
َ
ع
ْ

َ
و .
Ṭahārah – Purification

Duʿā before commencing wuḍūʾ:

ِ
مق
ِ
ج
ل
ر
ِ
نو
َ
ط
ْ
ق ل ش
َ
ن
ِ

ِ
هـ
ل
ؾو
ِ
ب
ُ
ذو
ُ

َ
.
Duʿā when beginning wuḍūʾ:

ِ
مق
ِ
ح
ل
ر
ِ
ن
ٰ ْ
ح
ل
ر
ِ
هـ
ل
ؾ
ِ
م
ْ
س
ِ
ب .
Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar

128

ُ د
ْ
ؿ
َ
ْ

َ

ل
ل
ِ
ـ
ِ
ه َ ذ
َ

ِ
م
َ

ْ

ِ
ْ
ا
ِ
ه
ِ

َ
ؿ
ْ
ع
ِ
ك
َ
و ، ُ د
ْ
ؿ
َ
ْ

ل
ل
ِ
ـ
ِ
ه ي
ِ
ذ
ل

َ
ل
َ
ع
َ
ج

ْ
ل ـ
َ
او
َ

ً
رو
ُ
ف
َ

َ
م
َ

ْ

ِ
ْ
ا
َ
و
ً
روُ ك ،
ن

َ
ر
ُ
ذو
ُ

َ
ك
ِ
ب
ْ
ن
ِ

ِ
ا
َ
ز
َ
َ

ِ

ِ
و
َ
ق ل ش
ُ
ذو
ُ

َ

َ
و َ ك
ِ
ب
ن

َ
ر
ْ
ن
َ

َ
نو
ُ
ُ

ْ
َ
.
Duʿā after wuḍūʾ:
ُ د
َ
ف ْ
َ

ْ
ن
َ

َ
ٓ
َ
ه
َ

ل
ٓ
ل
ل ـ
ُ
ه
ُ
ه َ د
ْ
ح
َ
و
َ
ٓ َ ك
ِ
َ
ُ
ه
َ
ُ د
َ
ف ْ
َ

َ
و
ل
ن
َ

ً د
ل
ؿ
َُ
م
ُ
ه ُ د
ْ

َ

ُ
ه
ُ
و
ُ

َ
ر
َ
و .
،
َ
ن
ْ

ِ
ر
ن
ف
َ
طَ
ُ
ؿـ
ْ

َ
ن
ِ
ي
ِ
ـ
ْ
ؾ
َ
ع
ْ
ج
َ
و ،
َ
ْ

ِ
ب
ل
ول
َ
ن
ِ
ي
ِ
ـ
ْ
ؾ
َ
ع
ْ
ج
ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ
َ

ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ َ كَ كو
َ
ح
ْ

ُ
،
َ
ْ

ِ
حـ
ِ
و
ل
ص
َ
ك
ِ
دو
َ

ِ

ْ
ن
ِ
ي
ِ
ـ
ْ
ؾ
َ
ع
ْ
ج
َ
و

ُ
وُ ت
َ

َ
و ،
َ
ك
ُ
ر
ِ
ػ
ْ
غَ
ْ

َ
،
َ
ًْ ك
َ

ل
ٓ
ِ

َ
ه
ٰ

ِ

ل
ٓ ن
َ
ُ د
َ
ف ْ
َ

َ
ك
ِ
د
ْ
ؿ
َ
ح
ِ
ب
َ
و
َ ك
ْ
ق
َ

ِ
.
Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar

129


Duʿā entering toilet:

ل
ل
ِ
م
ْ
س
ِ
ب ـ
ِ
ٌ
ِ
ئو
َ

َ
ْ
ل
َ
و
ِ
ٌ
ُ

ُ
خـ
ْ

َ
ن
ِ
َ ك
ِ
ب
ُ
ذو
ُ

َ

ن

ِ

ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ
َ
،
ِ
ه .

Duʿā leaving toilet:

ِ
و
َ
او
َ

َ
و ى
َ
ذ
َ
ْ
ٕ ينـ
َ

َ
ى
َ

ْ
ذ
َ
ي
ِ
ذ
ل

ِ
هـ
ل
ؾ
ِ
ُ د
ْ
ؿ
َ
ْ
َ كَ ك
َ
ر
ْ
ػ
ُ
.

Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar

130

Ṣalāh – Prayer

Duʿā after adhān:

ِ
اآ ،
ِ
ي
َ
ؿ
ِ
ئو
َ
ؼ
ْ

ِ
ةَ
ل
ص
َ
و
ِ
ي
ل
ول
ِ
ة
َ
و
ْ
ل د
ِ
ه
ِ
ذ
َ

ل

َ
ر
ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ
ي
ِ
ذ
ل

ً
دو
ُ
ؿ
ْ َ
م و
ً
و
َ
ؼ
َ

ُ
ه
ْ
ث
َ
ع
ْ
ب
َ
و
َ
ي
َ
ؾق
ِ
ض
َ
ػ
ْ

َ
و
َ
ي
َ
ؾق
ِ

َ
و
ْ
ً د
ل
ؿ
َُ
م وَ ك َ د
ن
ق
َ

دو
َ
عق
ِ
ْ
د ُ ف
ِ
ؾْ
ُ
ت
َ
ٓ َ كل ك
ِ
،
ُ
هَ ت ْ د
َ

َ
و .
Duʿā Iftitah:

ل
ل ـ
ُ
ه
ُ َ
زْ
َ

ً
ر
ِ
َ ُ د
ْ
ؿ
َ
ْ

َ
و
ل
ل
ِ
ـ
ِ
ه
ً
ر
ِ
ث َ
َ
نو
َ
ح
ْ

ُ

َ
و
ل
ل ـ
ِ
ه ً ة
َ
رْ ؽ
ُ
ب

ً
ق
ِ

َ

َ
و ، ض
ْ
ر
َ
ْ
ٕ
َ
و
ِ
ا
َ
و
َ

ل
س
َ
ر
َ
ط
َ
ا ي
ِ
ذ
ل
ؾ
ِ
ي
ِ
ف
ْ
ج
َ
و ً
ْ
ف
ل
ج
َ
و

ْ
ل
ْ
ن
ِ
وَ ك
َ
و
َ

َ
و ،
ً

ِ
ؾ
ْ
س
ُ
و
ً
ػق
ِ
ـ
َ
ح ـ
َ

ِ

ِ
ْ

ُ
، ي
ِ
ؽ
ُ
سُ ك
َ
و
ِ
ت
َ

َ

ل
ن
ِ

Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar

131


ل
ل
ِ

ِ
تو
َ َ

َ
و
َ
يو
َ
ق
ْ َ
م
َ
و ـ َ ك
ِ

ٰ
ذ
ِ
ب
َ
و
ُ
ه
َ
َ ك
ِ
َ
َ
ٓ ،
َ

ِ
َ
دو
َ
ع
ْ

ّ

َ
ر
ِ
ه

َ

ِ
ؿ
ِ
ؾ
ْ
س
ُ
ؿـ
ْ

ْ
ن
ِ
وَ ك
َ

َ
و
ُ
ا
ْ
ر
ِ

ُ
.
Duʿā during ruku:

ِ
ه
ِ
د
ْ
ؿ
َ
ح
ِ
ب
َ
و مق
ِ
ظ
َ
ع
ْ

ن
ب
َ
ر نو
َ
ح
ْ

ُ
( 3 times )
َ ك
َ

َ
ع َ ش
َ
خ ،
ُ
ً
ْ
ؿ
َ
ؾ
ْ

َ
َ ك
َ

َ
و ًْـ
َ
آ ك
ِ
ب
َ
و ً
ْ
عَ
َ
ر ك
َ

ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ

ِ
ه
ِ
ب
ْ
ً
ل
ؾ
َ
ؼَ
ْ
و
َ

َ
و ي
ِ

َ
ص
َ

َ
و ي
ِ
ؿ
ْ
ظ
َ

َ
و ي
ن
ُ م
َ
و ي
ِ
َ
ص
َ
ب
َ
و ي
ِ
ع
ْ
ؿ
َ

ي
ِ
َ د
َ
.

Duʿā during ʿitidal:

َ
ا
ْ
ل
ِ
،
ِ
هق
ِ
ا و ً
َ
رو
َ

ُ
و
ً

ن
ق
َ

ً
ر
ِ
ث َ ً د
ْ َ
ح د
ْ
ؿ
َ
ْ
ك
َ

َ
و وَـ
ّ
ب
َ
ر
ُ د
ْ
ع
َ
ب
ٍ
ا
ْ
َ ش
ْ
ن
ِ
ً
ْ
ئ
ِ
و
َ

َ
ا
ْ
ل
ِ

َ
و
ِ
ض
ْ
ر
َ
ْ
ٕ
َ
ا
ْ
ل
ِ

َ
و
ِ
ا
َ
و
َ
ؿ
ل
س .
Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar

132


Duʿā during sitting between two sajdahs:

ِ

ِ
د
ْ

َ
و ي
ِ
ـ
ْ

ُ
ز
ْ
ر
َ
و ي
ِ
ـ
ْ
ع
َ
ا
ْ
ر
َ
و
ِ

ْ ُ
ز
ْ
ج
َ
و ي
ِ
ـ
ْ َ
ح
ْ
ر
َ
و
ِ
ل
ْ
ر
ِ
ػ
ْ

ن

َ
ر
ينـ
َ
ُ ف
ْ

َ
و ي
ِ
ـ
ِ
او
َ

َ
و .
Duʿā during sajdah:

ِ
ه
ِ
د
ْ
ؿ
َ
ح
ِ
ب
َ
و َ ذ
ْ

َ
ْ
ٕ
ن
ب
َ
ر
َ
نو
َ
ح
ْ

ُ
( 3 times )
َ د
َ
ج
َ
، ً
ْ
ؿ
َ
ؾ
ْ

َ
ك
َ

َ
و ًْـ
َ
آ ك
ِ
ب
َ
و اْ د
َ
ج
َ
ك
َ

ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ

ِ
ه
ِ

ْ
و
َ
ح
ِ
ب
ُ
ه
َ
َ
ص
َ
ب
َ
و
ُ
ه
َ
ع
ْ
ؿ
َ
ل ق َ
َ
و
ُ
ه
َ
ر
ل
و
َ

َ
و
ُ
ه
َ
ؼ
َ
ؾ
َ
خ ي
ِ
ذ
ل
ؾ
ِ
ي
ِ
ف
ْ
ج
َ
و

ل
ل
َ
ك
َ
رو
َ
َ ت ،
ِ
ه
ِ
ت
ل
و
ُ

َ
و ـ
َ

ِ
ؼ
ِ
و
َ
ْ
ل
ُ
ن
َ
س
ْ
ح
َ

ُ
ه .

Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar

133

Al-Tashahhud:

ُ
م
َ

ل
س ،
ِ
هـ
ل
ؾ
ِ

ُ
او
َ

ن
ق
ل
ط
ُ
ا
َ
و
َ
ؾ
ل
ص
ُ
او َ
َ
رو
َ

ُْ
د
ُ
او
ل
ق
ِ
حل
،
ُ
هُ تو َ
َ
ر
َ
ب
َ
و
ِ
هـ
ل
ؾ
ُ
ي
َ ْ
ح
َ
ر
َ
و
ّ
ي
ِ
لـ و
َ
ّ
ي
َ
َ ك
ْ
ق
َ
ؾ
َ
َ ذ
َ

َ
و وَـ
ْ
ق
َ
ؾ
َ

ُ
م
َ

ل
س

ُ
هـ
ل
ؾ
ل
ٓ
َ
ه
َ

َ
ٓ
ْ
ن
َ
ُ د
َ
ف ْ
َ
،
َ

ِِ
و
ل
ص
ِ
هـ
ل
ؾ
ِ
دو
َ

ِ

ل
ن
َ
ُ د
َ
ف ْ
َ

َ
و

ِ
هـ
ل
ؾ
ُ
لو
ُ

َ
ر ً د
ل
ؿ
َُ
م .
Al-Salat al-Ibrahimiyyah:

َ
َ ،
ٍ
د
ل
ؿ
َُ
م وَ ك
ِ
د
ن
ق
َ

ِ
لآ َ ذ
َ

َ
و
ٍ
د
ل
ؿ
َُ
م وَ ك
ِ
د
ن
ق
َ
َ ذ
َ

ن
ل
َ

ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ
،
َ
مق
ِ

َ
ر
ْ
ب وَ ك
ِ
د
ن
ق
َ

ِ
لآ َ ذ
َ

َ
و
َ
مق
ِ

َ
ر
ْ
ب وَ ك
ِ
د
ن
ق
َ
َ ذ
َ
ً
ْ
ق
ل
ؾ
َ

ًْ
َ
رو
َ
ب
َ
َ ،
ٍ
د
ل
ؿ
َُ
م وَ ك
ِ
د
ن
ق
َ

ِ
لآ َ ذ
َ

َ
و
ٍ
د
ل
ؿ
َُ
م وَ ك
ِ
د
ن
ق
َ
َ ذ
َ

ْ
ك
ِ
رو
َ
ب
َ
و
Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar

134

وَ ك
ِ
د
ن
ق
َ

ِ
لآ َ ذ
َ

َ
و
َ
مق
ِ

َ
ر
ْ
ب وَ ك
ِ
د
ن
ق
َ
َ ذ
َ

َ

ِ
َ
دو
َ
ع
ْ

ِ
ف ،
َ
مق
ِ

َ
ر
ْ
ب
ٌ دق
ِ
َ
ٌ دق
ِ
َ
ح كل ك .
Duʿā after tashahhud before salām:

ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ
ْ
ر
ِ
ػ
ْ

ِ
ل و
َ

ُ
ً
ْ
ل د
َ
و
َ

َ
و
ُ
ا
ْ
ر
ل
خ
َ
و ، و
َ
ا
ْ
ر
َ
ْ
س
َ
و
َ

َ
و
ًْـ
َ
ؾ
ْ

َ
، و
َ

َ
و ً
ْ
ا
َ
ْ
س
َ
و
َ

َ
و
َ
ًْ ك
َ

ُ
م
َ
ؾ
ْ

َ

ِ
ه
ِ
ب ينـ
ِ
،
َ
ًْ ك
َ

ُ
م ن د
َ
ؼ
ُْ
د

َ
ًْ ك
َ

َ
و
ُ
ر
ن
خ
َ
م
ُْ
د
َ
ٓ
َ
ه
َ

ل
ٓ
َ
ًْ ك
َ
.

ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ
ن
ً
ْ
ؿ
َ
ؾ
َ
ظ
ِ

ْ
ػَ ك
ً

ْ
ؾ
ُ
ظ
ً
ر
ِ
ث َ
َ
ٓ
َ
و
ُ
ر
ِ
ػ
ْ
غ
َ

َ
وُ ك
ّ
ذ
ل
ٓ

َ
ًْ ك
َ

ْ
ر
ِ
ػ
ْ
و
َ
ا
ِ
ل ً ة
َ
ر
ِ
ػ
ْ
غ
َ

ْ
ن
ِ
ك
ِ
دْـ
ِ
ي
ِ
ـ
ْ َ
ح
ْ
ر
َ
و َ كل ك
َ
ًْ ك
َ

ُ
رو
ُ
ػ
َ
غ
ْ

ُ
مق
ِ
ح
ل
ر .

Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar

135

Duʿā Qunūt:

ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ
ِ

ِ
د
ْ

ْ
ن
َ
ؿق
ِ
ا
َ
ً
ْ
َ د
َ
ي
ِ
ـ
ِ
او
َ

َ
و
ْ
ن
َ
ؿق
ِ
ا
َ
ً
ْ
ق
َ
او
َ
ي
ِ
ـ
ل

َ
وَ ت
َ
و

ْ
ن
َ
ؿق
ِ
ا
َ
ً
ْ
ق
ل

َ
وَ ت
ْ
ك
ِ
رو
َ
ب
َ
و
ِ
ل
َ
ق
ِ
ا
َ
ً
ْ
ق
َ
ط
ْ

َ
ي
ِ
ـ
ِ

َ
و
ل
َ و
َ

َ
ً
ْ
ق
َ
ض
َ

َ ف كل ك
ِ

ِ

ْ
ؼَ ت
َ
ٓ
َ
و
َ
ه
ْ
ؼ
ُ
َ ك
ْ
ق
َ
ؾ
َ

َ
و
ُ
هل ك
ِ

َ
ٓ
ّ
ل
ِ
ذ
َ

ْ
ن
َ

َ
ً
ْ
ق
َ

َ
و
َ
ٓ
َ
و

ّ
ز
ِ
ع
َ

ْ
ن
َ

َ
ً
ْ

َ
دو
َ

َ
ًْ
َ
رو
َ
َ ت وَـ
ل
ب
َ
ر
َ
ً
ْ
ق
َ
و
َ
عَ ت
َ
و َ ك
َ
ؾ
َ
ا ُ د
ْ
ؿ
َ
ْ
َ ذ
َ
و
َ

َ
ً
ْ
ق
َ
ض
َ
ك
ُ
ر
ِ
ػ
ْ
غَ
ْ

َ

ُ
وُ ت
َ

َ
و َ ك
ْ
ق
َ
ل ذ
َ

َ
و
ل
ل ـ
ُ
ه َ ذ
َ
وَ ك
ِ
د
ن
ق
َ

ٍ
د
ل
ؿ
َُ
م َ ذ
َ

َ
و
ِ
ه
ِ
آ
ِ
ه
ِ

ْ
ح
َ

َ
و
َ
م
ل
ؾ
َ

َ
و .


Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar

136

Duʿā and Dhikr after ṣalāh:
It is especially recommended to recite dhikr and duʿā after ṣalāh
silently:

Istighfār – recite three times.

َ
هـ
ل
ؾ
ُ
ر
ِ
ػ
ْ
غَ
ْ

َ

َ
مق
ِ
ظ
َ
ع
ْ
.
Dhikr to be recited one times

ِ
ل
َ
ْ
ل
َ
ذ و
َ

َ
ًْ
َ
رو
َ
َ ت
ُ
م
ل
س كْـ
ِ

َ
و
ُ
م
ل
س
َ
ًْ ك
َ

ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ

ِ
ل
َ
ع
ِ
كو
َ

َ
ٓ
ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ
َ
،
ِ
م
َ
رْ
ِ
ا
َ
و ـ
ِ
ل
َ
ي
ِ
ط
ْ
ع
ُ
ٓ
َ
و ،
َ
ًق
َ
ط
ْ

َ
و
َ
ـ و
َ

ّ د
َ
ْ
ل َ كْـ
ِ
ن د
َ
ْ
ل
َ
ذ
ُ
ع
َ
ػْـ
َ
ٓ
َ
و ،
َ
ً
ْ
عَـ
َ
.

Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar

137

Ayat al-kursi
و
َ

ُ
ه
َ

ٌ
م
ْ
وَ ك
َ
ٓ
َ
و
ٌ
يَـ
ِ

ُ
ه
ُ
ذ
ُ
خ
ْ
لَ ت
َ
ٓ
ُ
مو
ّ
ق
َ
ؼ
ْ

ّ
ي
َ
ْ

َ
و
ُ

ل
ٓ
ِ

َ
ه
َ

ِ

َ
ٓ ُلل

ل
ٓ
ِ

ُ
ه َ دْـ
ِ

ُ
ع
َ
ػ ْ ش
َ
ي
ِ
ذ
ل

َ
ذ
ْ
ن
َ

ِ
ض
ْ
ر
َ
ٕ
ْ

ِ
ف و
َ

َ
و
ِ
ا
َ
و
َ

ل
س
ِ
ف

ٍ
ا
ْ
َ
ش
ِ
ب
َ
نو
ُ
طق
ِ
ُ

َ
ٓ
َ
و
ْ
م
ُ
ف
َ
ػ
ْ
ؾ
َ
خ و
َ

َ
و
ْ
م
ِ
ي
ِ
د
ْ

َ

َ
ْ

َ
ب و
َ

ُ
م
َ
ؾ
ْ
ع
َ

ِ
ه
ِ
ك
ْ
ذ
ِ
ن
ِ
ب

َ
ض
ْ
ر
َ
ٕ
َ
و
ِ
ا
َ
و
َ

ل
س
ُ
ه
ّ
ق
ِ

ْ
رُ
َ
ع
ِ

َ
و
َ
او َ
َ

ِ
ب
ل
ٓ
ِ

ِ
ه
ِ
ؿ
ْ
ؾ
ِ

ْ
ن
ِ

ُ
مق
ِ
ظ
َ
ع
ْ

ّ
ِ
ل
َ
ع
ْ

َ
و
ُ

َ
و
َ

ُ
ف
ُ
ظ
ْ
ػ
ِ
ح
ُ
ه
ُ
دو
ُ
ئ
َ

َ
ٓ
َ
و Q
Sūrah al-Ikhlās
مقحر نحر ل مسب
ٌ د
َ
ح
َ
ُلل
َ
و
ُ

ْ
ل
ُ
Q ُ د
َ
ؿ
ل
ص ُلل Q ْ د
َ
و
ُ

ْ
َ
ل
َ
و ْ د
ِ
ؾ
َ

ْ
َ
ل Q
ْ
َ
ل
َ
و
ٌ د
َ
ح
َ

ً
و
ُ
ػُ
ُ
ه
َ

ْ
نُ ؽ
َ
Q


Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar

138

Sūrah al-Falaq
مقحر نحر ل مسب

ِ
ق
َ
ؾ
َ
ػ
ْ

ن

َ
ر
ِ
ب
ُ
ذو
ُ

َ

ْ
ل
ُ
Q َ ق
َ
ؾ
َ
خ و
َ

ن
َ
ْ
ن
ِ
Q
ن
َ
ْ
ن
ِ

َ
و

َ
ى
َ

َ
و
َ
ذ
ِ

ٍ
ق
ِ
و
َ
Q
ِ
د
َ
ؼ
ُ
ع
ْ

ِ
ف
ِ
او
َ
ثو
ل
ػلـ
ن
َ
ْ
ن
ِ

َ
و Q
ْ
ن
ِ

َ
و
َ د
َ
س
َ
ح
َ
ذ
ِ

ٍ
د
ِ
و
َ
ح
ن
َ Q
Sūrah al-Nas
مقحر نحر ل مسب

ِ
سولـ
ن

َ
ر
ِ
ب
ُ
ذو
ُ

َ

ْ
ل
ُ
Q
ِ
سولـ
ِ
ك
ِ
ؾ
َ
Q
ِ
سولـ
ِ
ه
َ

ِ
Q
ْ
ن
ِ


ِ
سولـ
َ
ْ
ل
ِ
س
َ
و
ْ

َ
و
ْ

ن
َ Q
ِ
رو ُ د
ُ

ِ
ف
ُ
س
ِ
و
ْ

َ
و
ُ
ي
ِ
ذ
ل


ِ
سولـ Q
ِ
سولـ
َ
و
ِ
يلـ
ِ
ْ
ل
َ
ن
ِ
Q

Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar

139

Dhikr each to be recited 33 times:

ِ
هـ
ل
ؾ
َ
نو
َ
ح
ْ

ُ
.

ِ
هـ
ل
ؾ
ِ
ُ د
ْ
ؿ
َ
ْ

َ
.

ُ َ
زْ
َ

ُ
هـ
ل
ؾ
َ
.

Dhikr to be recited one time:
ُ د
ْ
ؿ
َ
ْ

ُ
ه
َ

َ
و ُ ك
ْ
ؾ
ُ
ؿـ
ْ

ُ
ه
َ
،
ُ
ه
َ
َ ك
ِ
َ
َ
ٓ
ُ
ه َ د
ْ
ح
َ
و
ُ
هـ
ل
ؾ
ل
ٓ ه
ٰ

ِ

َ
ٓ

ٌ
ر
ِ
د
َ

ٍ
ا
ْ
َ ش
ن
لُ َ ذ
َ

َ
و
ُ

َ
و ، .
Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar

140

Prophetic Duʿā:


َ

ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ وَـ
ِ
تآ
ِ
ف و
َ
قْ ك ّ د
ً
يَـ
َ
س
َ
ح
ِ
ف
َ
و ة
َ
ر
ِ
خ
ْ
ٔ
ً
يَـ
َ
س
َ
ح وَـ
ِ

َ
و

َ

َ
ذ
َ

ِ
رولـ ،
ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ
ن

ِ
َ ك
ُ

َ
ل
ْ

َ
ىَ د
ُ
ْ
ل ى
َ
ؼّ
َ
و
َ فو
َ
ػ
َ
ع
ْ

َ
و ىَـ
ِ
غ
ْ

َ
و
َ
،
ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ
ْ
ر
ِ
ػ
ْ

ِ
ل
َ

ْ
ر
َ
و ـ ي
ِ
ـ
ْ

ِ

ِ
د
ْ

َ
و
ي
ِ
ـ
ِ
او
َ

َ
و ي
ِ
ـ
ْ

ُ
ز
ْ
ر
َ
و
َ
،
ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ َ ف
ن
َ
ص
ُ

ِ
و
ُ
ؾ
ُ
ؼ
ْ
ْ ف
ن
َ

وَـ
َ
بو
ُ
ؾ
ُ
َ ذ
َ
َ ك
ِ

َ
و
َ
،
ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ
ُ
ذو
ُ

َ
ك
ِ
ب
ْ
ن
ِ

ِ
د
ْ
ف
َ
ج
ِ
ا
َ

َ

ْ

ِ
ك
َ
ر
َ
د
َ
و
ِ
او
َ
ؼ ل ش
َ
و
ِ
او
ُ

ِ
او
َ
ض
َ
ؼ
ْ

َ
و
ِ
يَ ت
َ
َ
ِ
ا َ د
ْ

َ
ْ
ٕ ،
ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ
َ

ن

ِ

ُ
ذو
ُ

َ
َ ك
ِ
ب
َ
ن
ِ

ِ
ز
ْ
ج
َ
ع
ْ

ِ
ل
َ
سَ ؽ
ْ

َ
و
ِ
ن
ْ

ُ
ْ
ل
َ
و
ِ
م
َ
ر
َ
ْ
ل
َ
و
Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar

141


ِ
ل
ْ
خ
ُ

ْ

َ
و
َ
و
ُ
ذو
ُ

َ
ك
ِ
ب
ْ
ن
ِ

ِ

َ
ذ
َ

ِ
ْ
ز
َ
ؼ
ْ

َ
و
ُ
ذو
ُ

َ
َ ك
ِ
ب
ْ
ن
ِ

ِ
يَـْ
ِ
ا
ْ
ل ـ و
َ
ق
ْ َ
م
ْ
ل
َ
و ـ
ِ
او
َ َ
ِ ع
ْ
ؾ
َ
خو
ِ
ن
ْ
ن د
ِ
ي
َ

َ
ؾ
َ

َ
و
ِ
لو
َ
ج
ن
ر .

َ

ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ
ن

ُ
ً
ْ
ؿ
َ
ؾ
َ
ظ
ِ

ْ
ػَ ك
ً

ْ
ؾ
ُ
ظ
ً
ر
ِ
ث َ
ً
ر
ِ
َ
َ
و
ُ
هل ك
ِ

َ
ٓ
ُ
ر
ِ
ػ
ْ
غ
َ

َ
وُ ك
ّ
ذ
ل
ٓ
َ
ًْ ك
َ

ْ
ر
ِ
ػ
ْ
و
َ
ا
ِ
ل ً ة
َ
ر
ِ
ػ
ْ
غ
َ

ْ
ن
ِ
ك
ِ
دْـ
ِ
ي
ِ
ـ
ْ َ
ح
ْ
ر
َ
و
َ كل ك
َ
ًْ ك
َ

ُ
رو
ُ
ػ
َ
غ
ْ

ُ
مق
ِ
ح
ل
ر
َ

ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ
ْ
ر
ِ
ػ
ْ

ِ
ل ي
ِ

َ
ئق
ِ
ط
َ
خ

َ
و
ِ

ِ
ف
َ
ْ
س
ِ
ف ى
ِ
ر
ْ

َ
و
َ

َ
و
َ
ًْ ك
َ

ُ
م
َ
ؾ
ْ

َ

ِ
ه
ِ
ب ىنـ
ِ
.

َ

ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ
ْ
ر
ِ
ػ
ْ

ِ
ل ىن د
َ
ج
ِ
ل
ْ
ز
َ

َ
و ى
ِ
ل
َ
ط
َ
خ
َ
و ي
ِ
د
َ
ؿ
َ

َ
و
ل
لُ
َ
و
َ ك
ِ

َ
ذ ي
ِ
دْـ
ِ

ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ
ْ
ر
ِ
ػ
ْ

ِ
ل و
َ

ُ
ً
ْ
ل د
َ
و
َ

َ
و
ُ
ا
ْ
ر
ل
خ
َ
و ، و
َ

Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar

142

ا
ْ
ر
َ
ْ
س
َ
و
َ

َ
و
َ
ًْ ك
َ

ُ
م
َ
ؾ
ْ

َ

ِ
ه
ِ
ب ينـ
ِ
،
َ
ًْ ك
َ

ْ
ل ـ
ُ
م ن د
َ
ؼ
ُ

َ
ًْ ك
َ

َ
و

ْ
ل ـ
ُ
ر
ن
خ
َ
م
ُ

َ
ًْ ك
َ

َ
و
ٌ
ر
ِ
د
َ

ٍ
ا
ْ
َ ش
ن
لُ َ ذ
َ
.

ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ
ن

ِ

ُ
ذو
ُ

َ
َ ك
ِ
ب
ْ
ن
ِ

ن
َ و
َ

ُ
ً
ْ
ؾ
ِ
ؿ
َ
،
ْ
ن
ِ

َ
و
ن
َ و
َ

ْ
َ
ل

ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ ل
َ
ؿ
ْ

َ

ن

ِ

ُ
ذو
ُ

َ
َ ك
ِ
ب
ْ
ن
ِ

ِ
ل
َ
و
َ
ز ك
ِ

َ
ؿ
ْ
ع
ِ
ك
ِ
ل
ّ
و
َ
َ

َ
و
َ ك
ِ

َ
ق
ِ
او
َ

ِ
ة
َ
ل
ْ
ج
َ
ا
َ
و ِ عق
ِ
َ

َ
و َ ك
ِ

َ
ؿ
ْ
ؼ
ِ
ك َ ك
ِ
ط
َ
خ
َ
.

ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ
ِ
اآ
ِ

ْ
ػَ ك و
َ

َ
و
ْ
ؼَ ت ، و
َ
فن
َ
ز
َ
و
َ
ًْ ك
َ

ُ
ْ
ر
َ
خ
ْ
ن
َ
و
َ
و ل
َ
ز ،

َ
ًْ ك
َ
و
َ
ف
ّ
ق
ِ

َ
و و
َ

َ
ٓ
ْ
و
َ

َ
و ،
ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ
ن

ِ

ُ
ذو
ُ

َ
َ ك
ِ
ب
ْ
ن
ِ

ٍ
م
ْ
ؾ
ِ

َ
ٓ

ْ
ع
َ
ػْـ
َ
،
ْ
ن
ِ

َ
و
ٍ
ى
ْ
ؾ
َ

َ
ٓ
ْ
ع َ شْ
َ
،
ْ
ن
ِ

َ
و
ٍ
س
ْ
ػَ ك
َ
ٓ
ْ
ن
ِ

َ
و
ْ
ع
َ
ْ شَ ت
Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar

143


ٍ
ة
َ
و
ْ

َ
د
َ
ٓ
ُ
و
َ
جَ
ْ
س
ُ
و
َ
َ
ل ،
ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ
ن

ِ
َ ك
ُ

َ
ل
ْ

َ
ىَ د
ُ
ْ
ل

َ
د َ د
ل
س
َ
و .

َ

ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ
ْ

ِ
ؾ
ْ

َ

ِ
ل ى
ِ
ذ
ل
ي
ِ
ـ
ِ
د
َ
و
ُ

ُ
ي
َ
ؿ
ْ
ص
ِ
ى
ِ
ر
ْ

َ

ْ

ِ
ؾ
ْ

َ

َ
و

ِ
ل
َ
ىو
َ
قْ ك
ُ
د ي
ِ

ل
و
َ
فق
ِ
ا
ِ
شو
َ
ع
َ

ْ

ِ
ؾ
ْ

َ

َ
و
ِ
ت
َ
ر
ِ
خآ ي
ِ

ل
و
َ
فق
ِ
ا
ي
ِ
دو
َ
ع
َ

ِ
ل
َ
ع
ْ
ج
َ
و َ ةو
َ
ق
َ
ْ
ً ة
َ
دو
َ

ِ
ز
ِ

ِ
ف
ن
لُ
ٍ
ْ
ر
َ
خ
َ
ا
ْ
و
َْ
د
َ
و

ً
ي
َ
ح
َ
ر
ِ
ل
ْ
ن
ِ

ن
لُ

َ .

ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ
َ

ن

ِ

ُ
ذو
ُ

َ
ك
ِ
ب
ْ
ن
ِ

ن
َ ىَـ
ِ
غ
ْ

ِ
ر
ْ
ؼ
َ
ػ
ْ

َ
و
ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ
ن

ِ

ُ
ذو
ُ

َ
ك
ِ
ب
ْ
ن
ِ

ِ
ا
َ
ر
ِ
ؽْـ
ُ

ِ
ق
َ

ْ
خ
َ
ٕ
ْ

ِ
ل
َ

ْ

َ
ْ
ٕ
َ
و
ِ
ا
َ
و
ْ

َ
ْ
ٕ
َ
و
Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar

144


ِ

ِ

َ
و
ِ
مو
َ
ؼ
ْ

َ
ٕ
ْ

ْ
ن
ِ

َ
و
ن
َ ي
ِ
ع
ْ
ؿ
َ
ى
ِ
َ
ص
َ
ب
َ
و
ْ
ن
ِ

َ
و
ن
َ

ِ
و
َ
س
ِ

ْ
ن
ِ

َ
و
ن
َ ى
ِ

ْ
ؾ
َ

َ
ن
ِ

َ
و
ِ
يَ كو
َ
ق
ِ
ْ
ل َ ف
ِ
و
َ
ل
ن
ِ
ً
َ
س
ْ
ئ
ِ
ب
ِ
يَ كو
َ
ط
ِ

ْ
.

ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ ي
ِ
ـ
ِ
ػْ ك
ِ

َ

َ
ح
ِ
ب
ْ
ن
َ
ي
ِ
ـَـ
ْ

َ
و ك
ِ

َ
ر
َ
ح ك
ِ
ؾ
ْ
ض
َ
ػ
ِ
ب

ْ
ن
ل
ؿ
َ
و
َ
ك
َ
و
ِ

َ
ً
ن

َ
ث
ُ

َ
و
ُ
ؾ
ُ
ؼ
ْ

ْ
ً
ن

َ
ث ى
ِ

ْ
ؾ
َ
َ ذ
َ
َ ك
ِ
ـ
ِ
د

َ

ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ
ن
َ ك
ُ

َ
ل
ْ

َ

َ
ي
َ
ق
ِ
او
َ
ع
ْ

ِ
ف و
َ
قْ ك ّ د ،
ِ
ة
َ
ر
ِ
خ
ْ
ٔ
َ
و
َ

ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ
ن

ِ
او
َ

ِ
جو
ُ
َ ك
ُ

َ
ل
ْ

َ
َ ك
ِ

َ ْ
ح
َ
ر
َ
م
ِ
ئ
َ
ز
َ

َ
و َ ك
ِ
ت
َ
ر
ِ
ػ
ْ
غ
َ

َ
ي
َ

َ

ل
س
َ
و

ْ
ن
ِ

ن
لُ
ٍ
م
ْ
ث
ِ

َ
ي
َ
ؿق
ِ
ـ
َ
غ
ْ

َ
و
ْ
ن
ِ

ن
لُ

ر
ِ
ب
َ
ز
ْ
و
َ
ػ
ْ

َ
و
ِ
يلـ
َ
ْ
لو
ِ
ب َ ةو
َ
جلـ
َ
و

َ
ن
ِ

ِ
رولـ .
Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar

145


ْ
ر
ِ
ػ
ْ

ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ
ِ
ي
ل

ُ
ِ
ٕ
ٍ
د
ل
ؿ
َُ
م ً ة
َ
ر
ِ
ػ
ْ
غ
َ

ً
ي
ل
و
َ
،
َ
نو
َ
ح
ْ

ُ
ك
ن
ب
َ
ر
ن

َ
ر

ِ
ة
ل
ز
ِ
ع
ْ

ل

َ

َ
نو
ُ
ػ
ِ
ص
َ

ٌ
م
َ

َ

َ
و َ ذ
َ

ْ
ل ـ
َ

ِ
ؾ
َ

ْ
ر
ُ
ُ د
ْ
ؿ
َ
ْ

َ
و
ل
ل
ِ
ـ
ِ
ه

ن

َ
ر
َ

ِ
َ
دو
َ
ع
ْ
.
Duʿā Janāzah Ṣalāh – to be recited in third takbīr:

ُ
هْـ
َ
ُ ف
ْ

َ
و
ِ
ه
ِ
او
َ

َ
و
ُ
ه
ْ َ
ح
ْ
ر
َ
و
ُ
ه
َ

ْ
ر
ِ
ػ
ْ

ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ .
لو
ِ
ب
ُ
ه
ْ
ؾ
ِ
س
ْ

َ
و
ُ
ه
َ
ؾ
َ
خْ د
َ

ْ
ع
ن

َ
و
َ
و
ُ
ه
َ

ُ
زُ ك
ْ
م
ِ
رْ
َ

َ
و ْـ ،
ِ
د
َ َ
ز
ْ

َ
و ِ ٍ
ْ
ؾ
ل
ث
َ
و
ِ
او
َ

،
ِ
سَ ك ل د
ْ
ن
ِ

ُ
ض
َ
ق
ْ
ب
َ
ْ
ٕ
ُ

ْ
و
ل
ث ى
ل
ؼَـ
ُ

َ
َ و
َ
و
َ
ط
َ
ْ
ل
ْ
ن
ِ

ِ
ه
ن
ؼَ ك
َ
و
و
ً
ج
ْ
و
َ
ز
َ
و
ِ
ه
ِ
ؾ
ْ

َ

ْ
ن
ِ

ً
ْ
ر
َ
خ
ً

ْ

َ

َ
و ،
ِ
ه
ِ
ر
َ
د
ْ
ن
ِ

ً
ْ
ر
َ
خ
ً
ر
َ
د
ُ
ه
ْ

ِ
د
ْ
ب
َ

َ
و

ِ
ْ
ز
َ
ؼ
ْ

ِ

َ
ذ
َ

ْ
ن
ِ

ُ
ه
ْ
ذ
ِ

َ

َ
و
َ
يلـ
َ
ْ
ل
ُ
ه
ْ
ؾ
ِ
خ
ْ
د
َ

َ
و ،
ِ
ه
ِ
ج
ْ
و
َ
ز
ْ
ن
ِ

ً
ْ
ر
َ
خ

ِ
رولـ
ِ

َ
ذ
َ

ْ
ن
ِ

َ
و
ِ
ه
ِ
َـْ
ِ
ا
َ
و .
Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar

146

Takbīr to be recited on ʿEid:

ل
ل ـ
ُ
ه
ُ َ
زْ
َ

ُ
هـ
ل
ؾ
ُ َ
زْ
َ

ُ
هـ
ل
ؾ
ُ َ
زْ
َ
،
َ
ٓ
َ
ه
َ

ل
ٓ
ُ
هـ
ل
ؾ
َ
و
ُ
هـ
ل
ؾ

ُ َ
زْ
َ
،
ُ
هـ
ل
ؾ
ُ َ
زْ
َ

ِ
هـ
ل
ؾ
ِ

َ
و ُ د
ْ
ؿ
َ
ْ
.

ُ
هـ
ل
ؾ
ُ َ
زْ
َ

ً
ر
ِ
َ ُ د
ْ
ؿ
َ
ْ

َ
و
ِ
هـ
ل
ؾ
ً
ر
ِ
ث َ
َ
نو
َ
ح
ْ

ُ

َ
و
ل
ل ـ
ِ
ه ً ة
َ
رْ ؽ
ُ
ب
ً ق
ِ

َ

َ
و ،
َ
ٓ
َ
ه
َ

ل
ٓ
ُ
هـ
ل
ؾ
َ
ٓ
َ
و ُ د
ُ

ْ
عَ ك
ل
ٓ
ُ
هو
ل

َ

ِ
ص
ِ
ؾ
ْ
ُ م
ُ
ه
َ

َ
ن ن د
ْ
و
َ

َ
و
َ
ه
ِ
رَ
َ
نو
ُ
ر
ِ
او َ ؽ
ْ
،
َ
ٓ
َ
ه
َ

ل
ٓ
ُ
هـ
ل
ؾ
ُ
ه َ د
ْ
ح
َ
و
َ
قَ د
َ

ُ
ه َ د
ْ

َ
و
َ
َ
صَ ك
َ
و
ُ
ه َ د
ْ

َ

ل
ز
َ

َ

َ
و
َ
م
َ
ز
َ

َ
و
ُ
ه َ دْـ
ُ
ج
َ

َ
ز
ْ
ح
َ
ٕ
ُ
ه َ د
ْ
ح
َ
و
َ
ٓ

َ
ه
َ

ل
ٓ
ُ
هـ
ل
ؾ
ُ
هـ
ل
ؾ
َ

َ
و
ُ َ
زْ
َ
،
ُ
هـ
ل
ؾ
َ

ُ َ
زْ
َ

ِ
هـ
ل
ؾ
ِ

َ
و ُ د
ْ
ؿ
َ
ْ
.
Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar

147

Sayyid al-istighfār – The Paragon Of Istighfār :
Recite Morning and Evening
وكو
َ
كُ د
ْ

َ
وكو ، ي
ِ
ـَ
ْ
ؼ
َ
ؾ
َ
خ
َ
ًْ ك
ل
ٓ
َ
ه
َ
ٓ
ن
ب
َ
ر
َ
ًْ ك
ل
م
ُ
ف
ل
ؾ
و
ن
َ
ْ
ن
ِ
َ ك
ِ
ب
ُ
ذو
ُ
،
ُ
ً
ْ
ع
َ
طَ
ْ
و
َ
ك
ِ
د
ْ

َ
و
َ
و
َ
ك
ِ
د
ْ
ف
َ
َ ذ
َ

ُ
هل كن
َ
ا
ِ
ل
ْ
ر
ِ
ػ
ْ
وا ، ي
ِ
ْ ك
َ
ذ
ِ
ب
ُ
او
ُ
ب
َ

َ
و
ل
َ ذ
َ
َ ك
ِ

َ
ؿ
ْ
ع
ِ
ـ
ِ
ب َ ك
َ

ُ
او
ُ
ب
َ

ُ
ً
ْ
عَـ
َ

َ
ًْ ك
َ

ل
ٓ
َ

ْ
وُ ك
ّ
ذ
ُ
ر
ِ
ػ
ْ
غ
َ
ٓ .

It is sunnah to end the duʿā with ṣalāh (Salutation) and Hamd
(Praise):

َ
م
ل
ؾ
َ
و ه
ِ
آ َ ذ
َ

َ
و
ٍ
د
ل
ؿ
َُ
م وَ ك
ِ
د
ن
ق
َ
َ ذ
َ

ُ
هـ
ل
ؾ ل ذ
َ

َ
و

َ
ْ

ِ
َ
دو
َ
ع
ْ

ن

َ
ر
ِ
هـ
ل
ؾ
ِ
ُ د
ْ
ؿ
َ
ْ

َ
و

Appendix 2:Authorized Books in Shafi’i Madhhab

148

Appendix 2: Authorized Books in Shāfiʿī Madhhab

The main aspect in the foundation of the madhhab is the
verdict of the al-Imām. The ʿUlamāʾ and the books constitute the
basis and source of strength of the madhhab. The ʿUlamāʾ
explain and elaborate the original verdict of the Imām and
disseminate them while the books preserve and ensure that the
authentic views of the madhhab are transmitted to a later
generation.
Imām al-ḥarāmain ʿAbd al-Malik ibn ʿAbdullah al-Juwaynī
(478 H) has gathered all four main fiqh books of al-qawl al-jadīd
(new verdict) of al-Imām al-Shāfiʿī (204 H) namely al-Umm, al-
Imlaʾ, al-Mukhtaṣar by al-Imām al-Buwaiṭī (231 H) and al-
Mukhtaṣar by al-Imām al-Muzānī (264 H) in one book entitled
Nihāyat al-Maṭlab.
This book of Imām al-ḥarāmain has been abridged three
times by his student, Hujjat al-Islām al-Imām al-Ghazālī (505
H). The first abridgement is al-Basīt, al-Wasīt the second and
finally al-Wajīz. Al-Imām al-Rāfiʿī (623 H) summarized al-Wajīz
and entitled it al-Muḥarrar. Al-Imām al-Rāfiʿī also had writen a
commentary of al-Wajiz in two books namely Sharh al-kabir or
Fath al-ʿAziz fi sharh al-Wajīz and Sharh al-ṣaghīr.
Al-Imām al-Nawawī (676 H) abridged Fath al-ʿAziz in his
book, Rauḍat al-ṭālibīn wa ʿumdat al-muftiyyīn. This was later
Appendix 2:Authorized Books in Shafi’i Madhhab

149

abridged by Ibn al-Muqrī (837 H) in Rauḍ al-ṭalib and Shaykh
al-Islām Zakariyyā al-Anṣārī (925 H) compiled a commentary on
it, naming it Asna al-maṭālib sharh Rauḍ al-ṭālib. Beside ar-
Rauḍ, Rauḍah al-ṭālibīn also has been abridged by al-Imām
Aḥmad ibn ʿUmar al-Muzajjad (930 H) in the book entitled, al-
ʿUbab and al-Imām Ibn Ḥajar al-Makkī prepared a commentary
named al-Īʿāb sharh al-ʿUbāb. Al-Sharaf al-Muqrī ṣāḥib al-
Rauḍ abridged it second time in a book entitled al-Irshād. A
commentary on it was prepared by al-Imām Ibn Ḥajar al-Makkī
named Fath al-jawād sharh al-Irshād.
Al-Imām al-Nawawī had abridged al-Muharrar and entitled
it Minhāj al-ṭālibīn. It was thereafter abridged by Shaykh al-
Islām Zakariyyā al-Anṣārī in his book Manhaj al-ṭullab and he
authored a commentary on it namely Fath al-Wahhāb bi sharḥ
Manhaj al-ṭullab. Al-Imām al-Jauharī abridged al-Manhaj and
named it al-Nahj.
Tarjīḥ (preference) in the madhhab rests upon the verdicts
of al-Shaykhayn; al-Imām al-Rāfiʿī and al-Imām al-Nawawī. This
is the unanimous view of muhaqqiqs (researchers) of the
madhhab. If these two Imāms have a difference opinion, the
verdict of al-Imām al-Nawawī will be given preference over the
verdict of al-Imām al-Rafiʿī.
If the writings of al-Imām al-Nawawī differ, generally the
the order of what will be given preference to is (1) al-Tahqīq, (2)
Appendix 2:Authorized Books in Shafi’i Madhhab

150

al-Majmūʿ, (3) al-Tanqīḥ, (4) al-Rauḍah, (5) al-Minhāj and his
fatāwā (legal verdicts), (7) Sharh Muslim, and finally (8) Taṣḥīḥ
al-Tanbīh and its nukāt (marginal note). The view on which of
his books are unanimous will be given preference over the view
on which only a few of his books are unanimous. The view
discused under its relevant chapter is given preference over that
which is discussed in another chapter.
Al-Imām al-Subkī (765 H) mentioned regarding al-Minhaj
of al-Imām al-Nawawī, “In this era, this book is the most
excellent book for students and many scholars to understand the
madhhab.” There are almost one hundred commentaries of the al-
Minhāj. It has been abridged, explained, annotated and compiled
in the form of poetry. The four main commentaries of al-Minhaj
are (1) Tuḥfat al-muhtāj by al-Imām Aḥmad ibn ʿAlī ibn Ḥajar
al-Haytamī al-Makkī (974 H), (2) Nihāyat al-muhtāj ilā sharh
al-Minhāj by al-Imām Shams al-Dīn Muḥammad ibn Aḥmad ibn
Hamzah al-Ramlī (1004 H), (3) Mughnī al-muhtāj ilā maʿrifat
al-maʿāni alfāẓ sharh al-Minhāj by al-Imām Shams al-Dīn
Muḥammad ibn Aḥmad al-Khāṭib al-Shirbīnī (977 H) and (4)
Kanz al-rāghibīn sharh Minhāj al-ṭālibīn by al-Imām Jalāl al-
Dīn Muḥammad ibn Aḥmad al-Maḥallī (864 H).
The above mentioned books hold an authoritative position
in the madhhab. However, if there is difference opinion,
preference is given to al-Tuḥfah of al-Imām Ibn Ḥajar al-
Appendix 2:Authorized Books in Shafi’i Madhhab

151

Haytamī and al-Nihayah of al-Imām Shams al-Dīn al-Ramlī.
Thereafter, preference is given to Sharh al-ṣaghīr ʿalā al-Bahjah
and then, Fath al-Wahhāb bi sharh Manhaj al-ṭullāb both by
Shaykh al-Islām Zakariyyā al-Anṣārī. Finally, preference is given
to Sharh al-Imām al-Khāṭib al-Shirbīnī and Sharh al-Imām al-
Maḥallī.
Among the books of al-Imām Ibn Ḥajar, the order of merit
is al-Tuḥfah, Fatḥ al-Jawād, al-Imdād, the fatāwā (legal
opinions) and sharh al-ʿUbāb have the same merit, however,
giving preference to the commentary is better.
The order of merit among the ḥawāshī (marginal notes) is
ḥāshiyah ʿalā Sharh al-Manhaj by al-Imām ʿAlī al-Ziyādī (1024
H) then Ibn Qasim al-ʿAbbādī (994 H) on al-Tuḥfah, then Shaykh
ʿUmairah (957 H) marginal note on al-Maḥallī, then the verdict
of Shaykh ʿAlī al-Shabramillisī (1087 H) on al-Nihāyah.
Thereafter, Ḥāshiyah al-Halabī, al-Shaubarī, al-ʿAnānī. Their
opinions are taken if they do not differ with the original
standpoint.
Despite this, deriving rulings from the book alone without
studying under the ʿUlamāʾ is not permissible. Rasūlullah ¸ said:
Knowledge is acquired through
learning from the scholar.
Appendix 3: 'Alam

152

Appendix 3: ʿAlam – Biographical Notes

Al-Imām al-Shāfiʿī

Al-Imām al-Shāfiʿī is Muḥammad ibn Idrīs ibn al-ʿAbbās
ibn ʿUthmān ibn Shafiʿ ibn al-Sāʾib ibn ʿAbdullah ibn ʿAbd Yazid
ibn Hāshim ibn al-Muttalib ibn ʿAbd Manaf, Abu ʿAbdillah al-
Qurashī al-Makkī al-Shāfiʿī , the offspring of the House of the
Prophet, the peerless one of the great mujtahid imāms and
jurisprudent par excellence, the scrupulously pious ascetic and
Friend of Allah.
He was born in Ghazza, Palestine in 150 H, the year of al-
Imām Abū Hanīfah‟s death, and moved to Makkah at the age of
two, following his father‟s death, where he grew up. He was
early a skillful archer, then he took to learn language and poetry
until he gave himself to fiqh, beginning with hadīth. He
memorized the Qurʾān at age seven, then al-Imām Mālik‟s
Muwaṭṭaʾ at age ten, at which time his teacher would deputize
him to teach in his absence. At age thirteen he went to see al-
Imām Mālik, who was impressed by his memory and
intelligence.
al-Imām Mālik ibn Anas and al-Imām Muḥammad ibn al-
Hasan al-Shaybānī were among his most prominent teachers and
he took position against both of them in fiqh.
Appendix 3: 'Alam

153

Like al-Imām Abu Hanīfah and al-Imām al-Bukhārī, he
recited the entire Qurʾān each day at prayer, and twice a day in
the month of Ramaḍan.
al-Imām al-Muzānī said: “I never saw one more handsome
of face than al-Shāfiʿī . If he grasped his beard it would not
exceed his fist.” al-Imām Ibn Rahuyah described him in Makkah
as wearing bright white clothes with an intensely black beard. al-
Imām al-Za`farani said that when he was in Baghdad in the year
195 he dyed his beard with henna.
Abu `Ubayd al-Qasim ibn Sallam said: “If the intelligence
of an entire nation was brought together he would have
encompassed it.” Similarly, al-Muzani said: “I have been looking
into al-Shāfiʿī‟s Riṣalāh for fifty years, and I do not recall a
single time I looked at it without learning some new benefit.”
Someone criticized al-Imām Aḥmad ibn Hanbal for
attending the fiqh sessions of al-Shāfiʿī and leaving the hadīth
sessions of al-Imām Sufyan ibn ʿUyaynah. Imām Aḥmad replied:
“Keep quiet! If you miss a hadīth with a shorter chain you can
find it elsewhere with a longer chain and it will not harm you.
But if you do not have the reasoning of this man [al-Shāfiʿī], I
fear you will never be able to find it elsewhere.”
Yūnus ibn Abī Yaʿlā said: “Whenever al-Shāfiʿī went into
tafsīr, it was as if he had witnessed the revelation.” Aḥmad ibn
Appendix 3: 'Alam

154

Ḥanbal also said: “Not one of the scholars of hadīth touched an
inkwell nor a pen except he owed a huge debt to al-Shāfiʿī .”
Two schools of legal thought or madhāhīb are actually
attributed to al-Imām al-Shāfiʿī, englobing his writings and legal
opinions (fatāwā). These two schools are known in the
terminology of jurists as “al-Qadīm” (The Old) and “al-Jadīd”
(The New), corresponding respectively to his stays in Iraq and
Egypt. The most prominent transmitters of the Qawl al-Jadīd
among al-Shāfiʿī‟s students are al-Buwayṭī, al-Muzānī, al-Rabīʿ
al-Murādī, and al-Bulqīnī, in Kitab al-Umm (The Motherbook).
The most prominent transmitters of the Qawl al-Qadīm are al-
Imām Aḥmad ibn Ḥanbal, al-Karābīsī, al-Zaʿfarānī, and Abū
Thawr.
Al-Subkī related that the Shāfiʿī scholars considered al-
Rabīʿs narration from al-Shāfiʿī sounder from the viewpoint of
transmission, while they considered al-Muzānī‟s sounder from
the viewpoint of fiqh, although both were established hadīth
masters.
Al-Imām Al-Shāfiʿī is the author of some 113 works, it was
nonetheless al-Shāfiʿī‟s hope that “people would learn this
knowledge without ascribing a single letter of it to me,” and as
Shaykh al-Islām Zakariyyā al-Anṣārī remarked, “Allah granted
his wish, for one seldom hears any position of his, save that it is
ascribed to others of his school with the words, al-Rāfiʿī or al-
Appendix 3: 'Alam

155

Nawawī or al-Zarkashī says …” and the like. He studied and
taught Sacred Law in Cairo until his death at fifty-three year of
age in 204 H. the end of a lifetime of service to Islām and the
Muslims by one of the greatest in knowledge of the Qurʾān and
Sunnah.

Imām al-ḥarāmain

Imām al-ḥarāmain (The Imām of the Two Sanctuaries) Abū
Maʿālī ʿAbd al-Mālik ibn ʿAbdullah ibn Yūsuf al-Juwaynī, a
scholar in tenets of faith and the Imām of the Shāfiʿī school of his
time, originally from Juwain (in present-day Afghanistan), born
in 419 H. He was educated by his father, and after his death read
his father‟s entire library and then took his place as teacher at
Nishapur, though he was later forced to travel to Baghdad
because of trouble between the Ashʿaris, Muʾtazilites, and
Shiites. After meeting the greatest scholar of Baghdad, he went
on to Makkah, living in the Sacred Precint for four years, after
which he moved to Madīnah and taught and gave fatāwā (formal
legal opinions), gaining his nickname, the Imām of the Two
Sanctuaries, i.e. Makkah and Madīnah.
At length he returned to Persia, where the vizier Niẓām al-
Mulk, having built a first Niẓāmiyyah Academy in Baghdad for
Abū Ishaq al-Shīrāzī to teach in, built a second one for Imām al-
Appendix 3: 'Alam

156

ḥarāmain at Nishapur. It was here the Imām wrote in earnest,
completing his fifteen-volume “Nihāyat al-maṭlab fi dirāyat al-
madhhab” which no one in the field of Islāmic law had ever
produced the like of, as well as other works in tenet of faith,
Ashʿari theology, fundamentals of Islām ic legal methodology,
and Shāfiʿī law. Among his greates legacies to Islām and the
Muslim was his student al-Imām al-Ghazālī, who is said to have
surpassed even the Imām at the end of his life. He died in
Nishapur in 478 H.

Al-Imām Abū Ishaq al-Shīrāzī

Al-Imām Abū Ishaq, Ibrāhīm ibn ʿAlī ibn Yūsuf al-Shīrāzī
al-Fayruzābādī is a Shāfiʿī Imām, teacher, and debater. Born in
Fayruzābād, Persia, in 393 H, he studied in Shiraz and Basra
before coming to Baghdad where he displayed his genius in
Sacred Law, becoming the mufti of the Muslim Ummah (Islām ic
Community) of his time, the sheikh of the Niẓāmiyyah Academy
which the vizier Niẓām al-Mulk built in Baghdad to
accommodate al-Imām Abū Ishaq‟s students.
He was known for the persuasiveness with which he could
urge a case in discussions, and he authored many works, among
the most famous of them his two-volume al-Muhadhdhab fī fiqh
al-Imām al-Shāfiʿī which took him fourteen years to produce,
Appendix 3: 'Alam

157

and which furnished the basic text for al-Imām al-Nawawī‟s al-
Majmūʿ Sharh al-Muhadhdhab. He died in Baghdad in 476 H.

Al-Imām al-Ghazālī

Hujjatul Islām (Proof of Islām ) Abu Hamid Muḥammad
ibn Muḥammad al-Ghazālī al-Ṭūsī is the Shāfiʿī Imām and Sufi
adept born in Tabiran, near Ṭūs (just north of present-day
Mashhad, Iran) in 450 H. The Imām of his time, nicknamed al-
Shāfiʿī the Second for his legal virtuousity, he was a brilliant
intellectual who first studied jurisprudence at Ṭūs, and then
travelled the Islāmic world, to Baghdad, Damascus, Jerusalem,
Cairo, Alexandria, Makkah and Madīnah, taking fiqh from its
master, among them Imām al-ḥarāmain al-Juwaynī, with whom
he studied until the Imām‟s death, becoming at his hands a
scholar in Shāfiʿī law, logic, tenet of faith, debate and in the
rationalistic doctrines of the philosophical school of his time,
which he was later called upon to refute. When Imām al-
ḥarāmain died, al-Imām al-Ghazālī debated the Imāms and
scholars of Baghdad in the presence of the vizier Niẓām al-Mulk,
who was so impressed that he appointed him to a teaching post at
the Niẓāmiyyah Academy in Baghdad, where word of his
brilliance spread, and scholars journeyed to him.
Appendix 3: 'Alam

158

His worldly success was something of a mixed blessing, and
in mid-carreer, after considerable reflection, he was gripped by
an intense fear for his soul and his fate in the afterlife, and he
resigned from his post, travelling first to Jerusalem and then to
Damascus to purify his heart by following the way of Sufism. In
Damascus he lived in seclusion for some ten years, enganged in
spiritual struggle and the remembrance of Allah, at the end of
which he emerged to produce his masterpiece Ihyā ʿulūm al-dīn,
the work shows how deeply al-Imām al-Ghazālī personally
realized what he wrote about, and his masterly treatment of
hundreds of questions dealing with the inner life that no one had
previously discussed or solved is a performance of sustained
excellence that shows its author‟s well-disciplined, legal intellect
and profound appreciation of human psychology. He also wrote
nearly two hundred other works, on the theory of government,
Sacred Law, refutation of philosophers, tenet of faith, Sufism,
Qurʾānic exegesis, scholastic theology, and bases of Islām ic
jurisprudence. He died in Tabiran in 505 H.


Appendix 3: 'Alam

159

Al-Imām al-Rāfiʿī

Abū al-Qāsim ʿAbd al-Karīm ibn Muḥammad al-Rāfiʿī of
Qazvin, Persia, born in 557 H is the imām of his time in Sacred
Law and Qurʾānic exegesis. He represents, with al-Imām al-
Nawawī, the principle reference of the late Shāfiʿī School. His
main work, a commentary on al-Imām al-Ghazālī al-Wajiz
entitled Fath al-ʿAzīz fī sharh al-Wajīz was later to furnish the
textual basis for al-Imām al-Nawawī‟s Minhāj al-ṭālibīn. Al-
Imām Taj al-Dīn al-Subkī noted of its author, “Al-Imām al-Rāfiʿī
was steeped to repletion in the sciences of Sacred Law, Qurʾānic
exegesis, hadīth, and fundamentals of Islāmic legal methodology,
towering above his contemporaries in the transmission of
evidence, in research, guidance, and in attainment…. It was as if
jurisprudence had been dead, and he revived it and spread it,
raising its foundation after ignorance had killed and buried it.”
He authored works in Sacred Law and history, and taught
Qurʾānic exegesis and hadīth in Qazvin, where the hadīth master
Imām Mundhīrī was among his students. Known as a pure-
hearted ascetic who followed the mystic path, al-Imām al-
Nawawī observed of him that he “had a firm standing in
righteous and many miracles were vouchsafed to him.” He died
in Qazvin in 623 H.

Appendix 3: 'Alam

160

Al-Imām al-Nawawī

Al-Imām Muhy al-Dīn Abū Zakariyyā Yahyā ibn Sharaf al-
Nawawī, born in the village of Nawa on the Horan Plain of
southern Syria in 631 H. He was the imām of the later Shāfiʿī
School, the scholar of his time in knowledge, piety, and
abstinence, a hadīth master (hāfiẓ), biographer, lexicologist, and
Sufi. When he first came to Damascus in 649 H., he memorized
the text of al-Imām Abū Ishaq al-Shīrāzī; al-Tanbīh in four and a
half month, then the first quarter of al-Muhadhdhab, after which
he accompanied his father on ḥajj, then visited Madīnah, and then
returned to Damascus, where he assiduously devoted himself to
mastering the Islām ic sciences. He took Shāfiʿī Law, hadīth,
tenets of faith, fundamentals of jurisprudence, Arabic and other
subjects from more than twenty-two scholars of the time,
including Abū Ibrāhīm Ishaq al-Maghrībī, ʿAbd al-Rahman ibn
Qudāmah al-Maqdisī, and others, at a period of his life in which,
as al-Imām al-Dhahabī notes, “his dedication to learning, night
and day, became proverbial.” Spending all his time in either
worship or gaining Sacred Knowledge, he took some twelve
lessons a day, only dozed off in the night at moments when sleep
overcame him, and drilled himself on the lessons he learned by
heart while walking along the street. Fastidious in detail and deep
in understanding of the subjects he thus mastered. He authored
Appendix 3: 'Alam

161

many great works in Shāfiʿī jurisprudence, hadīth, history, and
legal opinion, among the best known of which are his Minhāj al-
ṭālibīn, which has become a main reference for the Shāfiʿī
School, Riyāḍ al-ṣālihīn and Kitab al-adhkār in hadīth, and his
eighteen-volume Sharh Ṣahīh Muslim.
He lived simply, and it is related that his entire wardrobe
consisted of a turban and an ankle-length shirt with a single
button at the collar. After a residence in Damascus of twenty-
seven years, he returned the books he had borrowed from
charitable endowments, bade his friends farewell, visited the
graves of his Shaykhs who had died, and departed, going first to
Jerusalem and then to his native Nawa, where he became ill at his
father‟s home and died at forty-four years of age in 676 H, young
in years but great in benefit to Islām and the Muslims.

Shaykh al-Islām Zakariyyā al-Anṣārī

Shaykh al-Islām Abū Yahya Zakariyya ibn Muḥammad ibn
Aḥmad al-Anṣārī, born in Sanika, Egypt, in 823 H, is known as
the shaykh of shaykhs. He was the Shāfiʿī scholar of his time, a
hadīth master (hāfiẓ), judge and Qurʾānic exegete. He was
educated in Cairo in circumstances of such poverty that he used
to have to leave the mosque by night to look for watermelon
rinds, which he would wash and eat.
Appendix 3: 'Alam

162

When his knowledge later won him fame and recognition,
he was to receive so many gifts that his income before his
appointment to the judiciary amounted to nearly three thousand
dirhams a day, which he spent to gather books, teach and give
financial help to the students who studied with him. When Sultan
Quytubay al-Jurkasi appointed him as head of the judiciary in
Cairo, he accepted the post with reluctance after being repeatedly
asked, but when the sultan later committed a wrong act and he
sent him a letter upbraiding him, the sultan dismissed him and he
returned to teaching. He authored works in Sacred Law, the
sciences of Qurʾān and hadīth, logic, Arabic, fundamentals of
jurisprudence, and Sufism, and was the Shaykh of al-Imām Ibn
Ḥajar Haytamī. He died in 926 H at one hundred years of age.

Al-Imām Ibn Ḥajar al-Haytamī

Shihab al-Dīn Abū al-ʿAbbās Aḥmad ibn Muḥammad ibn
ʿAlī ibn Hajar al-Haytamī al-Makkī is born in 909 H in Abū
Haytam, western Egypt. He was the Shāfiʿī Imām of his time, a
brilliant scholar of in-depth applications of Sacred Law, and with
al-Imām Aḥmad al-Ramlī, represents the foremost resource for
fatwa (legal apinion) for the entire late Shāfiʿī School. He was
educated at al-Azhar, but later moved to Makkah, where he
authored major works in Shāfiʿī jurisprudence, hadīth, tenets of
Appendix 3: 'Alam

163

faith, education, hadīth commentary, and formal legal opinion.
His most famous works include Tuhfah al-muḥtāj bi sharh al-
Minhāj, a commentary on al-Imām al-Nawawī‟s Minhāj al-
ṭālibīn whose ten volumes represent a high point in Shāfiʿī
scholarship; the four volume al-Fatāwā al-kubrā al-fiqhiyyah;
and al-Zawājir ʿan iqtirāf al-kabāʾir, which with its detailed
presentation of Qurʾān and Hadīth evidence and masterful legal
inferences, remains unique among Muslim works dealing with
taqwa (godfearingness) and is even recognized by Hanafi
scholars like al-Imām Ibn ʿĀbidīn as a source of authoritative
legal texts valid in their own school. After a lifetime of
outstanding scholarship, the Imām died and was buried in
Makkah in 974 H.

Al-Imām Muḥammad al-Shirbīnī al-Khāṭib

Shams al-Din Muḥammad ibn Aḥmad al-Shirbīnī al-Khāṭib
of Cairo is a Shāfiʿī Imām and Qurʾānic exegete of knowledge
and piety, he studied in Cairo under al-Imām Aḥmad al-Ramlī, as
well as Nur al-Dīn al-Maḥallī, Aḥmad Burullusi and others, who
authorized him to give formal legal opinion and instruction. He
educated a multitude of scholars and his works won recognition
in their author‟s lifetime for their outstanding clarity and
reliability, among the most famous of them his four-volume
Appendix 3: 'Alam

164

Mughnī al-muḥtaj ilā maʿrifat maʿānī alfāz al-Minhāj, a
commentary on al-Imām al-Nawawī‟s Minhāj al-ṭālibīn, and his
Qurʾānic exegesis al-Sirāj al-munīr fi al-iʿāna ʿalā maʿrifa baʿd
kalām Rabbina al-Hakīm al-Khabīr. He died in Cairo in 977 H.

Bibliography
165

Bibliography

Books of Fiqh:
 Matn Safīnat al-najāʾ fī uṣūl al-dīn wa al-fiqh, al-Shaykh
Ibn Samīr al-Haḍramī, Dar al-fikr.
 Kāshifat al-sajāʾ sharh Safīnat al-najāʾ, al-Shaykh
Muḥammad al-Nawawī, Dar ihya al-kutub al-ʿArabiyyah,
Indonesia.
 Reliance of the Traveller, al-Shaykh Nuh Ha Mim Keller,
Aamna Publisher, Revised Edition, Delhi, India.
 Nail al-rajāʾ bi sharh Safīnat al-najāʾ, Sayyid Aḥmad ibn
ʿUmar al-Shaṭirī, Second edition 2007, Dar al-minhāj, Beirut.
 Al-Fiqh al-manhaji ʿalā madhhab al-Imām al-Shāfiʿī , Dr.
Mustafa al-Khīn, Eighth edition 2007, Dar al-Qalam,
Dimashq.
 Tuḥfat al-muḥtāj, Shihāb al-dīn Abū al-ʿAbbās Aḥmad ibn
Muḥammad ibn ʿAlī ibn Ḥajar al-Haytamī, Maktabah al-
thaqafah al-dīniyyah.
 Nihāyat al-muḥtāj ilā sharh al-Minhāj, Shams al-dīn
Muḥammad ibn Abī al-ʿAbbās Aḥmad ibn Hamzah ibn
Shihāb al-dīn al-Ramlī, 1994, Dar al-kutub al-ʿilmiyyah,
Beirut.
 Minhāj al-ṭālibīn, al-Imām Muhyid al-Dīn Abū Zakariyyā
Yahyā ibn Sharaf al-Nawawī, edited by Dr. Aḥmad ibn ʿAbd
Bibliography
166

al-ʿAzīz al-Ḥaddād, Second Edition, 2005, Dar al-Bashāʾir
al-Islāmiyyah, Beirut.
 Al-Majmūʿ, al-Imām Muhyi al-Dīn Abū Zakariyyā Yahyā
ibn Sharaf al-Nawawī, First Edition 2002, Dar ihyā al-turath
al-ʿArabī, Beirut.
 Ḥāshiyatan – Qalyūbī and ʿĀmīrah ʿalā sharh Jalāl al-
Dīn al-Maḥallī ʿalā sharh al-Minhāj, first edition, 1998,
Dar al-Fikr, Beirut.
 Fatḥ al-Wahhāb sharh Manhaj al-ṭullāb, Shaykh al-Islām
Abū Yahyā Zakariyyā al-Anṣārī, Dar al-fikr.
 Al-Iqnāʿ fī ḥalli alfāẓ Abī Shujāʿ, al-Shaykh Muḥammad
Shirbīnī Khāṭib, 2001, Dar al-fikr, Beirut.
 Ḥāshiyah iʿānat al-ṭālibīn, al-Imām Abū Bakr ibn
Muḥammad Shatta al-Dimyātī, 2002, Dar al-fikr, Beirut.
 Tuḥfatul Ikhwān, Mawlānā Muḥammad Ibrahim Ba‟kathah
translated by Shaykh Yousuf Abdullah Karaan, Second
edition 2002, Adam Publisher and Distributor, New Delhi.
 Al-Maqādir al-sharʿiyyah wa al-ahkām al-fiqhiyyah al-
mutaʿalliqah bihā kayl, wazn, miqyās, mundhu ʿahdi al-
Nabi ¸ wa taqwīmiha bi al-muʿāṣir, Dr. Muḥammad Najm
al-Dīn al-Kurdī, Second edition 2005, Cairo.



Bibliography
167


Books of Usul al-din
 Ḥāshiyat al-Imām al-Baijūrī ʿalā Jauharat al-tauhīd,
edited by Dr. ʿAlī Jumʿah Muḥammad al-Shāfiʿī , First
edition 2002, al-Qahirah.



Books of Introduction to the Madhhab:
 Madkhāl ilā kutub al-fiqh al-Shāfiʿī, Khazain al-
saniyyah, Shaykh ʿAbd al-Qadir ibn ʿAbd al-Muttalib al-
Mindili al-Andunisi, First Edition 2004, Muassasah al-
Riṣalāh, Beirut.
 Al-Madkhāl ilā dirāsat al-madhhab al-fiqhiyyah, Dr. ʿAlī
Jumuʿah, First Edition 2004, Dar al-Salām, Cairo.
 Al-Fawāʾid al-Makkiyyah



Books of Usul al-fiqh:
 Sharh al-Waraqāt li Imām al-ḥarāmain al-Juwainī, al-
Imām ʿAbd ar-Rahman ibn Ibrāhīm al-Fazarī Ibn al-Firkāh,
edited by Sarah Shāfi al-Ḥajirī, first edition 2002, Dar al-
Bashāʾir al-Islāmiyyah.
Bibliography
168

 Al-Wajīz fī uṣūl al-tashrīʿi al-Islāmī, Dr. Muḥammad
Hasan Hītū, First Edition 2006, Muassasah al-Riṣalāh,
Beirut.
 Al-Lumāʿ fī uṣūl al-fiqh, Imām Abū Ishaq al-Shīrāzī, Dar
al-kalimah.


__


Notes
169

Notes
Notes
170

Notes


‫‪‬‬
‫وصلى اهلل على سيدىا حمند وآلُ وسله‬ ‫واحلند هلل رب العاملني‬

Any part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior permission of the publisher.

PDF Edition 1430 H – 2009

Matn Safīnat al-najāʾ: Arabic and English. Sālim ibn ʿAbdullah ibn Saʿd ibn Samīr al-Haḍramī al-Shāfiʿī. The Ship of Salvation: A classic manual of Islāmic Doctrine and Jurisprudence In Arabic with English text, commentary and appendices, Edited and translated by: ʿAbdullah Muḥammad al-Marbūqī al-Shāfiʿī. Cover designed by: Mawlānā Yusūf ibn Yaʿqūb Ṣafar 1430 H

‫َُِّا و َاُوا الََِا‬ ‫فتي‬ ‫خف‬ ‫طَّ ُوا الدىي‬ ‫َلق‬ ‫َ ََا‬ ‫وطي‬ ‫ُُيا‬ ‫سف‬ ‫ل َي‬ ٍّ ‫ِح‬ ‫فيَا‬ ‫ل ي ست‬ ِ َ َِ ‫أل ل‬ ِ ‫ا َعنا‬ ‫أَّ َا‬ َ‫َى‬ ‫ص لح‬ َ ِ‫َا‬

ً‫فط‬ َ‫ُ َ ا‬ ‫َِ ُوا‬ ‫علن‬

‫عب ا‬ ً ‫َِاد‬ ‫َل َّا‬ ‫فَن‬ ‫في َا‬ َ ‫ُجة‬ ً َّ ‫ل‬

‫إ َّ هلل‬ ٌِ ‫َ َزوا‬ ‫ىظ‬ ‫َ َُوٍا‬ ‫جع ل‬

‫َّ َ ُوا‬ ‫واتخذ‬

Indeed Allah  Has Intelligent Servants, Who Have Divorced the World and Who Fear Temptations, They Pondered in the World and When They Knew, That it is Not a Homeland for a Living Person, They Took it as a Deep Sea and They Made, Good Actions in the World Their Ships.

Contents
Contents
Contents .................................................................................................... i Transliteration Key..................................................................................... v Translator’s Preface ................................................................................... vi Muqaddimah ............................................................................................. 1 Islam and Iman .......................................................................................... 2 The Integrals of Islām ......................................................................... 3 The Integrals of Īmān.......................................................................... 4 Al-Ahkam al-Sharʿiyyah ............................................................................. 7 Taharah .................................................................................................... 8 The Signs of Puberty .......................................................................... 9 The Conditions for Using a Stone ..................................................... 10 The Sunnah Way for Using a Stone .............................................. 11 The Obligatory Acts of Wuḍūʾ ......................................................... 12 The Intention..................................................................................... 12 The Sunnah Way to Perform Wuḍūʾ ............................................ 13 The Cleanliness of the Body ......................................................... 15 Water is Either a Little or Abundant ................................................. 15 The Things Make a Ritual Bath Compulsory ................................... 16 The Compulsory Acts of a Ritual Bath ............................................. 17 The Sunnah Way to Perform a Ritual Bath .................................. 18 The Conditions of Wuḍūʾ ................................................................. 19 The Factors that Nullify the Wuḍūʾ .................................................. 20 The forbidden Actions in the State of Impurity ................................ 21 The Causes of Tayammum ............................................................... 23 The Conditions of Tayammum ......................................................... 24 The Integrals of Tayammum ............................................................ 25 The Factors That Nullify Tayammum .............................................. 26 The Sunnah Way to Perform Tayammum .................................... 27 Three Types of Impurities That Can Be Purified .............................. 28 Impurities .......................................................................................... 29 The menstrual period ........................................................................ 31 Salah ...................................................................................................... 34 The Valid Excuses for Delaying the ṣalāh ........................................ 35 The Conditions of the ṣalāh .............................................................. 36 Ritual Impurities are of two types ..................................................... 37 The ʿAwrahs ..................................................................................... 39

i

Contents
The conditions for the muadhdhin: ............................................... 43 The Integrals of the ṣalāh .................................................................. 44 Description of the ṣalāh ................................................................ 47 Three Degrees of Intention ............................................................... 52 The Conditions of Takbīrat al-iḥrām................................................ 53 The Conditions of Sūrah al-Fātiḥah .................................................. 55 Tashdīds of Sūrah al-Fātiḥah ............................................................ 56 Sunnah to Raise the Hands ............................................................... 57 The Conditions of Sajdah ................................................................. 58 The Seven Limbs of Prostration ................................................... 58 Tashdīds of ṣalāh Upon Nabi  ........................................................ 60 Salām ................................................................................................ 60 The Times of ṣalāh ........................................................................... 61 Times When the ṣalāh is ḥarām ........................................................ 63 The Pauses in ṣalāh ........................................................................... 64 Ṭumaʾnīnah ....................................................................................... 65 The Causes for Sajdah Sahw ............................................................ 66 The Sunan Abʿaḍ .............................................................................. 67 The Factors Which Nullify the ṣalāh ................................................ 68 Sunan Rawatib .............................................................................. 70 Witr ṣalāh...................................................................................... 71 Tarāwīḥ ṣalāh:............................................................................... 72 Ḍuḥā ṣalāh: ................................................................................... 72 Taḥajjud ṣalāh: .............................................................................. 72 Taḥiyyat al-masjid: ....................................................................... 72 The Intention of Being an Imām ....................................................... 73 The Conditions for Following an Imām ........................................... 74 The Forms of Following the Imām ................................................... 77 The Conditions of Jamaʿ Taqdim ..................................................... 78 The Conditions of Jamaʿ Taʾkhir ...................................................... 79 The Conditions of Qasr ..................................................................... 80 Salat al-Jumuʿah...................................................................................... 82 The Conditions of Jumuʿah .............................................................. 82 Sunan and Adab of Jumuʿah ......................................................... 83 The Integrals of the Two Khuṭbahs .................................................. 84 The Conditions for Delivering the Two Khuṭbahs............................ 85 Janazah .................................................................................................. 88 Four Things Compulsory for the Deceased ............................................ 88 Washing the Deceased ...................................................................... 89 Shrouding the Deceased ................................................................... 90

ii

152 Imām al-ḥarāmain .................................................................................................................................................... 103 The Conditions for the Validity of Fasting .......................................... 92 The Exhumation of the Deceased .............. 102 Fasting of Ramaḍān ...................... 117 Unlawful Things While in Iḥrām ............................................... 148 Appendix 3: ʿAlam – Biographical Notes ................................................................................. 127 Ṣalāh – Prayer .............................................................. 115 The Integrals of Ḥajj ............................................................................................................................ 124 Appendices .................. 157 iii ................................................................................... 110 The Types of Breaking the Fast ............................................... 126 Appendix 1: Selected Duʿās and Adhkar........................................... 97 The Zakāh of ʿEid al-Fitr ............................................................................ 118 The Expiations of Ḥajj and ʿUmrah ........................................................................ 155 Al-Imām Abū Ishaq al-Shīrāzī .............. 91 The Grave ..................... 105 The Integrals of Fasting of Ramaḍān ...........................Contents The Integrals of ṣalāh Janazah ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 96 The Wealth upon Which Zakāh is Compulsory ....................... 136 Prophetic Duʿā: ........ 112 The Things Do Not Break the Fast ............................................................................... 116 The Wājibat of Ḥajj ............. 127 Ṭahārah – Purification .......... 100 Saum .................................................................................................................................. 130 Duʿā and Dhikr after ṣalāh: .......................... 94 Zakah ........ 152 Al-Imām al-Shāfiʿī ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 107 Qaḍāʾ of Fasting and Kaffarah................ 93 Seeking Assistance .................. 107 The Factors That Nullify Fasting .. 114 The Conditions for Ḥajj being Wājib ............................................................................................................................ 123 Khatimah ........................................... 118 To Visit the Tomb of Rasūlullah  ............................................... 99 The Eight Categories of Recipients ............................. 109 The Breaking of the Fast in Ramaḍān .......................................................... 105 The Conditions for Fasting Becomes Wājib ................ 116 The Integrals of ʿUmrah ........................................................................ 113 Hajj and ʿUmrah........................................................................... 140 Appendix 2: Authorized Books in Shāfiʿī Madhhab .................................................................................. 156 Al-Imām al-Ghazālī ..............................................................................................................................................

............... 160 Shaykh al-Islām Zakariyyā al-Anṣārī ........... 162 Al-Imām Muḥammad al-Shirbīnī al-Khāṭib . 165  iv ............................................................................................................................................................................ 163 Bibliography ...................Contents Al-Imām al-Rāfiʿī ........................................................................ 161 Al-Imām Ibn Ḥajar al-Haytamī............................. 159 Al-Imām al-Nawawī .................................

Transliteration Key Transliteration Key a b t th j ḥ kh d dh Long wovels ā ī ū Diphtong aw ay Doubled uwwa iyya r z s sh ṣ ḍ ṭ ẓ gh Short wovels a i u f q k l m n w h y The letter hamzah “‫ ”ء‬is transliterated as a right half ring (ʾ) and is not expressed when at the beginning. ‫ ـة‬is transliterated as “ah” in pause form and “at” in construct form. May Allah‟s blessings and peace be upon him. Honorific      Glorified and Most High. May peace be upon him. May Allah be pleased with them v . May Allah be pleased with him/her. ‫ ال‬is transliterated as “al” in both. The letter ʿayn “ ” is transliterated as a left half ring (ʿ). “al” is used with all letters. pause and construct form. hurūf al-shamsiyyah or hurūf al-qamariyyah.

the Compassionate. “Verily the reward for deeds depend upon intentions and indeed every vi . Muḥammad and upon his family and Companions. the Merciful. Peace and blessings be upon His noble Slave and Messenger. the Lord of all the worlds. All praise is to Allah.Translator’s Preface Translator’s Preface  In the name of Allah.   Amīr al-Muʾminīn Abū Ḥafs Sayyidunā ʿUmar ibn alKhaṭṭab  narrated that he heard Rasūlullah  saying.

The students are required to be familiar with the text of Safīnat al-najāʾ. Footnotes provide assistance for teacher in explaining the text. Najm al-dīn al-Kurdī. “Reliance of the Traveller” and “al-Iqnāʿ fī halli alfāẓi matn Abī Shujāʿ”. The biographical notes were taken from the book. The explanations were mostly derived from “Kāshifat al-sajāʾ sharh Safīnat al-najāʾ”.” and “Reliance of the Traveller”. his emigration will be considered for Allah and His Messenger. “Reliance of the Traveller”.The measurements and conversions were based on the book.” This book has been prepared for the beginner. especially those students studying at a “madrasah”. The additional chapter of Ḥajj and ʿUmrah was taken from the “Al-Fiqh al-manhaji ʿalā madhhab al-Imām al-Shāfiʿī. Every effort was made to present a precise and accurate translation with proper explanations. vii .Translator’s Preface person shall receive what he intended for. He whose emigration was towards the world or to be married to a woman. It is better if the students can memorize the Arabic text so that they gain acquaintance with the jurisprudence or at least be able to read it fluently. Thus. Many Arabic terminologies have been maintained with the translation in the bracket. he whose emigration was for Allah and His Messenger. “al-Maqādīr al-sharʿiyyah” by Dr. his emigration will be for whatever he migrated for.

I beseech Almighty Allah  for His acceptance and that He  makes this a source of benefit for all. here and in the hereafter.Translator’s Preface I would like to take this opportunity to pay a particular tribute to my mother. Mawlānā Muḥammad ibn Harun ʿAbasoomar. This book could not have been published without significant aid from Mawlānā Ibrahim Muḥammad and Mawlānā Imran Hatia. Selangor Ṣafar 1430 H viii . Āmīn. ʿAbdullah Muḥammad al-Marbūqī al-Shāfiʿī Shah Alam. This work is completed with the tremendous help and assistant of my ustadh. It is incumbent upon me to extend my deepest gratitude to my elders: Muftī Ibrahīm Desai and Mawlānā Muḥammad Ṭaha Karan for their encouragement and support. my friends Hāfiẓ Reeaz Iqbal and Hāfiẓ Ziyād Danka. my brother Hāfiẓ Luqmān Hasbi. It is through her sacrifice and duʿā that I was able to reach this stage. May Allah  reward them and all those who were involved directly or indirectly in completing this task. Lastly.

.

ُ‫يف أصول الديً والفق‬ ‫على مذٍب اإلماو الشافعي‬ The Ship of Salvation The Doctrine and Jurisprudence of the School of al-Imām al-Shāfiʿī .

He gives him the understanding of Dīn. the Merciful. the Lord of all the worlds. the Most Great. There is no power and might except through Allah. All praise is to Allah. Salutation and peace on our Master.Muqaddimah Muqaddimah For whomsoever Allah  intends goodness. the Seal of Prophethood. the Compassionate. 1 . Muḥammad . the Most High. [al-Bukhārī] In the name of Allah. We seek help from Him in worldly affairs and in matters of Dīn. and upon all his family and Companions.

Islam and Iman  2 .

purification or praise.4 1 The most virtuous physical worship is ṣalāh. the second year Hijrī.3 5. As for worship pertaining to the heart like imān (belief).1 3. blessings. To discharge zakāh. anger. 2 Zakāh literally means growth. To fast in the month of Ramaḍān. tafakkur (reflection). malice etc. patience. these are far more superior than physical worship. To perform ḥajj for those who are able. pride. love of Allah . In Sacred Law it is the name for a particular amount of property that must be paid to certain kinds of recipients under certain conditions. purification of blameworthy traits like greed. To bear witness that there is no god except Allah and that Muḥammad  is the messenger of Allah. The most virtuous of them being īmān. 2. hope.Islam and Iman Islam and Iman The Integrals of Islām Section: The Integrals of Islām are Five: 1. To establish ṣalāh. Rasulullah  fasted for nine complete Ramaḍāns. 3 . 3 Fasting was made farḍ in Shaʿbān.2 4. then fasting. maʿrifah (gnosis). repentance. contentment with Allah‟s decree. 4 Both ḥajj and ʿumrah are wājib in the Shāfiʿī‟s madhhab (school of thought). then ḥajj and then zakāh. trust in Allah .

that no one else participates in His attribute of divinity or in the rights He has over His creation. (3) al-Baqāʾ (Everlastingness). (6) Nakīr. To believe in His Books. It is wājib to know four books in particular: (1) the Tawrah of Nabī Mūsā 4 . who do not disobey Him and do as they are commanded. (12) al-Baṣr (Sight). (3) Isrāfīl.Islam and Iman The Integrals of Īmān Section: The Integrals of Īmān (Faith) are Six: 1. (8) Mālik. (9) al-ʿIlm (Knowledge).6 3. (5) Munkar. 7 To believe in all the Books revealed by Allah to His messengers. It is wājib to know ten of them: (1) Jibrīl. nor do they eat or drink. (4) Mukhālafatuh taʿāla bi al-hawādith (Absolute dissimilarity to created things). (10) alHayāh (Life) (11) al-Samʿ (Hearing). (5) Qiyāmuh taʿāla bī nafsih (Self-subsistence). [Īmān Mufaṣṣal (in detail)] It is wājib to know the attributes of Allah : (1) al-Wujūd (Being). His sole godhood. (9) Raqīb. (8) al-Irādah (Will). neither male nor female.7 5 [Īmān Mujmāl (in brief)] To believe in Allah‟s  existence. 6 To believe that the Angels are the honourable servants of Allah . To believe in Allah. (4) ʿIzrāʾīl. (2) Mīkāʾīl. (7) alQudrah (Power). (13) alKalām (Speech).5 2. They are created from light. To believe in His Angels. and (10) ʿĀ tīd. His oneness and uniqueness and that He is characterized by every perfection and exalted above any imperfection or impossibility. (6) al-Wahdāniyah (Oneness). (7) Riḍwān. not characterized by gender. (2) al-Qidām (Pre-eternity).

(3) the Injīl of Nabī ʿĪsā  and (4) the Qurʾān of Nabī Muhammad . To believe in His Messengers. 8 To believe in the Prophets and Messengers of Allah . (10) Yaʿqūb (Jacob). (22) Zakariyyā (Zacharias). (16) Hārūn (Aaron). (2) Idrīs (Enoch). and will then be resurrected.8 5. (13) Ayyūb (Job). (17) Dāwud (David). It also means to believe without doubt in Jannah (Heaven) and Jahannam (Hell). that Allah  sent them to man and jinn to guide them to the path of the Truth. (19) Ilyās (Elias). (14) Dhul Kiflī (Ezekiel). (9) Ishāq (Isaac). Punishment (for some sinful believers) and Torment (eternal for the unbeliever). (3) Conveying the message. 10 To believe that Allah  has ordained both good and evil before creating the creation and that all that has been and all that will be exists only through Allah‟s Qaḍāʾ (Decree). Some will be put in Hell out of justice and some in Paradise out of Allah‟s sheer generosity. (6) Lūṭ (Lot).Islam and Iman 4. Four attributes are necessary for all Messengers (1) Truthfullness. 9 To believe that everyone will die. and (25) Muḥammad (Peace and Salutation upon him and upon all of them). It is wājib to know twenty-five of them: (1) Adām. (12) Shūʿaib. (11) Yūsuf (Joseph). the Reckoning (after the Resurrection). good and evil. To believe in the Final Day. (20) al-Yāsaʿ (Elisha). (7) Ibrāhīm (Abraham).10 . 5 . the Recompense (in Paradise). (21) Yūnus (Jonah). and (4) Intelligence. (2) the Zabur of Nabī Dāwud . (23) Yahyā (John). (4) Hūd. (18) Sūlaymān (Soloman). the Mīzān (Scale). (2) Trustworthiness.the bridge over the Fire). the Questioning in the grave. To believe in Destiny. (24) ʿĪsā (Jesus).9 6. the Ṣirāṭ (Path . is from Allah the Exalted. (5) Ṣalīh. (3) Nūh (Noah). Qadr (Foreordinance) and Irādah (Will). (15) Mūsā (Moses). (8) Ismāʿīl (Ishmael).

Islam and Iman Section: The meaning of the Kalimah is “In reality none is worthy of worship except Allah”. 6 .

The Mandūb (recommended) action: One will be rewarded for performing them and will not be liable for punishment upon abandoning them. The Wājib (obligatory) action: One will be rewarded for performing them and will be liable for punishment upon abandoning them. 4. 2.The Rulings of the Sacred Law: In the Shāfiʿī Madhhab (school of thought). 3. 7 .Al-Ahkam al-Sharʿiyyah Al-Ahkam al-Sharʿiyyah Note: Al-Ahkam al-Sharʿiyyah . The Makrūh (offensive) action: One will be rewarded for abandoning them and will not be liable for punishment upon performing them. The Ḥarām (forbidden) action: One will be rewarded for abandoning them and will be liable for punishment upon performing them. The Mubāḥ (permissible) action: One will not be rewarded for performing them and will not be liable for punishment upon abandoning them. 5. the actions of those who are obligated to observe the precepts of religion take one of five rulings: 1.

Taharah  8 .

9 . 3. but so as to discipline the child. he will be beaten for neglecting it. not severely.2 1 When a child reaches the age of seven and is mumayyiz (discerning) i. 2 Pregnancy is not a sign of puberty.Taharah Taharah The Signs of Puberty Section: The Signs of Puberty are Three:1 1. he can eat.g. rather an emission of sexual fluid prior to pregnancy is. and not more than three strikes. wuḍūʾ). ṣalāh and other injuctions of Sharīʿah become wājib when a child reaches the age of puberty. 2. he is ordered to perform ṣalāh and all other injunctions pertaining to ṣalāh (e.e. Menstruation for a 9 year old girl. Reaching the age of 15 (lunar) years for a male or a female. Experiencing a wet dream by a 9 year old boy or girl. drink and clean himself after using the toilet unassisted. When he reaches ten.

using a stone will no longer suffice. though it is best to follow this up by washing with water. The impurity should not be completely dry. Something deserving respect (e. It is sunnah to use an odd number of stones (meaning three.6 2. five. Otherwise one needs to repeat using a stone that suffices in removing the impurity.Taharah The Conditions for Using a Stone Section: The Conditions for Using a Stone3 (to clean the private parts) are Eight:4 1. 3 Stones suffice to clean oneself. paper. 8 If the impurity becomes dry. seven etc.8 4. pure and removes filth. When this has been done. any remaining effect of impurity is excusable. 4 It is wājib to use water if one of these conditions is not found.9 5. Three5 stones should be used. 7 It means to remove the filth so that nothing remains but a trace that could not be removed unless one were to use water.g. 5 It is wājib to use either three stones or even three sides of one stone when one is sufficient to remove impurities.7 3. The impurity should not have spread out. an instrument of knowledge) or something edible can not replace the use of stones. No other impurity should come upon it. 6 Anything that is solid. It should purify. 10 . 9 Impurity should not reach another part of the body.).

2. seven and so on.Taharah 6. similarly wipe the left with the second. 7. The stones to be used should be pure. It is sunnah (recommended) to add an odd number of stones e. It will not be valid to use a wet stone. Begin to wipe from front to back on the right side with the first stone.g. Water should not splash onto the stone. 11 . It is makrūh (offensive) to use the right hand to clean the impurity. The impurity should not go beyond the inner buttock10 and the head of the penis. 3. and wipe both sides and the anus with the third. five.11 8. The Sunnah Way for Using a Stone Note: The Sunnah Way for Using a Stone: 1. 10 11 Inner buttock refers to that which is enfolded when standing. Each wiping must begin at a point on the skin that is free of impurity.

15 The minimum is to wipe part of a single hair. Washing the face. The Intention 12 The person performing ablution either intends removing a state of ḥadath (ritual impurity) or purification for the ṣalāh. up-to and including the elbows once.12 2. 14 Washing both arms completely. below the hairline). from the point where the hairline usually begins to the chin in length.e. Wiping any part of the head. Tartīb (to observe the above-mentioned sequence). 6. 12 . Washing both hands and arms including the elbows. Intention.13 3.Taharah The Obligatory Acts of Wuḍūʾ Section: The Obligatory Acts of Wuḍūʾ (Ritual Ablution) are Six: 1. provided this part does not hang below the limit of the head (i. Washing the feet including the ankles. 13 Washing the entire face.14 4. and from ear to ear in width.15 5.

as well as the skin beneath the hair. its time is at the beginning of washing the first portion of the face. Most Compassionate (to recite Bismillah completely). Wash the entire face. and then rinse the mouth and nose out three times. Tartīb (sequence) is to observe the sequence of the wuḍūʾ. three times. To make a verbal intention is a sunnah. Most Merciful. and basmalah: In the name of Allah. from the point where the hairline usually begins to the chin in length. Wash the hands up-to and including the wrists three times. It is obligatory to wash all facial hair – inner. 3. Use the miswāk (toothstick). Recite taʿawwudh: I take refuge in Allah from the accursed Shaitan (to recite Aʿudhubillah completely). The Sunnah Way to Perform Wuḍūʾ Note: The Sunnah Way to Perform Wuḍūʾ (Ritual Ablution): 1. whether the hair is thick or thin – such as the eyebrows. and from ear to ear in width. with three handfuls of water. One takes in a mouthful from a handful of water and snifts up some of the rest of the handful into the nostrils thrice.Taharah Section: Intention is to intend something simultaneously with the action. 13 . 2. outer. 4. moustache and so forth except for a thick beard. its place is in the heart. such that no latter limb of wuḍūʾ should precede a former limb.

9. 8. Allow the water to pass between the toes by using the little finger of the left hand. and then return them to point of commencement. but both hands. 6. Wash the feet up-to and including the ankles.to face the qiblah.to wash the limbs successively. . it is sunnah: . with fresh water.to avoid splashing water onto oneself. Wipe the head by passing the wet hands from the front of the head. . . up-to and including the elbows.not to waste water. It is sunnah to pass the fingers through each other. or ears. three times. not to talk except for a necessity.to begin with the right when washing the arms and legs. and . beginning with the little toe of the right foot.to begin with the top of the face and not to splash the water onto it. Wipe the inside of the ears with the fingertips and their outside with the thumbs. and ending with the little toe on the left. are washed simultaneously. three times. . three times. Wash both arms completely. sliding the paired hands to the back up to the nape of the neck. cheeks. 7.Taharah 5. three times. 14 . During wuḍūʾ.

(3) to pluck (or to shave) the hair of the underarms and nostrils. 16 The definition of māʾ al-mutlaq (general water) is that water which is without any attributes. it should not be plucked or shaved. It is ḥarām for both. except with the intention of jihād. (2) to clip moustache to the extent that the pink of the upper lip is visible. 15 . (5) to apply henna for women.Taharah The Cleanliness of the Body Note: The Cleanliness of the Body: It is sunnah (1) to trim the fingernails and toenails. and to shave the pubic hair (4) to apply kuhl (an antimonic compound). Circumcision is wājib for both men and women. Water is Either a Little or Abundant Section: Water16 is Either a Little or Abundant.17  A little amount of water is that which is less than two qullahs. 17 It is not permissible to remove hadath (wuḍūʾ or ritual bath) or remove impurity except with “general water”. men and women to dye their hair black.

even though the water does not change. Insertion the head of the penis into the vagina. impurity on the leg of a fly) that it is indiscernible by eyesight (meaning an average look that is neither a negligent glance nor a detailed inspection) or a dead creature without flowing blood falls into it. The Things Make a Ritual Bath Compulsory Section: The Things Make a Ritual Bath Compulsory are Six: 1.20 2. Discharge of semen. colour or smell) have changed. or animal. colour or smell changes. This applies to both running or stagnant water.21 18 If an impurity which is so small (e. will necessitate a ritual bath. adult or minor.19  Abundant water will not become impure except when its taste. 19 Even though none of the water‟s characteristics (i. A little amount of water will become impure when any impurity18 falls into it. 16 .g.Taharah   Abundant water that which is two qullahs (approximately 190 litres) or more. living or dead. 20 Insertion of the head of the penis into the front or back private part of a male or female human.e. taste. in both cases the water remains purifying.

the bath counts for that one but not the other. It is ḥarām to give a bath and to offer ṣalāh upon a martyr. 24 Ritual bath becomes wājib even in the case of dry birth or miscarriage. though if only one intention is made. Postnatal bleeding. 25 It is wājib to give a bath to a Muslim who is non-martyr.24 6. like egg-white. to the roots of the hair. 26 The intention is of removing hadath or janābah (major ritual impurity) or removing the impurity of haiḍ (menstruation). (2) with sexual gratification and (3) when moist.27 21 Male sperm and female sexual fluid are recognized by the fact that they (1) come in spurts by contractions. It is not wājib to give a bath to a disbeliever. and the 17 .22 4. Intention. including the area under the foreskin of an uncircumcized man. smell like bread dough.Taharah 3. under the nails and the outwardly visible portion of the ear canals. 22 Periodic discharge of blood from the vagina. Death. Menstruation. To ensure that water reaches the entire body. One bath will suffice with the intention of removing both major ritual impurity and the sunnah of the Friday prayer.26 2. 27 The water reaches all of the hair and skin. Childbirth.23 5. though it is permissible.25 The Compulsory Acts of a Ritual Bath Section: The Compulsory Acts of a Ritual Bath are Two: 1. 23 Blood discharged after giving birth. and when dry.

5. 9. To perform wuḍūʾ as the wuḍūʾ of ṣalāh. ensuring that water reaches all joints and folds. the Merciful. To begin in the name of Allah. 7.Taharah The Sunnah Way to Perform a Ritual Bath Note: The Sunnah Way to Perform a Ritual Bath: 4. To remove any dirt or impurity on the body. It is sunnah to apply musk (or any other fragrance) on a piece of cotton and insert it into the vagina if the bath was taken because of haiḍ. 18 . and to rub oneself. 6. To pour water over the right side of the body three times and then left side three times. private part of a non-virgin woman which is normally exposed when she squats to relieve herself. To pour water over the head three times intending to remove a major hadath (ritual impurity) or haiḍ (menstruation). 8. the Compassionate (to recite Bismillah completely).

Entering of the time (of ṣalāh)31 and Continuity. 2. 30 For the general public. for a person who constantly remains in the state of impurity.g. Being free from that which prevents the water from reaching the skin. Not to assume the farḍ (obligatory) acts as sunnah (recommended). Pure water. The age of understanding. 4. 29 A child reaches the stage of mumayyiz (discerning) when he can eat.30 8. these conditions are also applied for a ritual bath. drink and clean himself after using the toilet unassisted. 7.Taharah The Conditions of Wuḍūʾ Section: The Conditions of Wuḍūʾ are Ten:28 1. Islām . Nothing should be upon the limb that will change the (qualities of the) water. 19 . 5. 6. Knowledge of it (wuḍūʾ) being obligatory. Cleanliness from menstruation and postnatal bleeding. 9. – 10. it is suffice to know some of its acts are farḍ and some are sunnah.29 3. 28 The conditions for the validity of wuḍūʾ. dhuhā). 31 Wuḍūʾ or a ritual bath should be performed after the entering of the ṣalāhs‟ time for farḍ ṣalāh or at a particular time for sunnah ṣalāh (e.

37 32 Or anything else whether common or uncommon such as a worm or stone but not manī (semen). which do not break wuḍūʾ. excludes drowsing and daydreaming. 3. male and female without any barrier. Loss of intellect34 through sleep or other causes. whether wind or anything else. drunkenness etc.32 except semen. Wuḍūʾ will not break if this is only found in one of the two. 20 . Skin-to-skin contact between an adult. Among the signs of drowsing is that one can hear the words of those present. 36 Adult means the age that usually stirs up sexual desire in a person. Anything that exits from either the front or the rear private parts. even though without comprehension.33 2. 35 Or other causes like insanity.35 except sleep while firmly seated on the ground.36 non-mahram (marriageable). or someone who looks at something lustfully and sperm or sexual fluid are emitted. 34 Meaning the loss of the ability to distinguish. 33 An example of this being someone firmly seated who sleeps and has a wet dream.Taharah The Factors that Nullify the Wuḍūʾ Section: The Factors that Nullify the Wuḍūʾ are Four: 1.

nails. Touching does not include contact with teeth. or unintentionally. and even if be with the tongue or a malfunctional surplus limb. hair or a severed limb. Touching the private parts of a human with the palm or inner surface of the fingers. 38 Those parts of the palm which touch each-other when the hands are put together palm to palm. 21 . Wuḍūʾ is also broken by touching an aged person or a corpse of the opposite sex.Taharah 4.38 The forbidden Actions in the State of Impurity 37 The wuḍūʾ will break even if they touch without sexual desire.

Taharah Section: The Forbidden Actions for a Person in the State of Minor Impurity (in need of wuḍūʾ) are Four: (1) Ṣalāh. rings. The Forbidden Actions for a Person in the State of Menstruation are Ten: (1) Salat. (2) ṭawāf. its margins. (2) ṭawāf. and (10) to take sexual pleasure from what is between the navel and the knees. or clothes on which Qurʾān is written. (2) ṭawāf. (4) carrying or (5) reciting the Qurʾān and (6) to remain in the masjid. (8) divorce. 39 It is not permissible to touch the Qurʾān. However. it is permissible to carry a Qurʾān in baggage and to carry money. (3) touching. or the bag or box it is in. (3) touching or. the carrying strap attached to it. the spaces between its lines.39 The Forbidden Actions for a Person in the State of Major Impurity (in Need of Ritual Bath) are Six: (1) Ṣalah. (3) touching or (4) carrying the Qurʾān. (5) to remain in the masjid. whether its writing. (4) carrying the Qurʾān. (9) to pass through the masjid for a woman who thinks her blood might soil the masjid. binding. (7) fasting. (6) reciting the Qurʾān. 22 .

A pig.41 3. or that of worthy companions and animals with one. (2) disability. even if be in the future. (3) becoming seriously ill.42 The following six people or animals are classified unworthy: 1. A convicted married adulterer. (1) harm to life or limb. (4) an increase in one‟s ailment. 40 If there is a little water that is insufficient for attaining purity. Absence of water. 2. (6) considerable pain.40 2. 42 There is fear of one‟s own thirst. Illness.Taharah The Causes of Tayammum Section: The Causes of Tayammum (Dry Ablution) are Three: 1. 5. A person who forsakes ṣalāh. 4. 41 An ailment that a person fears water would cause. water should be used as much as possible and then tayammum should be performed for the rest of the limbs. 6. An Apostate. A non-Muslim from a non-Muslim country that has war with the Muslim country. Need for water exists by (oneself or) worthy animals. A vicious dog. 3. (5) a delay in recovering from one‟s illness. 23 . or (7) a bad effect from the water such as a radical change in one‟s skin colour or a visible part of the body.

The dust must not be mixed with flour or anything like flour. A person should intend the earth. if the wind blew earth onto a person and one then passed one‟s hands over one‟s face and arms. The dust must be pure. 45 Therefore.44 5. the tayammum will not be valid even though one stood in the wind with intention of having sand blown over one. black.43 2.e. The dust must not be used (i. yellow or salty in which nothing grows. 4.Taharah The Conditions of Tayammum Section: The Conditions of Tayammum are Ten: 1. 24 .45 6. It is not permissible to perform tayammum with earth that has been turned to ashes or with clay pottery that has been pounded and softened. already used on a limb or has been dusted off a limb). He should wipe his face and both hands with two strikes of dust. 3. 44 Like saffron or lime. It must be performed with (dust of) the earth. 43 It does not matter whether the earth is red.

8. Wiping of the face. 49 The intention of making ṣalāh permissible – it will not suffice to make the intention of removing the hadath.48 2.50 46 The preferred view is that tayammum will be correct if it has been performed after the entering of the time of ṣalāh even before a person determines the direction of the qiblah. He should make tayammum for every farḍ (ṣalāh). either before or after the farḍ ṣalāh. Transfer of earth (to the body).Taharah 7. 47 Several sunnahs ṣalāh can be performed with the farḍ ṣalāh. He should determine the direction of the qiblah before commencing the tayammum. it will not suffice to merely pass the hands over the face or arms with the intention of tayammum when they already have dust on them. 10.49 3. He should make tayammum after the entering of the time (of the ṣalāh).46 9. Intention. 48 Therefore.47 The Integrals of Tayammum Section: The Integrals of Tayammum are Five: 1. He should first remove any impurity. 25 .

51 It is necessary to pass the hand over the face before passing them over the arms. 26 . one sighted water but it is only sufficient for drinking or an enemy prevents one from acquiring it. 52 This will apply even if one sees a mirage (thinking it to be water). Presumption that one can now obtain water (in the case where tayammum was made due to lack of water). It is however necessary to pass the hands over that part of the beard which is visible. but it will not break if something prevents usage of the water for wuḍūʾ. 5. Those things which nullify the ablution.51 The Factors That Nullify Tayammum Section: The Factors That Nullify Tayammum are Three. Apostacy. Wiping of the two hands including the elbows.52 50 It is not necessary to make the earth reach the skin under the hair of the face and arms. 2. 1. 3.Taharah 4. or sees people who may have water. For example. Following the sequence between both wipings.

passing the left hand up-to the right wrist. Then. before wiping the arms.Taharah The Sunnah Way to Perform Tayammum Note: The Sunnah Way to Perform Tayammum (Dry Ablution): 1. 2. One then wipes the left arm in the same manner. One separates the fingers when striking the earth each of the two times. Most Merciful. Wipe the right arm before the left. followed by interlacing the fingers. where one wipes the back of the right thumb with the inside of the left thumb. Begin in the name of Allah. and one must remove one‟s ring for the second. 27 . then turns the left palm so it rests on the top of the right forearm with its thumb pointed away from one before passing it back down to the wrist. 4. hold the palms up. placing the left hand crosswise under the right with the left hand‟s fingers touching the back of the fingers of the right hand. Wipe the upper face before the lower. For wiping the arms. 5. 3. Most Compassionate (to recite Bismillah completely). curling the fingers around the side of the right wrist. and then dusting the hands off lightly. one passes the left hand to the right elbow. rubbing the palms together.

or sunlight. but solid intoxicants are pure although they are unlawful to take. Wine53 that becomes vinegar on its own.56 53 Wine or any liquid intoxicant is impure. The hide of a dead animal that is tanned. then turning it to vinegar does not purify it. 56 Such as worms that grow in carrion. Other measures such as using salt. and so forth by using an acrid substance. 28 .55 3. a little is excusable. Hides of dog or pig cannot be purified by tanning. eat or drink. If anything was mixed with the wine before it became vinegar.54 2. are insufficient. earth. fat. Creatures that are born out of filth. hair. However.Taharah Three Types of Impurities That Can Be Purified Section: Three Types of Impurities That Can Be Purified: 1. 54 “On its own” without anything being mixed with it. 55 Tanning means removing from a hide all excess blood. Any hair that remains after tanning has not been purified. even if be impure.

3.Taharah Impurities Section: Impurities are of Three Types: 1. 58 Making “taḥnīk” (introducing something sweet. Mutawassiṭah (moderate). such as a date. locusts or human beings). Light impurity is the urine of a baby (boy) which only feeds on milk57 and is not yet two years of age. wine. vomit. excreta. Mukhaffafah (light). wadī. 59 Example of a moderate impurity: urine. pig. it will not change the ruling of it being considered a light impurity. the hair of unslaughtered dead animals and the hair of animals that may not be eaten (other than human) when separated from them during their life. 29 . the milk of animals that may not be eaten (other than human). into the mouth of a newborn child) or giving a child medicine will not change the ruling. Mughallaẓah (heavy). Heavy impurity is the impurity from a dog. pus. slaughtered animals that may not be eaten.59 57 Whether the milk of his mother or an animal‟s milk. or their offspring. unslaughtered dead animals (other than aquatic life.58 All other remaining impurities are moderate impurities. blood. 2. pure or impure. any liquid intoxicant. madhī.

If any of the smell or 30 . urine or anything moist from them. That which has a substance is that which has a colour. it need only be removed. or any of their dry parts that have become moist.60 one of which should be with earth.Taharah   Section:   Heavy impurity becomes pure by removing it and then washing it seven times.61 Light impurity will be purified by removing the actual impurity and sprinkling adequate water upon it (the amount of water sprinkled should be greater than the amount of urine).62 60 Something that becomes impure by contact and that is restricted to contamination by traces of moisture from dog or pig. 61 Earth cannot be substituted with something else like soap or detergent etc. 62 It is wājib to remove all of its taste. smell and taste. It is necessary to remove its colour. smell and taste. and to remove both colour and smell if not difficult. If something dry such as the animal‟s breath or hair touches a person. even if it be difficult. 1. whether saliva.  Moderate impurity is of two kinds: (1) that which has a substance and (2) that without a substance.

Taharah 2. it is not considered pure. 63 If the effects of sun.65 colour alone is difficult to remove. It is sufficient that water flows over it. within fifteen days. smell and taste. then the fact that one of these two remains does not affect the purity. the ground is still not pure until water has been poured over it. if both the colour and smell remain in a spot. then it is not considered haiḍ (menstruation) and the woman must make-up the ṣalāh she omitted during it. or between the two (the blood discharged discontinuously 31 . 64 It the blood ceases to flow in less than twenty-four hours. If it ceases at twenty-four hours. fire.64 It generally lasts for six or seven days and the maximum period is 15 days and nights.63 The menstrual period Section:  The minimum menstrual period is a day and a night. However. The one which has no substance is the one that does not have a colour. or wind remove the traces of the impurity.

Taharah  The minimum interval of purity between two menstruations is 15 days.  The minimum postnatal bleeding is a single discharge of blood. within 15 days and the duration of the blood discharged is 24 hours or more). then it is haiḍ. Generally it lasts for 23 or 24 days and there is no maximum limit to the number of days between two menstruations. 32 . Generally it lasts for 40 days and the maximum period is 60 days. 65 If it exceeds fifteen days. then she is a woman with istihāḍah (chronic vaginal discharge).

33 .

Salah  34 .

3 A person forgot that he did not perform the ṣalāh and only remembered after the time of ṣalāh expired. 35 . it will be makrūh for him to sleep or lie down. and one wishes to lie down for a while and he is certain to awaken in time to carry out this duty. if he is not at all certain as to whether he will wake up in time or not. in which case he will be sinful.3 1 A third excuse is for a person who delayed the ṣalāh to combine two ṣalāhs during a journey. When any ṣalāh is due but not yet performed. This should not be due to unmindfulness due to engrossment in playing chess etc. However.Salah Salah The Valid Excuses for Delaying the ṣalāh Section: The Valid Excuses for Delaying the Ṣalāh from its Prescribed Time are Two:1 (1) Sleep2 and (2) forgetfulness. it is ḥarām. 2 A person was asleep before the time of ṣalāh commenced and remained asleep until the time ended.

36 . Facing the qiblah.5 2. The principle is that it is not permissible for a person in ṣalāh to support or carry any impurity but it is permissible for him to be supported by it. Purity of the clothing. the body. even if the rug or bed moves when one moves. 6 One‟s ṣalāh is invalid if one is holding the end of a rope connected with something impure.8 4. 7 One‟s ṣalāh is valid if performed on the pure portion of a rug which is affected with some impurities. Purity from the two ritual impurities.9 4 The author does not mention Islām and Mumayyidh as a condition because they are well known. 3. 5 Purification from minor and major ritual impurity (hadath and janabah through wuḍūʾ and ritual bath respectively as well as from haiḍ and nifas). A thin garment through which the colour of the skin is visible is not sufficient. Covering the ʿawrah (private parts).6 and the place7 (of performing ṣalāh). 8 It is a necessary condition that the clothing prevents the colour of the skin from being exposed and covers the ʿawrah from all sides including above. provided he is not in direct contact with the impurity.Salah The Conditions of the ṣalāh Section: The Conditions of the ṣalāh are Eight:4 1. It is not necessary to cover the ʿawrah from below.

9 This is a necessary condition for the five farḍ ṣalāh which must be performed while facing the proper direction of qiblah whether a person is a musāfir (traveller) or a muqīm (non-traveller).11 8. (1) A minor ritual impurity is that which makes wuḍūʾ wājib and (2) a major impurity is that which is makes bath wājib. 37 . Ritual Impurities are of two types Ritual Impurities are of two types: (1) minor ritual impurities and (2) major ritual impurities. 7. riding in a vehicle or not. 10 A person must be certain about the commencement of the time of ṣalāh. even if the ṣalāh was in fact carried out in its required time. If he applies ijtihad and the ṣalāh was carried out before or after the time of the ṣalāh. the ṣalāh performed will be considered a qaḍāʾ ṣalāh if he has qaḍāʾ ṣalāh in his responsibility otherwise it will be considered a nafl ṣalāh. 11 A person‟s ṣalāh is not invalidated if he thinks that all of the actions in ṣalāh are farḍ. in which case it will be correct. A musāfir may perform sunnah ṣalāh without facing the direction of qiblah. If a person is uncertain about the commencement of the time of the ṣalāh which he has performed. Knowledge of it being farḍ. Not to regard any of its farḍ acts as sunnah. To abstain from those factors that nullifies the ṣalāh.10 6. The commencement of the time of ṣalāh. unless he applies his ijtihad (discretion) to determine the time of the ṣalāh.Salah 5. that particular ṣalāh will not be correct.

Salah 38 .

It generally means in all conditions.13 2. 12 Men includes young boys. The ʿawrah of a free woman and a slave girl in the presence of a mahram (unmarriageable kin) or women is the area between the navel and the knees. The ʿawrah of a free woman in ṣalāh includes the whole body except the face and the two palms.Salah The ʿAwrahs The ʿAwrahs (Private parts) are Four Types: 1. 39 . 13 The knees and the navel themselves are not part of the ʿawrah. 3. even if they are not yet of the age of understanding. The ʿawrah of a free woman and that of a slave girl in the presence of a stranger is the entire body. but it is wājib to cover them in order to fulfil the command of covering the ʿawrah completely. The ʿawrah of a man generally12 and that of a slave-girl in ṣalāh is the area between the navel and the knees. wether in ṣalāh or outside ṣalāh. 4.

To call out the adhān is better than being the imām for the ṣalāh. wether praying alone or in a second jamaah of ṣalāh.Salah Adhān and Iqāmah Note: Adhān (The Call for ṣalāh) and Iqāmah (The Call to Commence the ṣalāh)    Adhān and Iqāmah are both sunnah for the farḍ ṣalāh. The words of the adhān:  It is sunnah to recite the two testifications in a low voice before calling it aloud: 40 .

to turn the head (not the chest or feet) to the right when saying. “  ” and to the left when saying. 41 . pausing for an interval after each phrase of the adhān equal to the duration of the phrase (except for repetitions of “Allahu akbar”). to stand. to face the qiblah. it is mustaḥab (recommended):  To be in the state of wuḍūʾ. To call out the adhān calmly and slowly.Salah  To add in the ṣubh ṣalāh before the final takbir (Allahu Akbar):  The words of the iqāmah: When giving the adhān and iqāmah. “ ”.

 After the words “ replies: ” and “ ” one  After the words “ ” one replies:  After the words “ ” one replies:  To recite the following duʿā after the adhān: 42 . or when reciting the Qurʾān. and even worse to give iqāmah while in either of these two states.  To repeat each phrase after the muadhdhin. even if in the state of janābah (major ritual impurity).Salah which are said in pairs and to give iqāmah rapidly without pausing. during menstruation. more severe to do so in a state of janabah (major ritual impurity).  It is makrūh to call out the adhān in the state of hadath (minor ritual impurity).

(3) sanity and.Salah The conditions for the muadhdhin:  (1) Islām. 43 . (4) male if the adhān is for a jamāʿah of men. (2) mumayyidh (the age of understanding).

15 14 To make intention in the heart is wājib and mustaḥab to utter it with the tongue. and palms with one‟s shoulders. “Allahu akbar. grasping the left wrist with the right hand. 15 Takbīrat al-iḥrām can only be in Arabic with the word. It is mustaḥab to raise the hands from the beginning of the takbīrat al-iḥrām to shoulder level. the palms face the direction of qiblah and the hands are uncovered (i.” or “Allahul akbar”. The minimal valid audibility is that it can be heard through normal hearing. After the takbīr. one places the hands below the chest and above the navel. The intention should be simultaneous with the takbīrat aliḥrām and remains till the completion of the takbīr. thumbs with the earlobes. fingers slightly outspread. Intention. The imām calls out the takbīr aloud every time in ṣalāh.e.Salah  The Integrals of the ṣalāh Section: The Integrals of the ṣalāh are Seventeen: 1. Takbīrat al-iḥrām (The opening statement: “Allahu Akbar”). meaning that one‟s fingertips are even with the tip of the ears.14 2. not hidden beneath a shawl). and fixing 44 .

21 In every rakʿah and to intend nothing but sitting by one‟s movement. The complete takbīrat al-iḥrām must be made while standing. he bows. whether one was standing or sitting. fingers apart. Two sajdahs (prostrations). with back and neck extended. It is wājib to recite it in every rakʿah of ṣalāh whether loudly or silently. Rukuʿ (bowing).17 5. It is wājib to intend nothing by one‟s movement except iʿtidāl. 18 The best method is to raise one‟s hands and say. Thereafter.18 6. “Allahu Akbar” so that a person begins raising the hands as he starts the takbīr and when the hands are at shoulder level. whether an imām. the hands are placed on the knees. Remaining motionless for a moment therein (sitting).16 4. Standing requires that the spine be straight. then one recites tasbih three times.19 8.Salah 3. a follower or alone. 20 In every rakʿah. whether by himself or assisted by another. however it is not a rukn in nafl ṣalāh. Standing in the farḍ ṣalāh for those who have the ability. Iʿtidāl (Straightening up after rukuʿ). leg straight and elbows out. 11. 19 The iʿtidāl is to return to the posture one was in before the rukuʿ.21 12. 17 Sūrah al-Fātiḥah can be recited from memory or by looking into the muṣḥaf etc. Sitting between the two sajdahs. Recitation of Sūrah al-Fātiḥah. one‟s gaze on the place where one‟s forehead will prostrate. One is not standing if one leans so forward that the backbone is no longer straight. although women keep them close. It is mustaḥab to prolong the words of takbīr until one reaches the next posture in every takbīr so that no part of the ṣalāh is without dhikr. 16 Standing is a rukn (integral) in all farḍ ṣalāh for one who can stand. or bends so that one is closer to rukuʿ (bowing) than to standing. Remaining motionless for a moment therein (iʿtidāl) 9. 7.20 10. Remaining motionless for a moment therein (rukuʿ). Remaining motionless for a moment therein (sajdah). 45 .

22 17. 22 Ending the ṣalāh with salām. Ṣalāh upon Nabi  therein (tashahhud). Salām. 16. finishing with his own salām whenever he wishes. To follow the sequence (of the above integral postures of ṣalāh). 14.Salah 13. 46 . Sitting therein (tashahhud). Someone who is not a masbūq (latecomer) to a jamāʿah ṣalāh may sit as long as he wishes after the imām‟s salām to supplicate. 15. Recite tashahhud at the end of ṣalāh.

to be in the first row. After the duʿā iftitaḥ. one says “Āmīn” when he does.Salah Description of the ṣalāh Note: Description of the Ṣalāh: Sunan Before Commencing the Ṣalāh: To stand for the ṣalāh after the completion of the iqāmah. Commencing the Ṣalāh: One starts to make the takbīrat al-iḥrām with the intention in the heart. Then a person recites Sūrah alFātiḥah in every rakʿah and the basmalah is one of its verses. It is mustaḥab to recite the duʿā iftitah after the takbīrat al-iḥrām. If one is the imām or praying alone. then the second. and then a second time when he completes his own recital of the al-Fātiḥah. it is mustaḥab in the first and second rakʿah only to recite one complete sūrah even if it be short after the al-Fātiḥah. when following an imām. especially for the imām when he should enjoin upon the jamāʿah to do so and to fill up the first row first. it is mustaḥab to recite the taʿawwudh. One says “Āmīn” at the end of the al-Fātiḥah. Taʿawwudh is mustaḥab in every rakʿah and more emphasized in the first rakʿah. It is mustaḥab to recite the Qurʾān in a tartīl (distinct and pleasant way) observing the rules of tajwīd 47 . and so on. to make the row straight.

the best way is to say. One recites a longer sūrah in the first rakʿah than in the second. It is mustaḥab to prolong the words of takbir until one reaches the posture of rukuʿ.” as one raises 48 . For men to keep the stomach away from the thighs. “Allahu akbar” so that a person begins raising the hands as he starts the takbir and when the hands are at shoulder level.” When one is standing upright. with the fingers together. Then one makes rukuʿ (bows) from the waist.Salah and to reflect upon its meanings and lessons. “Allahu Akbar. the best way is to raise the hand lifting them from the knees as one starts straightening up. raising them to shoulder level and the head together. one says.” and to put the knees down first. and to recite “tasbīh” three times. Then one raises the head and sits before prostrating a second time. whilst women keep them together. keeping the hands directly under one‟s shoulders. For men to maintain a one span gap between the two knees and two feet whilst women keep them together. and then the forehead and nose.” Then one makes sajdah (prostrates). and the hands uncovered. Then one makes iʿtidāl (straightening up). and forearms from the sides. “samiʿallahu liman ḥamidah. the best way is to say. extended towards the direction of qiblah. he bows. then the hands. “Allahu akbar. “Rabbanā lakal ḥamd. saying. It is commendable to supplicate before Allah  while prostrating. The best way is to raise one‟s hands and say.

and prolonging the takbir until standing. It is sunnah. but not after rising form the first or third rakʿah). saying. “Allahu akbar. wahdinī. to sit in “iftirāsh. one sits in iftirāsh after the first two rakʿahs and recites the tashahhud and the ṣalāh upon the Nabi . and duʿā iftitah. “Allahu akbar. warfaʿnī. waʿāfinī. Then one rises. heel up. and then goes on to perform 49 . warḥamnī. This is called “jilsat alistirāhah” and is not done after “sajdah al-tilawah”. warzuqnī. Then one rises. palms down. here and in each rakʿah that is not followed by the tashahhud. fingers extended and held together and to recite the duʿā. waʿfuʿannī. one raises the hands to shoulder level (which one does here. supported by both hands. saying.Salah the head. but not upon his family (which is done in the final tashahhud). to briefly rest in the iftirāsh style of sitting before rising. wajburnī.” which is to place the left foot on its side and to sit upon it while keeping the right foot on the bottom of its toes. prolonging the takbir until one is standing upright. If one‟s ṣalāh exceeds two rakʿahs. Then one performs the second rakʿah of the ṣalāh just like the first.” and supported on one‟s hands as before. When standing.” Then one prostrates again just as before and after this one raises the head. “Rabbighfirlī.” as one first raises it. except for the initial intention. To place both one‟s hands on the thighs near the knees. the takbīrat al-iḥrām.

the left hand rests on the left thigh near the knee. its fingers extended and held together. The follower may intend one of the salāms to be a response to the salām of the imām. 50 .” in the tashahhud. which is vertical. which alone is left extended. Closing the ṣalāh: Then one says the final “salām”. except that one recites the al-Fātiḥah to oneself and does not recite a sūrah after it. One thereby intends to finish the ṣalāh and intends to make salām to the Angels and Muslims whether human or jinn on the right. The best way is to say. In the two tashahhuds.Salah the remainder of the ṣalāh as one did in the second rakʿah. emerging from under the right. intending to greet those on the left. but is held closed with its thumb touching the side of the index finger. The right hand is similarly placed. “illallah. One raises the index finger and points with it when one says the words. One sits at the end of one‟s ṣalāh for the last tashahhud in the “tawarruk” style of sitting.” and to turn the head to the right enough to show the right cheek to those behind. with one left posterior on the ground and left foot on its side. Then turns one‟s head to the left and repeat the salām. “Assalāmu ʿalaykum waraḥmatullah.

after which he will say it silently. He leaves his place as soon as he finishes. 51 . “I prefer that the imām and follower make dhikr after the salām. unless the imām wants to be learned from. Al-Imām al-Shāfiʿī mentioned in al-Umm. and do so silently. It is mustaḥab for the followers to remain seated until the imām stands. in which case he says the dhikr aloud until he believes that the congregation has learned from him.Salah It is mustaḥab to make dhikr and duʿā silently after ṣalāh.” The imām turns for dhikr and duʿā so that his right side is towards the jamāʿah and his left side towards the qiblah. If there are no women (in which case he waits for them to leave first).

If the ṣalāh is a periodic nafl like “rawātīb”24 or it has a specific reason25. It is sufficient that a person makes intention to offer ṣalāh of „Eid al-Fiṭr or al-istisqāʾ. 25 Like the ṣalāh of ʿEid al-Fiṭr or ṣalāh al-istisqāʾ (seeking rain). c. 52 . The act of ṣalāh – the intention of performing ṣalāh. It being a farḍ ṣalāh. The actual ṣalāh that is being offered e. It is sufficient to merely make the intention of performing ṣalāh for these ṣalāh.Salah Three Degrees of Intention Section: There are Three Degrees of Intention: If the ṣalāh is farḍ. A person performs them when one wants for additional rewards. it is compulsory to intend:23 a. If the ṣalāh is a muṭlaq nafl. Ẓuhr or ʿAṣr. 24 Those sunnah ṣalāh performed either before or after the five farḍ ṣalāh. b.g. it is compulsory to intend: a. The actual ṣalāh that is being offered e. The act of ṣalāh – the intention of performing ṣalāh. b. 23 It is sufficient for a person to make intention to offer the farḍ ṣalāh of Ẓuhr. The act of ṣalāh – the intention of performing ṣalāh.26 it is compulsory to intend: a. 26 Those nafl ṣalāh that have no time or cause. sunnah before ṣubh or “Istisqāʾ” (ṣalāh seeking rain).g.

That it is pronounced while standing in the farḍ ṣalāh. That it be with the word “akbar”. That it be in Arabic. 3. 5.” this can result in the meaning changing. 4. 53 . That it be with the word “Allahu”.Salah The Conditions of Takbīrat al-iḥrām Section: The Conditions of Takbīrat al-iḥrām are Sixteen: 1.27 27 By reciting it as “Āllahu akbar. 6. Not to lengthen the hamzah of the word “Allah”. 2. The sequence between these two words “Allahu akbar” is followed.

30 By reciting it as “Allahū akbar” or “Allahu wakbar”. 29 By reciting it with the tashdīd. 15. given normal hearing and lack of extraneous noise.30 10. 54 . For it to occur while facing towards the qiblah. 12.Salah 7. 31 That one can hear them oneself.” this can result in the meaning changing. 14. Not to double the letter of “ba”. To delay the takbir of the maʾmūm (follower) till after the takbir of the imām. Not to add a “waw” sakin or mutaharrik between these two words. There is no need to raise one‟s voice if there is lot of noise.29 9. Not to lengthen the letter of “ba” of “akbar”. Not to pause for a long or short while between these two words.31 13. Entering of the time of ṣalāh. 11.28 8. To hear oneself uttering its entire letters. Not to change even a single letter. 16. Not to add a “waw” before the word “Allah”. 28 By reciting it as “Allahu akbār.

Salah

The Conditions of Sūrah al-Fātiḥah Section: The Conditions of Sūrah al-Fātiḥah are Ten: 1. Sequence. 2. Continuity.32 3. To perfect (pronunciation of) it‟s letters. 4. To perfect it‟s tashdīds. 5. Not to pause for a long or short while with the intention of terminating the recitation. 6. Reciting all its verses including the “basmalah”. 7. Not to commit a mistake that alters the meaning.33 8. To recite it while standing in the farḍ ṣalāh.34 9. To hear one‟s own recitation.
32

The al-Fātiḥah is not considered to be interrupted if a one replies to the “Āmīn” of the imām, reminding him of the right ayat (verse) when he errs, prostrates with the imām in “sajdah tilāwah”, forgetfully falls silent or absentmindedly adds some dhikr in it. 33 If one omits one of the al-Fātiḥah‟s letters, fails to double a letter that should be doubled, or substitutes a wrong letter for the right one, it invalidates one‟s recital of that particular word, and one must recite that word again. This will not invalidate one‟s ṣalāh unless it changes the meaning and was done deliberately. Mistakes in a harakah (short vowel) are not harmful as long as they do not alter the meaning. 34 Its entire letters should be recited while standing. 55

Salah
10. No foreign dhikr or recitation should be recited in-between (the al-Fātiḥah).

Tashdīds of Sūrah al-Fātiḥah Section: There are 14 tashdīds that are recited on various word of Sūrah al-Fātiḥah which are demonstrated in the following diagram:

56

Salah

Sunnah to Raise the Hands Section: It is Sunnah to Raise the Hands in Four Places:35 1. During the takbīrat al-iḥrām.36 2. When going into rukūʿ.37 3. When straightening up (iʿitidāl).38 4. When standing up from the first tashahhud.

35

It is from the “sunan hayʾah” of the ṣalāh, the wisdom being to show respect and reverence to Allah . 36 Begin raising the hands at the beginning of the takbīr and put them down at the end of the takbīr, means that raising of the hands must be simultaneous with the takbīr from the beginning till the end. 37 A person starts raising his hands at the beginning of takbīr and prolongs the takbīr until he places his hands upon his knees, fingers spread apart and backbone and head are straight. 38 A person begins raising his hand with the raising of the head and the takbīr; when he straightens, he lowers his hands. 57

both knees and the portion under the toes of each foot. The Seven Limbs of Prostration The Seven Limbs of Prostration are: The forehead. To prostrate upon seven limbs. To make sajdah by resting on the head. 41 The weight of the head and neck should be applied to the place of sajdah so that the forehead is firmly stationed on the ground. 42 If one merely fell down after the iʿtidāl. 39 It is sunnah to place the nose on the ground. Not to prostrate on something that moves with one‟s own movement.39 2. The forehead should be exposed. this will not be regarded as sajdah. The person will have to return to iʿtidāl and then go into sajdah.41 4. Not to intend anything but sajdah.Salah The Conditions of Sajdah Section: The Conditions of Sajdah (Prostration) are Seven: 1. sajdah may be made on the bandage without the need of repeating it afterwards with the condition that the bandage was put on while one was in the state of purity. however. both palms. That one rear‟s be higher than one‟s head. Remain motionless for a moment whilst prostrating. 6.40 3. 58 . sajdah will be in order if the nose does not touch the ground. 40 If one is wearing a bandage over the forehead because of an injury. 7.42 5.

Salah Tashdīds of Tashahhud Section: There are 21 tashdīds that are recited in tashahhud. all are demonstrated in the following diagram: 43 The minimal tashahhud is: 59 . five are their completion and 16 are minimal of the tashahhud43.

Salah Tashdīds of ṣalāh Upon Nabi  Section: There are 4 tashdīds for the minimal ṣalāh upon Nabi : Salām Section: The minimal salām is “Assalāmu ʿalaykum”: There is one tashdīd in salām: 60 .

Salah The Times of ṣalāh 61 .

   The time of Maghrīb begins from sunset and ends with the disappearance of the red horizon. and ends when the sun sets. 62 .Salah Section: The Times of ṣalāh are Five:44  The time of Ẓuhr begins after the sun descends from its zenith (zawāl) and it ends when an object‟s shadow equals its length in addition to the length of its shadow at the time of zawāl. such as purification. and then praying. taking the necessary steps at its outset.  The time of ʿAṣr begins when the object‟s shadow equals its length in addition to the length of its shadow at the time of zawāl. It is not permissible to intentionally delay the ṣalāh until part of it is prayed after the time has terminated. red. while the yellow and white are at the time of ʿIshāʾ. If less than one rakʿah of one‟s ṣalāh occurs within the proper time (meaning that one does not raise one‟s head from the second sajdah of the rakʿah before the time ends) and the remainder takes place after it. 44 It is best to pray every prayer at the beginning of its time. then the entire ṣalāh is considered as qaḍāʾ. The time of Ṣubh begins from the dawn until sunrise. It is sunnah to delay the ṣalāh of ʿIshāʾ till the yellow and white horizons disappear. There are three types of horizons. giving the adhan and iqamah. The time of ʿIshāʾ begins from the setting of the red horizon and it ends at ṣubh sadiq. yellow and white:  The red horizon is at the time of Maghrīb. clothing one‟s ʿawrah.

After ʿAṣr ṣalāh until sunset. except on Fridays. 2. It is permissible at the above times to offer ṣalāh that are performed for a particular reason. 63 . 4. sunnah after wuḍūʾ. taḥiyyat al-masjīd (greeting the mosque). 5. 3.Salah Times When the ṣalāh is ḥarām Section: There are 5 times in a day during which it is ḥarām45 to offer those ṣalāhs which do not have an immediate or preceding cause:46 1. such as the salat al-janazah (funeral ṣalāh). At the time when the sun is at its zenith until it declines. 46 The ṣalāh is unlawful and invalid and it will not discharge a person from a vow. At the time of sunrise until the sun rises to the extent of the height of a spear. At the time the sun becomes yellow/pale until sunset. After Ṣubh ṣalāh until sunrise. 45 It is neither ḥarām nor makrūh to offer ṣalāh within the Sanctuary of Makkah at any time. and is also permissible to make qaḍāʾ ṣalāh though one may not perform the two rakʿahs that are sunnah before entering the state of iḥrām.

47 It is mustaḥab to pause for the duration of one tasbih (duration of reciting one “subḥānallah”).Salah The Pauses in ṣalāh Section: The Pauses in ṣalāh are Six:47 1. 49 Taʿawwudh is to recite “Aʿūdhubillahi minash shaiṭānir rajīm”. 64 . 4. 3. Between the sūrah and bowing (rukuʿ). 6. Between the completion of Sūrah al-Fātiḥah and saying. 5. Between the “duʿā iftitah” (the opening duʿā) and taʿawwudh49. Between the takbīrat al-iḥrām and the “duʿā iftitah” (the opening duʿā).48 2. “Āmīn”. 48 It is mustaḥab for the imām to remain silent for the time that a follower can recite Sūrah al-Fātiḥah and for him to engage in the recitation of the Qurʾān or duʿā silently. Between “Āmīn” and the sūrah. Between the taʿawwudh and Sūrah al-Fātiḥah.

2. 3. In sajdah. 65 . Ṭumaʾnīnah (composure) is a pause after movements to such an extent that every limb remains in its place for the duration of reciting one “subḥānallah”. In rukuʿ. While sitting between the two sajdahs. In iʿtidāl (when straightening up after rukuʿ). 4.Salah Ṭumaʾnīnah Section: There are Four Postures in Which Ṭumaʾnīnah (Composure) is Compulsory: 1.

one merely prostrates for it. 53 Such as reciting a part or all of the al-Fātiḥah or tashahhud at the wrong place. 54 When one is uncertain whether he or she has prayed three rakʿahs or four. If one intentionally returns to it. To forgetfully do an action that would nullify the ṣalāh if it was done intentionally.54 50 The sajdah sahw. 66 . since doing it would in any case invalidate the ṣalāh. provided it is not the type of action whose unintentional performance also invalidates the ṣalāh such as much speech or action. This will not apply to the tasbīḥāt even though one did so purposely. To recite a verbal integral of ṣalāh in an inappropriate place.Salah The Causes for Sajdah Sahw Section: The Causes for Sajdah Sahw50 (Prostration of Forgetfulness) are Four: 1. taking one or two steps. this invalidates one‟s ṣalāh. it is not permissible to retun to it. even if there are numerous reasons for it in one ṣalāh.53 4.51 2. either completely or partly. lengthening a short integral like iʿtidāl or a little speech. is only two sajdahs (prostrations). one should assume that he or she did not perform it. though one must stand up as soon as one remembers. If one misses anything besides a rukn (integral) or sunnat abʿaḍ (main sunnah). then one does not postrate for it. one performs sajdah sahw.52 3. Leaving out some of the “sunan abʿaḍ” (main sunnah). 51 If one misses a sunnat abʿaḍ (main sunnah) even purposely. If one forgets the first tashahhud and stands up. but if one returns to it absentmindedly or out of ignorance. 52 Such as turning the head. To perform a physical integral with the possibility of it being an extra integral.

Salah   The Sunan Abʿaḍ Section: The Sunan Abʿaḍ55 (Main Sunnahs) of ṣalāh are Seven: 1. The recitation of the first tashahhud. The recitation of ṣalāh upon his family in the final tashahhud. The recitation of ṣalāh upon Nabi  therein (in the first tashahhud). 55 Sunan abʿaḍ are those sunnah acts that if omitted can be compensated for by sajdah sahw. 6. The recitation of duʿā Qunūt. 7. it is not permissible for the follower to act contrary to the imām i. The sitting therein (in the first tashahhud). rather he should occupy himself with duʿā. the follower should not continue and recite the ṣalāh upon the family of Nabī . 56 If the imām left out the first tashahhud. The recitation of ṣalāh and salām upon his family and his Companions therein (in duʿā Qunūt). The recitation of ṣalāh and salām upon Nabi  (in duʿā Qunūt). 3. those sunnah acts that cannot be compensated for by sajdah sahw are called sunan hayʾah.e. On the other hand.57 4. 67 . 5.56 2. 57 If the imām lengthens the first tashahhud for a valid reason and the follower completed the first tashahhud before the imām. the follower will have to also follow the imām in this act.

60 Not more than the minimum amount of one tasbih.61 3.58 2. Impurity falling on the body or clothes59 if not removed immediately60without carrying it. the entire jamāʿah will have to repeat the ṣalāh if the impurity was visible to others or if it was in such a place that all could have seen it.62 58 Even unintentionally. 61 By removing the impurity – for example with the side of a stone or a stick without carrying the stone or stick. If it was not visible. this ṣalāh will not be valid. if a person forgot to perform wuḍūʾ and offers a ṣalāh. 68 . Hadath (ritual impurity).Salah The Factors Which Nullify the ṣalāh Section: The Factors Which Nullify the ṣalāh are Fourteen: 1. the imām alone will have to repeat the ṣalāh. 59 If an imām led a jamāʿah while there was impurity on his clothes. Exposing of the ʿawrah if it was not covered immediately.

clearing the throat. It also invalidates the ṣalāh if it occurs absentmindedly or in ignorance of its prohibition. Extra movement that is contrary to the habit of a sane person. groaning. If much movement is done to cover the exposed part.66 8. 63 The ṣalāh is invalidated when two or more letters worth of sounds such as laughter. or similar are audible. the ṣalāh is invalidated. the need still subsists. provided it is both considered by ʿurf (common acknowledgement) to be much and uninterruptedly consecutive.68 62 When the ʿawrah of a person becomes exposed even slightly. blowing. An excessive strike of the hand. 66 The ṣalāh is invalidated by adding. such as three steps or successively moving three separate body parts – like the head and two hands. though not invalidated if it is little. 64 Any action that invalidates the fast like inserting a stick into the body cavity. To break the fast intentionally (in ṣalāh). sighing. if it was exposed because of wind and it is covered up immediately with little movement. To forgetfully eat a lot. However. provided the amount of the substance is commonly acknowledged to be much.65 7.64 6.67 9. Three consecutive motions even if involuntarily. Intentionally uttering one or two letters which can be clearly understood. 67 Such as jumping. it invalidates the ṣalāh. the ṣalāh remain valid. though an up-and-down motion is considered as just one – or three or more consecutive motions. the ṣalāh will be invalidated. 65 The ṣalāh is invalidated when any (even if a little) substance reaches the body cavity intentionally. However if after trying hard.63 5. a person should try his utmost to suppress it. he may cough for relief even if a sound of two or more syllables is formed. crying.Salah 4. If the need to cough arises involuntarily. a motion that is not one of the actions of ṣalāh. even if absentmindedly. 69 .

To precede the imām in two physical integrals of ṣalāh.71 13. “Shall I stop intending ṣalāh or continue?” The mere thought of how it would be if one were to hesitate during the ṣalāh is of no consequence. “I will stop if Zayd enters. 70 .69 11. it is makrūh to lag behind the imām until he completed an integral. The intention of terminating the ṣalāh by suspending its termination on a foreign action. rather the occurrence of doubt that negates one‟s resolve and certainty is what is considered here. three sajdahs or two rukuʿs in one rakʿah.” 73 Not to know whether one has terminated or not. to scratch an itching place on the body. 72 To decide to break one‟s ṣalāh if such and such a thing happens. To intentionally add an extra physical integral of ṣalāh.g. 70 To complete two integrals before the imām does invalidates the ṣalāh. such as. the ṣalāh does not break even if he moves his finger tip many times. it does not invalidate the ṣalāh.70 12. If the imām bows and straightens-up while without excuse one has not yet bowed. and it invalidates one‟s ṣalāh to lag behind the imām until he completed two integrals. If a person only moves a finger e. 71 Without an excuse. 69 When a person intentionally performs extra integral e.Salah 10. By doubting its termination.g. regardless whether the event will definitely occur during the ṣalāh or whether it may happen. it does not invalidate one‟s ṣalāh until the imām actually begins going down towards prostration and one still not bowed. means one hesitates in one‟s heart.73 Sunan Rawatib 68 One or two slight movements do not invalidate the ṣalāh.72 14. If one does so absentmindedly or in ignorance of its prohibition. saying. To delay with the two integrals without an excuse. but the rakʿah is not counted and one must now add an additional rakʿah after the imām finishes with salām to complete the ṣalāh.

Witr ṣalāh Witr ṣalāh – The Final ṣalāh at Night: The best time for Witr is after the sunnah of ʿIshāʾ ṣalāh.Salah Note: Sunan Rawātib – The Sunnah ṣalāh Before and After the Farḍ ṣalāh: The optimal numbers of these are:      Two rakʿahs before Ṣubh ṣalāh. Four rakʿahs before and after Ẓuhr ṣalāh. Two rakʿahs after ʿIshāʾ ṣalāh. Three rakʿahs is the minimal optimal number of rakʿah and one 71 . Two rakʿahs before and after Ẓuhr ṣalāh. Four rakʿahs before ʿAsr ṣalāh. The sunnah muakkadah (emphasized sunnah) consist of ten rakʿahs:     Two rakʿahs before Ṣubh ṣalāh. Two rakʿahs after Maghrīb ṣalāh. Two rakʿahs after Maghrīb ṣalāh. Two rakʿahs after ʿIshāʾ ṣalāh. Witr is a minimum of one rakʿah and the optimal is to perform eleven rakʿahs. unless one intends to offer the Taḥajjud ṣalāh. It is recommended to pray two rakʿahs before Maghrīb ṣalāh. The sunan of Jumuʿah are the same as for Ẓuhr ṣalāh.

Salah separates them by completing two rakʿahs with salām and then performs the final rakʿah. Taḥiyyat al-masjid: It is sunnah for one who enters a masjid to greet the masjid by praying two rakʿahs each time he enters. One recites Sūrah al-ʿAlā in the first rakʿah. is optimum eight rakʿahs. Ḍuḥā ṣalāh: It is sunnah to pray the Ḍuḥā ṣalāh (midmorning prayer). 72 . Taḥajjud ṣalāh: Nafl ṣalāh (superogatory prayer) at night is an emphasized sunnah. and a maximum of twelve. One is no longer entitled to pray it after sitting. even if one can only do a little. and Sūrah alIkhlaṣ. Sūrah al-Kāfirūn in the second rakʿah. which minimum of two rakʿahs. One completes a pair of rakʿahs with salām. Tarāwīḥ ṣalāh: It is sunnah to perform tarāwīḥ. The last part of the night is the best time to offer taḥajjud ṣalāh. which is twenty rakʿahs of group prayer on each night of Ramaḍān. Sūrah al-Falāq and Sūrah al-Nās in the third rakʿah.

78 A group of people who are gathered because of rain and they perform jamaʿ taqdim. 77 If a person leaves out the intention of being an imām during takbīrat al-iḥrām.78 74 The intention of being an imām is compulsory upon the imām during takbīrat al-iḥrām. And to repeat them (once) both on their time with jamāʿah (in the entire ṣalāh) hoping for the reward of jamāʿah.Salah The Intention of Being an Imām Section: The Intention of Being an Imām is Compulsory74 in Four Conditions: 1. which was sunnah to perform in jamāʿah (except Witr ṣalāh in the month of Ramaḍān because there is no repetition for Witr). if the imām left out the intention of being an imām. his ṣalāh alone is valid but he will be sinful. The Friday Prayer.76 3.75 2. 76 To repeat the farḍ ṣalāh that was performed in its time or nafl ṣalāh. his ṣalāh will not be valid. A vowed ṣalāh that is to be performed in congregation. To repeat the farḍ or nafl ṣalāh in its time hoping for reward. his ṣalāh will not be valid. As for the follower. 73 . 75 If the imām leaves out the intention of being an imām during takbīrat al-iḥrām. the intention of being a follower is wājib if he intends to follow the imām even in the middle of ṣalāh besides in these four conditions in which case it is wājib for him to intend being a follower during takbīrat al-iḥrām. A ṣalāh offered before its time due to rain.77 4.

a Shāfiʿī followed a Hanafi imām who touched his private part. 80 It is valid for a Shāfiʿī to follow an imām of a different madhhab whenever the follower is not certain that the imām has omitted an obligatory component of ṣalāh. free persons.80 79 Ṣalāh jamāʿah is farḍ al-kifayah (communal obligation) upon all males. Example. sane individuals and those that have reached the age of puberty for the five farḍ ṣalāh and sunnah for female. muqīm (non-travellers). The validity is based solely on the madhhab of the follower as to whether or not something obligatory has been omitted. The maʾmūm (follower) shouldn‟t know of any invalidity of the ṣalāh of his imām due to ritual impurity or anything else. such that the rite of the ṣalāh be public in a manner that the manifestation of obedience to Allah‟s command are evident. It is best for men to offer ṣalāh in jamāʿah at the masjid and better for women to pray at home than at the masjid. However.Salah The Conditions for Following an Imām Section: The Conditions for Following an Imām79 are Eleven: 1. If held in houses where the rite of ṣalāh is not public. According to the madhhab of the 74 . it is not valid to follow him. if certain that the imām has omitted one. the obligation remains unfulfilled though a house with a sign on it is sufficient.

like a person offering ṣalāh with tayammum because of cold. though if his imām finishes with salām and the maʾmūm is still praying. or hearing his muballigh (the person who repeats the imām‟s takbīr in a loud voice so people can hear). Multiple interconnected 75 .83 5. The maʾmūm should not stand ahead of the imām.81 3. In these situations.84 6. 85 Whether by seeing the imām. 83 A qari. 84 The follower‟s ṣalāh is invalid if his heel is in front of the imām‟s. in which case.85 7. It should not be such that according to the madhhab of the maʾmūm. he may then be taken as one‟s imām.87 follower the wuḍūʾ of the imām is invalidated but not in the madhhab of the imām. the ṣalāh of the imām is invalid and has to be repeated. The imām and the maʾmūm are in the same masjid86 or approximately 300 arm lengths apart. the jamāʿah is valid even if they are at a distance from each other. but not more than three arms length. irrespective of him being unable to recite other verses properly beside Al-Fātiḥah or not. even if it be a little. although the ṣalāh was valid according to the madhhab of the imām. 81 It should not be such a follower following the ṣalāh of a person which will have to be repeated. Nor an illiterate person. the ṣalāh should be repeated. one who recites Qurʾān properly. 82 It invalidates one‟s ṣalāh to take a maʾmūm as one‟s imām when the maʾmūm is concurrently praying behind an imām. may not follow one who is unable to recite Al-Fātiḥah properly. 86 Whenever an imām leads a follower in a masjid. The maʾmūm should be aware of the movements of his imām.Salah 2. The imām should not be a follower.82 4. the merit of jamāʿah is lost. His heel should be behind the imām‟s heel. a muqīm who made tayammum in a place where normally water can be found easily or a person who does not find neither water for wuḍūʾ nor earth for tayammum.

So too. If he performs it anyway intentionally knowing that it is unlawful. He must follow the imām. is the masjid‟s outer courtyard. such as jilsat al-istirāḥah.90 masjid openings unto each other are considered as one masjid. (3) the imām is praying while sitting and the follower is praying standing.89 10. then the 76 . it invalidates his ṣalāh.Salah 8. 89 A person who is offering a farḍ ṣalāh cannot follow a person who is offering a salat al-kusuf (eclipse ṣalāh). their jamāʿah is not valid. If they are farther apart than this. such as the first tashahhud. 88 The follower intends to follow the imām whether at the takbīrat aliḥrām or thereafter. or vice versa and. but are in an open expanse such as a desert or large house. even when there is a walkway between the courtyard and masjid. (4) the imām is performing qaḍāʾ ṣalāh while the follower is performing his current one or vice versa. their jamāʿah is valid as long as the distance between them does not exceed approximately 144 meters. his ṣalāh is as if he had performed it alone. The maʾmūm intends to follow the imām or the congregation. The jamāʿah is valid when (1) the imām is performing a farḍ ṣalāh and the follower is performing a nafl ṣalāh or vice versa. It invalidates one‟s ṣalāh to purposely omit the intention to follow the imām while at the same time praying behind him and following his motions by awaiting them for a long period of time. The imām and the maʾmūm conform to each other in the movement of ṣalāh. If the follower neglects to do so.88 9. If the sunnah omitted by the imām can be done without much of a lag. Awaiting the motion of the imām for a short period of time or performing one‟s own ṣalāh simultaneously with his does not invalidate it. 87 When the imām and maʾmūm are not in a masjid. The maʾmūm should not differ with the imām regarding those sunnahs which do not permit contradiction. 90 If the imām omits a sunnah that the maʾmūm cannot add without considerably lagging behind. then it is unlawful for the maʾmūm to perform the missing sunnah. (2) the imām is performing the Ẓuhr and the follower is praying the ṣubh or vice versa.

It is makrūh to perform some other part of the ṣalāh simultaneously with the imām. 4. 77 . then the maʾmūm´s ṣalāh is invalid.Salah 11. or to be uncertain as to whether one did so or not. 3. For a male to follow a male. This also applies to when the imām omits the Qunūt in Subh ṣalāh. maʾmūm may add it without ceasing his participation in the jamāʿah.91 The Forms of Following the Imām Section: The Forms of Following the Imām are Nine: Five of which are valid: 1. For a female to follow a male. The maʾmūm should follow his imām. For a female to follow a hermaphrodite. 91 It invalidates one‟s ṣalāh to say takbīrat al-iḥrām simultaneously with the imām. which the maʾmūm may perform it if he can catch up with the imām before the imām raises his head from second sajdah. 5. For a female to follow a female. For a hermaphrodite to follow a male. If the imām raises his head before the maʾmūm makes sajdah even once and he has not intended to cease his participation in the jamāʿah. thereby losing the merit of jamāʿah. 2.

78 . Similarly it is permissible to join the Maghrīb ṣalāh and Isha ṣalāh. provided one joins them during a journey in which ṣalāh may be shortened or because of severe rain. 3. To intend joining the ṣalāhs. A hermaphrodite following a hermaphrodite. A hermaphrodite following a woman. 4. The Conditions of Jamaʿ Taqdim Section: The Conditions of Jamaʿ Taqdīm92 are Four: 1.93 2.Salah Four of which are invalid: 1. 2. 93 If one prays the second of the two ṣalāhs before the first. then that ṣalāh is invalid and must be repeated after the first. A man following a woman.94 92 It is permissible to join Ẓuhr ṣalāh and ʿAsr ṣalāh during the time of either of them. if one still wants to join them. To begin with the first ṣalāh. A man following a hermaphrodite.

Salah 3. either coinciding with the takbīrat al-iḥrām or occurring during the ṣalāh. The continuity of the excuse. and praying the first ṣalāh during the second ṣalāh‟s time is considered qaḍāʾ. 97 To make the intention before the end of the first ṣalāh‟s time by an interval which could contain at least one rakʿah. 95 Not to pause at length between them. 79 . The remaining of the excuse until the completion of the second ṣalāh.97 2.96 The Conditions of Jamaʿ Taʾkhir Section: The Conditions of Jamaʿ Taʾkhīr are Two: 1. one has sinned. 96 That continues until one finishes both ṣalāhs.95 4. To have the intention of delaying a ṣalāh up-to after its time and to have this intention in its proper time. 94 That the intention to join the two ṣalāhs occurs before finishing the first. If one neglects this intention. Performing them consecutively.

If they know the destination and the journey meets the condition. 100 Travelling for a reason that is not disobedience to Allah  as there is no concession to shorten ṣalāh on such a journey. 4.Salah The Conditions of Qasr Section: The Conditions of Qaṣr (to shorten the ṣalāh)98 are Seven: 1. 80 . To shorten the ṣalāh of a musāfir (except a sailor and a perpetual traveller) is more virtuous if the journey reaches three marhalahs. If a wife travelling with her husband or a soldier with his leader does not know the destination. 99 The journey‟s destination must be known. 2. ʿAsr. they may not shorten their ṣalāh as long as they have not yet travelled the distance that permits shortening. then they may shorten their ṣalāhs from the beginning of the journey. His journey should be at least two marhalahs99 (approximately 81 kilometers one way).100 3. Intention of qaṣr during takbīrat al-iḥrām. Knowledge of the permissibility of qaṣr. 98 It is permissible to shorten the Ẓuhr. and Isha ṣalāh to two rakʿahs each.101 5. The ṣalāh should be a four rakʿahs ṣalāh. 101 It not being valid if made after takbīrat al-iḥrām. When they have travelled it. then only may they shorten it. The journey should be a permissible one in Sharīʿah.

102 The ṣalāh takes place from start to finish while on the journey. That he should not follow one who is performing ṣalāh completely in any portion of his ṣalāh. If one‟s vehicle arrives before the ṣalāh is completed. 81 .102 7. one will have to perform the full ṣalāh.Salah 6. The continuity of travel till the completion of the two rakʿah ṣalāh.

3 In places where there is no hardship upon anyone to pray at one location. The minimum according to Imām Abū ḥanīfah rahimahullah is three participants besides the imām. 82 . The complete ṣalāh be performed in the time of Ẓuhr. It is the most virtues of ṣalāh. 4 Permanent residents means that they live there and do not leave except when they need to. is the best day of the week. No other congregation of Jumuʿah in the same town should be offered either before it or at the same time. Jumuʿah.3 3. and its day. then they must begin it as a Ẓuhr ṣalāh. It should be within a district of the town. To perform the ṣalāh in congregation. 2 If the jamāʿah commenced the Jumuʿah ṣalāh late and they doubt before commencing if they will be able to finish it within its time.5 1 To attend the ṣalāh of Jumuʿah is farḍ ʿayn. There should be forty free males who are mature and permanent residents of the town.2 2.Salat al-Jumu’ah Salat al-Jumuʿah The Conditions of Jumuʿah Section: The Conditions of Jumuʿah1 are Six: 1. 4.4 5.

That jamāʿah where the intention was made later. To come on foot in tranquility and dignity. the best time being from dawn on. To sit near to the imām and to recite dhikr. Sunan and Adab of Jumuʿah Note: Sunan and Adab of Jumuʿah:  It is mustaḥab to perform a sunnah bath and makrūh not to do so before going to the Jumuʿah ṣalāh. trim the nails. though it may be performed anytime after dawn.      To arrive early to the masjid. will have to perform Ẓuhr ṣalāh. 5 There be no other Jumuʿah ṣalāh prior to or simultaneous with the takbīrat al-iḥrām of the ṣalāh. 83 .Salat al-Jumu’ah 6. eliminate offensive odours. To deliver two khuṭbahs before the ṣalāh. It is recommended to recite Sūrah al-Kahf and ṣalāh upon Nabi  on the night before Jumuʿah and during its day. It is recommended to supplicate to Allah  excessively on Jumuʿahs. and not to ride to the masjid unless there is an excuse.  It is also mustaḥab to clean the teeth with miswāk. and wear perfume and one‟s finest clothes (white being the best). Qurʾān and ṣalāh in abundance upon Nabi . seeking the moment when duʿās are answered. remove body hair.

Salat al-Jumu’ah

The Integrals of the Two Khuṭbahs Section: The Integrals of the Two Khuṭbahs are Five: 1. Praising Allah  in both the khuṭbahs.6 2. Ṣalāh upon Nabi  in both the khuṭbahs.7 3. Enjoining taqwa in both the khuṭbahs.8 4. Recitation of one verse of the Qurʾān in one of the khuṭbahs.9 5. To make duʿā for the believers, males and females in the second khuṭbah.10

6

Saying “Alhamdulillah” (praise be to Allah) i.e. this particular utterance being prescribed. 7 Ṣalāh upon Nabī  (Blessings on the Prophet ), which is also a prescribed utterance. 8 Enjoining taqwa (fear of Allah ), for which a particular expression is not prescribed, it being sufficient to say, “Obey Allah”. 9 That conveys an intended meaning, such as a promise, threat, exhortation, or similar. 10 The duʿā must be for their ākhirah (hereafter) as duʿās for this world alone do not fulfil the integral of the khuṭbah. 84

Salat al-Jumu’ah

The Conditions for Delivering the Two Khuṭbahs Section: The Conditions for Delivering the Two Khuṭbahs are Ten: 1. Purity from minor and major ritual impurities.11 2. Purity from impurity on the clothes, body and place. 3. Covering the ʿawrah (private parts).12 4. To stand; this applies to those who have the ability to. 5. To sit between the two khuṭbahs for the duration that one pauses between two postures in ṣalāh. 6. Continuity between the two khuṭbahs.
11

If the khāṭib (speaker) breaks his wuḍūʾ during khutbah, the khutbah has to be repeated. But there is no harm if the khāṭib breaks his wuḍūʾ after delivering both the khutbahs and before performing ṣalāh. 12 The khāṭib‟s ʿawrah (private parts) should be covered. However, this is not a condition for the listener (for the validity of the khutbah). Similarly, the conditions of purity, to be in the place of ṣalāh and to understand the khutbah are not conditions for the maʾmūm. 85

Salat al-Jumu’ah
7. Continuity between the two khuṭbahs and the ṣalāh.13 8. The khuṭbah should be in the Arabic language.14 9. Forty people should hear the khuṭbah.15 10. It should be done in the time of Ẓuhr.

13

The pause between these integrals should not be too long but should rather be according to the common understanding of people and not more than the shortest two rakʿahs of ṣalāh. 14 All the integrals of the khuṭbah should be in the Arabic Language. 15 Forty people including an imām. 86

If he does not have a sword or the like. as the aim is stillness and humility. for it is a reprehensible innovation. “Assalāmu ʿalaykum” to those present when he enters the masjid and again when he ascends the minbar and reaches his seat there.Salat al-Jumu’ah The Sunan of the Khuṭbah Note: The Sunan of the Khuṭbah:  The Khāṭib (speaker) stand on a minbar (pulpit) or a high place and that it be to the right of the miḥrab (prayer niche) and that the khāṭib stand on the right side of the minbar. or dropping them to his sides. He does not move them or fidget with one. When speaking. bow or stick which is in his left hand.  The khāṭib says.  The khāṭib face the jamāʿah during both khuṭbahs and should not turn to the right or left during the khuṭbahs. It is desirable for him to put his other hand on the minbar. 87 . he keeps his hand still by placing the right upon the left. the khāṭib lean on a sword.   The khāṭib sits until the muadhdhīn has completed the second adhān. It is desirable for the listener to face the khāṭib.

To wash the deceased.2 2.4 4. However.Janazah Janazah Four Things Compulsory for the Deceased Section: There are Four Things Compulsory for the Preparation of the Deceased:1 1. To shroud the deceased.5 1 For the Muslim deceased who did not die in the state of iḥrām nor as a martyr. it is mustaḥab (recommended) that his closest maḥram (unmarriageable kin) closes his eyes and jaws in order to make his joints flexible.3 3. It is mustaḥab to pray it at a masjid and makrūh to offer the ṣalāh at a cemetery. gently removes his clothes and covers him with a light cloth and places something heavy on his stomach. 88 . It is mustaḥab not to look at or directly touch the other parts of the body save with a cloth. The obligation is fulfilled if a single Muslim male who has reached the age of mumayyiz (discrimination) prays over the deceased. When a person dies. it is unlawful to mention it as this is backbiting. it is sunnah to mention it. To perform ṣalāh upon the deceased. If he notices something good. It is recommended to perform the janazah ṣalāh (funeral prayer) in a jamāʿah (group). 4 It is wājib to perform ṣalāh over the deceased. but if he notices something bad. To bury the deceased. it is ḥarām to give a bath and to offer ṣalāh upon a martyr. 3 It is ḥarām to look at the ʿawrah of the deceased or touch it except with a cloth. 2 It is mustaḥab that the one washing the deceased be trustworthy so that he can be relied on to wash the deceased completely and so forth.

Incense should be burned from the start of washing till the finish.Janazah Washing the Deceased Section: The minimum wash is to pass water over the entire body and the best is to wash the private organs. It is sunnah that no one be present except him (one washing) and his assistant. since the deceased suffers from it just as a living person would. 89 . It is best to wash the body under a roof. to wash the limbs of wuḍūʾ. to rub the body with lotus leaves and to pour water over the body thrice. 6 It is wājib for the one washing the deceased to cover the ʿawrah of the deceased. heating it when necessary so as to remove filth that could not otherwise be removed or when the weather is cold. It is best to bury him in the cemetery. and best that cold water be used. to remove filth from the nose.6 5 Then the deceased is buried obligatorily.

. nostril. an upper garment and two cloths. 90 . reed perfume etc. and to perfume the entire body except if a person dies while in a state of iḥrām . to sprinkle on it an aromatic compound of camphor. and ears and on places that touch the ground in prostration. a shirt.Janazah Shrouding the Deceased Section: The minimum shrouding is one cloth that covers the whole body. The perfect shroud for a male is three cloths and for a female. a scarf.7 7 It is mustaḥab to scent the shroud with incense. mouth. to place cotton and perfume on the apertueres of the body such as the eyes.

The intention must coincide with the takbīrat al-iḥrām. but in addition require: that the deceased‟s body has been washed before the ṣalāh and that the imām and the maʾmūm do not stand ahead of the body during the ṣalāh.9 2. but not to recite the “du„ā iftitah” or a sūrah therein. Intention. and it is mustaḥab each time to fold the right hand over the left.11 5. 4. 9 It suffices that one merely intends to pray four takbīrs over the particular deceased person as a farḍ kifāyah act. It is also sunnah to recite ṣalāh upon the 91 . Ṣalāh upon Nabi  after the second takbir.10 3. four times in the janāzah ṣalāh. 12 It is wājib to recite ṣalāh upon Nabī  after which it is sunnah to supplicate for the believer. 11 After takbīrat al-iḥrām. raising one‟s hand to shoulder level at each one. “Allahu Akbar”. Four takbirs. it is wājib to recite Sūrah al-Fātiḥah. 10 One says. Recitation of Sūrah al-Fātiḥah. It is mustaḥab to recite taʿawwudh before it and “Amin” after it. To stand for those who are able.Janazah  The Integrals of ṣalāh Janazah Section: The Integrals of ṣalāh Janazah (Funeral Prayer) are Seven:8 1.12 8 The conditions of janāzah ṣalāh (funeral prayer) are the same as other ṣalāh.

(3) to place a block as a pillow for him and to pull-back the shroud enough to lay his cheek directly on the surface of the block and.14 The Grave Section: The minimum depth for a grave is a hole that conceals the odour of the body and protects it from animals.15 family of Rasulullah  and to say. 15 It is mustaḥab for the person burying the deceased: (1) to say. 92 . “O Allah. 14 Then one says. The perfect depth is the height of a man with his arms raised and fingers open.Janazah 6. “Alhamdulillah” before the ṣalāh upon Nabī . 13 The supplication for the deceased. his chest should be placed on the soil. Duʿā for the deceased after the third takbir. the first being wājib and the second sunnah. Salām. (2) to supplicate to Allah for the forgiveness of the deceased. and it is wājib to make him (the deceased) face the qiblah. (4) to place the deceased upon his right side. forgive this deceased”.13 7. the minimum being. “Assalāmu ʿalaykum” twice. “Bismillahi wa ʿala millati Rasūlillah “.

to take that wealth that has been buried with the deceased whether the owner demands it or not. In such a case he should not be exhumed.Janazah The Exhumation of the Deceased Section: There are Four Factors That Permit the Exhumation of the Deceased: 1. To give a bath as long as the (body of the) deceased has not decomposed. 18 It is wājib to exhume a deceased even after the body of the deceased has decomposed.19 16 It is wājib to exhume a deceased who was buried without been given a bath or tayammum contrary if the deceased was buried without being shrouded.16 2. 19 That foetus which is six months of age or more because it is necessary to remove a living baby from the womb of the deceased before burial. For a woman when her foetus is buried with her and there is a possibility that it is still alive.18 4. 17 As long as the body of the deceased has not decomposed. For wealth if it was buried with the deceased.17 3. To make the deceased face towards the qiblah. 93 .

It is wājib for a sick person who is incapable. Permissible. Makrūh (disliked).20 It is undesirable to ask for water to be poured towards the one making wuḍūʾ.     It is permissible to ask for water to be brought close. Undesirable. Because this is the ʿibadah (act of worship).22 20 21 For the purpose of making wuḍūʾ.21 It is makrūh for someone else to wash the limbs. 4.Janazah Seeking Assistance Section: There are Four Rulings for Seeking Assistance: 1. Wājib (compulsory). 22 It is wājib for one who is incapable to seek assistance even though by paying the normal salary for that task. it is preferable to show the humility and slavery in the ʿibadah and this is attained by doing it by oneself. 94 . 2. 3.

95 .

Zakah  96 .

barley. While there is a considerable difference between the value of the gold and silver zakāh minimum. since it is more beneficial for the poor. There is no zakāh on cattle that were fed fodder or grain only even if they could have otherwise been grazed.3 3. on which 2. 2 Zakāh on livestock is limited to camels. millet. 3 Zakāh is wājib for anyone who has possessed the zakāh-payable amount of gold or silver for one lunar year. rice etc. cattle. There is no zakāh on vegetables nor is there zakāh on seasonings such as cumin or coriander 97 . 4 The zakāh for crops is only on the staple types that people cultivate. adult or child) who has possessed a zakāh-payable amount for one lunar year. Crops. the minimum for monetary currency should correspond with that of silver. dry. Niṣab. such as wheat. sheep and goats. the minimum that necessitates zakāh for gold is 20 mithqals (84. Livestock.5% is due. There is no zakāh on fruit except for raw dates and grapes.8 grams). female.4 1 Zakāh is wājib on every Muslim (male.2 2.Zakah Zakah The Wealth upon Which Zakāh is Compulsory Section: The Wealth upon Which Zakāh is Compulsory are Six Types:1 1.5% is due and for silver is 200 dirhams (594 grams). on which 2. and store. Money. Zakāh is wājib when one has owned (1) a zakāh-payable number of livestock. (2) for one lunar year and (3) has been grazing them on unowned open range pasturage for the entire year.

7 A zakāh of 2. if it amounts to the zakāh minimum and the land is not owned. The zakāh is only paid after the ore is refined into metal. or when the ripeness and wholeness of a zakāh-payable amount of dates or grapes is apparent. The zakāh for crops that have been watered with effort. one is not obligated. 6 An immediate zakāh of twenty percent is due when one finds a treasure trove that was buried in pre-Islamic time or by non-Muslims. The minimal quantity on which zakāh is payable for crops is 618. or land rented from someone in order to rent it out to others at a profit and. If such a treasure is found on owned land. on which there is no zakāh). (3) that the trade goods have been acquired through a transaction. (2) whose value at the zakāh year‟s end equals or exceeds the zakāh minimum of gold or silver. otherwise. or received as a gift given in return for something else. it is considered as a lost and found article. crystal. or such as an article rented from someone in order to rent them out to others at a profit. One is obligated to pay zakāh as soon as one possesses the zakāhpayable amount of grain. free of husks or chaff. Treasure troves. or other.Zakah 4. emerald.7 since the aim in using them is preparation of food.8 kilograms of net dried weight. or several times uninterrupted by abandoning or neglecting the project. The zakāh for crops that have been watered without effort. lead. 98 .5 5. the owner intended to use the goods for trade. 5 Zakāh on trade goods is wājib for anyone who: (1) has possessed trade goods for a year. not nourishment.6 6. (4) that at the time of acquisition. ancient or modern. (3) that this amount of ore has been gathered by working at the site one time. and. If found in a masjid or street. such as on land irrigated by ditches is 5 percent of the crop. is 10 percent of the crop.5 percent is immediately due on (1) the zakāh minimum or more of gold or silver (excluding anything else such as iron. Mines. (2) extracted from a mine located on land permissible for the miner to work or owned by him. it belongs to the owner of the land. or if it was buried in Islamic times. Wealth acquired from business in which two and half percent of the value of the commodity should be discharged. as by rain and the like.

though the best time is on the day of ʿEid al-Fiṭr before the ṣalāh. and is a sin to delay until after this. what one needs to clothe them. male. It is not permissible to delay giving it until after the day of the ʿEid. only wheat may be given). that is one may give it until sunset.036 kgs of wheat) or in money value thereof for the day of ʿEid for himself and those whom one is obliged to support.   The Zakāh of ʿEid al-Fiṭr becomes wājib when the sun sets on the night before the ʿEid. and one must make it up.Zakah The Zakāh of ʿEid al-Fitr Note: The Zakāh of ʿEid al-Fiṭr:  The zakāh of ʿEid al-Fiṭr is wājib for every free Muslim. of the kinds of crops on which zakāh is payable (if the main staple is bread. female or child.  It is permissible to give the zakāh of ʿEid al-Fiṭr to deserving recipients anytime during Ramaḍān. and in excess of one‟s debts and housing expenses. The zakāh of ʿEid al-Fiṭr consists of 2.036 kgs of the main staple of the area in which it is given. provided that one has the necessary amount of food (2. 99 .

3. Those in debt 7. ʿĀmil – Zakāh collector. Muallafat al-qulūb – those whose hearts are to be reconciled. Riqāb – those slaves who are purchasing their freedom. 5. 2. 4. 6.Zakah The Eight Categories of Recipients Note: The Eight Categories of Recipients: 1. Faqīr (destitute) – someone who does not have wealth or earning that is sufficient for himself. 8. Sabīlullah (those fighting for Allah) – people enganged in Islāmic military operations for whom no salary has been allotted in the army roster. 100 . Miskīn (poor) – someone who has something to spend for his needs but it is not sufficient. Ibn al-sabīl – the traveller in need of money.

101 .

Saum  102 .

The testimony of a just person (non-fāsiq) for those who do not sight it. 2. 103 . provided the witness is upright (male. 2 The testimony of a single witness that the new moon has been seen is sufficient to establish that the month of Ramaḍān has come.2 1 For those who do not see it.1 3. On completion of thirty days of Shaʿban.Saum Saum Fasting of Ramaḍān Section: Fasting of Ramaḍān Becomes Compulsory With the Attainment of One of Five Things: 1. it only becomes wājib when the sighting is established by the testimony of an upright witness. By sighting the moon for the person who sees it. and responsible for the duties of Islam which excludes boys who have reached the age of discernment but not puberty) and together with the decree of the ruler. even though he is a fāsiq (sinner).

then such a person is obliged to reckon Ramaḍān as best as he can and to fast it. whether the heart is inclined to it being or not. or someone who does not know when Ramaḍān has come because of being in a land without habituations or people who know when it is. 5. or if the month fasted occurred after it. The informing of a just person whose information is reliable. it is not valid.3 3 If it is difficult to learn which month it is.Saum 4. Such a fast is valid if it remains unknown as to whether the month fasted actually coincided with Ramaḍān. 104 . or if it did coincide with it. though if the month fasted was before Ramaḍān. With the perception that Ramaḍān has commenced (this is) for that person who is doubtful of it. for someone imprisoned or the like such as someone being held in a dark place who cannot tell night from day. and also with the information of an unreliable source if one is inclined to it being true.

though he is punished in the next life for not doing so.5 4.Saum The Conditions for the Validity of Fasting Section: The Conditions for the Validity of Fasting are Four: 1. Purity from haiḍ (menstruation). Islām . 3. 5 A woman whose period ends during a day of Ramaḍān is mustaḥab to fast the rest of the day and is wājib to make-up the fast and the fast-days prior to it when missed during her period or postnatal bleeding.4 2. : The Conditions for Fasting Becomes Wājib 4 A non-Muslim will not be asked to fast nor would it be valid if he did. 105 . Knowledge of its appropriate time. Sane.

then fasting is better. though if not. even when the intention to fast has been made the night before. 2. 9 It is permissible not to fast when traveling. Islām . Muqīm (non traveller). delay recovery from.6 3. Someone whom fasting exhausts because of advanced years or having an illness from which he is unlikely to recover are not required to fast. or cause one considerable harm with. 106 . Mukallaf (reaching the age of puberty and sanity).9 6 A child of seven is ordered to fast.64 km one way. and not more than three blows). 8 The illness that permits not fasting being that which fasting would worsen. If one leaves after dawn. 7 One is capable of bearing the fast. provided that the journey is at least 80. and that one leaves town before dawn. Health. but so to discipline the child.8 5. one is not entitled to omit the fast.7 4.Saum Section: The Conditions for Fasting Becoming Wājib are Five: 1. It is preferable for travellers not to fast if fasting would harm them. and at ten is beaten for not fasting (not severely. the same dispensation applying to someone who needs to take medicine during the day that breaks the fast and that he can not delay taking until night. Ability.

Saum The Integrals of Fasting of Ramaḍān Section: The Integrals of Fasting of Ramaḍān are Three: 1. for the one who is conscious of his fast and is not ignorant. To refraining from intentionally doing things which break the fast. Qaḍāʾ of Fasting and Kaffarah 107 . To make an intention at night for each day of the farḍ (fast). 2. 3. The fasting person himself.

12 2. 1. Upon one who breaks the fast thinking that the sun has set but it was not so. it is binding for him to abstain from things which break the fast and also to recover that fast later. 108 . then to fast the days of two consecutive months. but it was not so. two separate expiations would be necessary. Breaking his fast with a wrong act from his side in the month of Ramaḍān only. then the expiation is to feed sixty poor persons (509 grams of food to each poor person). The expiation consist of freeing a sound Muslim slave. If this is not possible. Upon one who omits the intention at night for the farḍ fast. The woman with whom intercourse is performed is not obliged to expiate it. 3. If one is unable to do this. 4.10 There are six situations in which it is compulsory for one to abstain from things which break the fast11 and also necessitate the making-up of that fast later. or if not possible.Saum Section: Major kaffārah (expiation) and specified punishment are compulsory. though if it were committed twice in one day there would be only one expiation. so that if it were committed on two separate days. 11 Wājib to fast the remainder of the day. Upon one who has sahur (a meal before dawn) thinking that the night still remains.13 10 The legal occasion of the offense is the particular day of fasting. 12 Like a person who is intoxicated from the night until the morning of Ramaḍān. the expiation remains as an unperformed obligation upon the person concerned. together with making-up the fast for he who breaks his fast of Ramaḍān a complete day by having complete intercourse in which he becomes sinner in his fast.

unconsciousness and unlawful intoxicants if they last for the entire day. it does not break the fast. postnatal bleeding. Upon one who was excessive in gargling and in putting water into the nostrils to such an extent that the water goes down the throat. 6. Upon one who has reckoned the 30th of Shaʿbān to be the first of Ramaḍān. insanity even for a moment. 13 It is best to hasten breaking the fast when one is certain that the sun has set. childbirth.Saum 5.14 The Factors That Nullify Fasting Section: Fasting is nullified with apostasy. menstruation. 14 If some water slips down when a lot has not been used. 109 .

4.Saum The Breaking of the Fast in Ramaḍān Section: The Breaking of the Fast in Ramaḍān are Four Types (In Respect to Rulings): 1.15 15 Someone obliged to make-up some fast-days of Ramaḍān is recommended to do so consecutively and immediately. Wājib. like he who delays the making-up of Ramaḍān despite having the capability to do so. like insanity. like a traveller and a sick person. Ḥarām. Permissible. 3. until the time does not permit it. 2. That which is neither wājib nor permissible. It is not permissible for a person with some unperformed fast-days of Ramaḍān to delay making them up until the next Ramaḍān unless there is an excuse for delaying. 110 . like for a woman who experiences haiḍ and postnatal bleeding.

Saum

c

111

Saum
The Types of Breaking the Fast The Types of Breaking the Fast are Four: 1. The things that make qaḍāʾ and fidyah16 wājib are two:  Breaking the fast due to the fear of harm for others.17  Breaking the fast and thereafter delaying to make-up for it until the next Ramaḍān comes.18 2. Those for which qaḍāʾ is compulsory but not the fidyah, like one who is unconscious. 3. Those for which fidyah is compulsory but not the qaḍāʾ, like a very old man. 4. That which is neither wājib nor permissible,19 like the insane person who‟s insanity is not caused by transgression.

16

One must pay 509 grams of food to the poor for each fast-day missed, in addition to making it up. 17 A woman who is breast-feeding a baby or is pregnant and apprehends harm to herself or her child may omit the fast and make it up later, though if she omits it because of fear of harm for the child alone not for herself then she must give 509 grams of food in charity for each day missed as an expiation in addition to making-up each day. 18 When making-up, if a fast-day is delayed until a second Ramaḍān comes, then one must pay an additional 509 grams to be paid for that day. 19 A person who is forced, his fast will not break because he is not responsibled for what he has been forced to do. 112

Saum

The Things Do Not Break the Fast Section: The Things Which by Reaching the Stomach, Do Not Break the Fast are Seven: 1. – 3. That which reaches the body cavity20 out of forgetfulness, ignorance or force.21 4. The mixing of saliva with what is between the teeth22 and he is unable to discharge it, he is therefore excused. 5. The dust of the road which reaches to the body cavity. 6. - 7. The dust of sifted flour or flies etc. which reach the body cavity.

20 21

Through an open passage-way The deliberate intake of anything besides air or saliva into the body cavity breaks the fast. 22 Food etc. provided this is after having cleaned between them after eating, by using a toothpick or the like between them. 113

Hajj and ʿUmrah  114 .

2 To be able to pay for the provision and transportation for the journey. 4. even when the amount is inconsiderable including ḥajj fees. 115 . Sanity. Free person. Islām. 2. The way towards Makkah is safe. whether the latter be non-Muslims or highway robbers. and that is in excess of any money one owes for debts.1 6. The Conditions for Ḥajj being Wājib The Conditions for Ḥajj being Wājib are Six: 1. and while obtaining lodgings for oneself.2 1 Safety for one‟s person and property from predators and enemies. 3.Hajj and ‘Umrah Hajj and ʿUmrah. even those not yet due. 5. Having ability (Sufficient provision and conveyance for the journey). This applies to one who is travelling there and back. with money one has that is in excess of the amount one requires to support and cloth the members of one‟s family. Reached puberty. It is also a condition that one have sufficient time to travel to Makkah al-Mukarramah means that one can reach Makkah and having sufficient time to perform all the rituals of ḥajj.

Wuqūf – To stay in ʿArāfah. The Integrals of ʿUmrah The Integrals of ʿUmrah are Five: 1. by any means. As for women. 2.going between ṣafā and Marwah.Hajj and ‘Umrah The Integrals of Ḥajj The Integrals of Ḥajj are Six: 1. IḤrām – to make the intention of performing ʿumrah in the heart. 3 On the 10th Dhul ḥijjah.3 4. one enters Makkah and performs ṭawāf alIfāḍah. To make ṭawaf of ʿumrah. which is an integral without which the ḥajj remains unfinished (meaning that. it is optimal for them to shorten their hair in the latter way. 4 Seven times. To make “ṭawaf al-Ifāḍah” which is performed after the stay in ʿArāfah. three hairs thereof from the head. Saʿī . it may not be compensated for by merely slaughtering.5 6. though the time it may be performed is anytime thereafter. Iḥrām – to make the intention of performing ḥajj in the heart and to recite the talbiyah. even if it be for a little while after zawāl of the 9th of Dhul Ḥijjah until the dawn of the 10th of Dhul Ḥijjah. Ḥalq – shaving or shortening the hair.). it being makrūh (offensive) for a woman to shave her head. or may merely shorten it.4 5. 3. not something such as the beard or moustache. 116 . though one may confine oneself by removing. for which the optimal is to clip a little less than two centimetres from all the hair. one begins at ṣafā and ends at Marwah 5 The best way for men is to shave the entire head. Tartīb (sequence). 2.

afā 4. those on ḥajj go forth to Muzdālifah occupied with dhikr and talbiyah proceeding with tranquillity and dignity. Saʿī . Stoning the three “al-Jamrat” (the stoning site).7 3. One enters iḥrām at the miqat (proper site). Shaving or shortening the hair. 8 Ayyām al-tashrīq – 11. One picks up twenty-one pebbles from Mīnā on the days after the ʿEid.9 5. 5.Hajj and ‘Umrah 3. 7 When the sun sets on 9 Dhul ḥijjah. taking care to shun the three places of stoning. It is desirable to arrive before noon to perform the Ẓuhr prayer there as the Prophet  did. [doing the latter if one had not yet previously performed it after the ṭawāf qudūm (arrival circumambulation)]. Staying the night following the ʿEid8 at Mīnā. 9 When finished with the ṭawāf al-Ifāḍah and going between ṣafā and Marwah. 12. 2. the integral means that ḥajj will not exist except with it. one is obliged to return to Mina to stay overnight there and to stone on the days following the ʿEid (Ayyām al-Tashrīq).going between S and Marwah. 13 of Dhul ḥijjah. 117 . Tartīb (sequence). and to spend the night there. and the requisite means the dam (expiation) becomes compulsory by leaving it. and they join the Maghrīb and ʿIshāʾ at Muzdālifah. ṭawāf al-wadaʿ 6 Arkān (integrals) and wājib (requisites) are synonyms except in this chapter. Staying the night at Muzdālifah. The Wājibat of Ḥajj The Wājibat (Requisites)6 of Ḥajj are Five: 1. 4.

Having sexual intercourse 10.  They become a makeup fast that must be performed before the other seven fasted at home by an interval equal to the days of oneʿs journey home. Combing hair. or if unable to slaughter. making ten days. Men wearing sewn garments. 8. 118 .Hajj and ‘Umrah Unlawful Things While in Iḥrām Unlawful Things While in Iḥrām are Ten: 1. 4. Men covering their head. Performing nikāh. Trimming nails. Applying perfume. as is obligatory. then. The Expiations of Ḥajj and ʿUmrah The Expiations of Ḥajj and ʿUmrah are Four Categories: (I) Dam tartīb wa taqdīr – expiation consist of alternatives in a fixed precedence order and predetermined amount:   One must slaughter a sheep and distribute its meat to the poor in the ḥarām. or if one fails to do so while there. Killing a game animal. 6. One must fast three days during the Ḥajj and seven more at home. 2. 3. Shaving hair or plucking it. Sexual foreplay other than intercourse. 7. 5. 9.

4. then double this amount. 3. 9. one distributes 509 grams of wheat to the poor of the ḥarām. 5. Not standing at ʿArāfah. (II) Dam takhyīr wa taqdīr – expiation in which one is free to choose one of three predetermined alternatives namely:   To slaughter and distribute a sheep. To fast three days. the time for which ends at sunset on the third day if one does not leave early. and if two nights. Performing an ʿumrah first (tamattuʿ ḥajj). though if one only misses a single night. 8.Hajj and ‘Umrah There are nine things which necessitate this type of expiation: 1. 6. Not entering iḥrām at the mīqāt (proper site). wherever one wishes. 2. 119 . even if unconsecutive. 7. To miss spending the night at Muzdalifah. Not performing the Ṭawāf al-Wadaʿ (farewell circumambulation). Performing ḥajj and ʿumrah simultaneously (qiran). Breaking one‟s vow. To miss all three nights at Mīnā after the ʿEid. To miss stoning at the stoning sites of Mīnā on the three days after the ʿEid.

Trimming three nails at one time and place. 5. There are eight things which necessitate this type of expiation: 1. one must pay 509 grams of wheat to the poor or fast one day for each hair. rendering permissible all 120 . with the same rules and restriction as just mentioned. and one has remained at the same place. partial and full: Partial release from iḥrām occurs when any two of the three rites of stoning.036 kgs of wheat to each of six of the poor of the ḥarām. even if their number exceeds three.Hajj and ‘Umrah  To give 2. Men wearing sewn garments or covering their head. Doing any two of them accomplishes partial release from iḥrām. or women covering their faces. Using scent. 6. 3. meaning that the interval between removing each is not considered long. though if their removal does not occur at a single time and place. 8. Sexual foreplay other than intercourse. 7. 2. Having sexual intercourse a second time after having spoiled one‟s ḥajj by an initial sexual intercourse. Having sexual intercourse between partial and full release from iḥrām. Using oil. cutting the hair and ṭawāf are performed. Removal of three hairs at one time and place.10 10 The release from iḥrām in ḥajj is in two stages. 4.

Having spoiled one‟s ḥajj or ʿumrah by sexual intercourse11 in which case one must slaughter a camel. then. things that were made unlawful by iḥrām except those relating to women. 121 . Full release from iḥrām occurs when all three rites have been performed. in which case one must release oneself from iḥrām by:   One must slaughter a sheep and distribute its meat to the poor in the ḥarām. or if one fails to do so while there as is obligatory.Hajj and ‘Umrah (III) Dam tartīb wa taʿdīl – expiation in a fixed precedence order of alternatives involving estimate-based substitutes: It is necessary due to two things: 1. 2. getting married. or touching with desire. though one still has to stone at the three jamrat and stay overnight at Mīnā during the days following the „Eid (Ayyām alTashrīq). not the female. 11 If one intentionally has sexual intercourse before finishing one‟s ʿumrah. or while on ḥajj before partial release from iḥrām. Being prevented by another from completing all the integrals of the ḥajj or ʿumrah. or if unable to.  They become a makeup fast that must be performed before the other seven fasted at home by an interval. It is wājib to pay the expiation for the male. such as sexual intercourse. making ten days. and it renders permissible everything made unlawful by iḥrām. or if unable to slaughter. One must fast three days during the ḥajj and seven more at home.

122 . (One may fast anywhere. then. or to distribute funds to the poor. but it is not permissible to delay it without an excuse. then. then. but if not possible.) (IV) Dam takhyīr wa taʿdīl . (4) one estimates the cost of a camel and how much food this would buy.expiation in which one is free to choose between alternatives consisting of estimate-based substitutes. one is obliged to slaughter a sheep which is obligatory for killing even a single pigeon. but if not possible. (3) seven sheep. (2) a cow. but if not possible. and then gives that much food to the poor in the ḥarām. which equal the value of the game animal or to buy food equal to the animal‟s value and to distribute it as charity or to fast one day for each 509 grams of food.Hajj and ‘Umrah then one must slaughter. Although if the animal was a pigeon. (5) one fasts one day for every 509 grams of food that would have been given had (4) been done. one may fulfil the expiation either by slaughtering a domestic animal that is like the wild animal which was killed. Killing a game animal while in iḥrām. It is necessitated by two things: 1.

 123 . where. To Visit the Tomb of Rasūlullah  It is mustaḥab when one has finished the ḥajj to visit the tomb of Rasūlullah  in al-Madīnah al-Munawwarah. one slaughters a sheep. and if small. one slaughters and distributes a cow. if it is large in relation to other trees of its kind.Hajj and ‘Umrah 2. Allah knows best. Destroying a tree of the ḥarām.

my parents. from this world as Muslims. and those who were related to me. the Messenger of Allah to the entire creation. the Warrior Prophet. The text of “Safinat al-najāʾ” (The Ship of Salvation) is complete with the help of Allah the Exalted. All praise is due to Allah. and peace be upon his entire family and all his Companions. the Conqueror and the Seal. my beloved ones. Peace be upon our master Muḥammad ibn ʿAbdullah ibn ʿAbdul Muṭṭalib ibn Hāshim ibn ʿAbd Manaf. Lord of all the worlds. the Beloved of Allah. 124 . and that He forgives me and them for our recklessness and weakness.Khatimah Khatimah We ask Almighty Allah through the dignity of His graceful prophet that He takes me.

125 .

Appendices  126 .

‫هلُدَ ى و ُّؼى و ْ عػوف و ْ غـَى‬ َ َ ََ َ َ َ Duʿā for all conditions: Ṭahārah – Purification Duʿā before commencing wuḍūʾ: ِ ِ ‫ُ َّل ِ َ َّل ْ َ ِ َّل‬ .Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar Appendix 1: Selected Duʿās and Adhkar Duʿā for Seeking Knowledge: ْ َ َ َ .ً ‫َ ؾفم ِ يِّن َ ْ ل ُ ك ِ ؾ ً كَواِعو ورز و َ ق و و َ ؿ ً ُ َؼ َّل‬ َ َ ً ‫ً َ ِ ْ ً يِّن‬ ‫َّل ُ َّل‬ َ َ ‫َ ؾفم ِ يِّن َ ْ ل ُ ك عػو و ْ عوا َِقي ، َ ؾفم ِ يِّن َ ْ ل ُ ك‬ ‫َ َ َ ْ َ َ َ َ َّل ُ َّل‬ ‫َّل ُ َّل‬ ِ . ‫بِسم ؾـه رْحن رحقم‬ Duʿā when beginning wuḍūʾ: 127 . ‫َ ُ وذ بِو ؾـه ِ ن شقطون رجقم‬ ِ ِ ‫ْ ِ َّل ِ َّل ْ ٰ ِ َّل‬ .

‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫ُ ََ‬ ‫ُ َّل‬ ‫َ ْ َْ‬ ‫َّل ُ َّل ْ َ ْ‬ ‫َ ؾفم جعؾـِي ِ ن َّلو بِ ْ َ ، و جعؾـِي ِ ن ْ ـؿ َطفر ْ ن ،‬ ‫َ ُ َ يِّن ِ َ‬ ‫َ َّل‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َ ْ َْ‬ ‫و جعؾـِي ِ ن ِ َودك صو ِـح ْ َ ، ُ ْحوكَك ؾفم‬ ‫َ َّل‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫َ َ َّل ُ َّل‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫وبِحؿدك َ ْ فدُ َن ٓ ِ ٰ ه َّلِٓ َكًْ ، َ ْ َغػرك ، و َتُو ُ‬ ‫ْ ُ َ َ‬ ‫َّل َ‬ ‫َ َ ْ َ َ‬ ‫ْ َ‬ ‫ِ َ قك .‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َّل َ‬ ‫ُ َ َ‬ ‫:‪Duʿā after wuḍūʾ‬‬ ‫َ ْ َ َ َّل َّل ـ ُ َ ْ ُ َ‬ ‫َّل‬ ‫َ ْ فدُ َن ٓ َ ه ٓ له وحدَ ه ٓ َ ِ ك َ ه و َ ْ فدُ َن‬ ‫َ ُ َ َ‬ ‫ُمَؿدً َ ْدُ ه ور ُ و ُ ه .‬ ‫821‬ .‫‪Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ْ ـِ َ ِْ‬ ‫ْ ـِ ِ َ ََ‬ ‫َ ْ َؿدُ َّلِله َ ذ ا ْ َ م وكِعؿ ِه ، ْ َؿدُ َّلِله َّل ذي جعل‬ ‫ِ َ َْ‬ ‫َ ِ‬ ‫ْـ َ ُ ً َ ْ ِ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫ل َ وا َ فور و ا ْ َ م كُور ، ر يِّن َ ُ وذ بِك ِ ن َ َ ز ا‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫َ ً َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫شقو ِ ِ و َ ُ وذ بِك ر يِّن َن َ ْ ُ ُ ون .

Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar Duʿā entering toilet: ِ ِ ْ ِ ُ ِ ‫ِ َّل ـ‬ . ِ ‫ُ ػر كَك ْ َؿدُ ِؾـه َّل ذي َذ َ ى َ ـيِّني َٕذى و َ واو‬ َ ْ ْ 129 . ٌ‫بِسم له ، َ ؾفم ِ يِّن َ ُ وذبِك ِ ن ْ ـخ ٌُ و ْلَ َوئ‬ َ َ َ ُ ‫َّل ُ َّل‬ ْ Duʿā leaving toilet: ِ ِ ‫َّل‬ َ َ َ ْ َ َْ .

‬ ‫َ ُ ُ ْ َ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫:‪Duʿā Iftitah‬‬ ‫له َ ْز َ ِر و ْ َؿدُ َّلِله َثِر و ُ ْحون لـه ُبؽْرة‬ ‫َّل ـ ُ َ ُ ً َ ْ ـ ِ ً َ َ َ َّل ِ َ ً‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ َّل ِ‬ ‫و َ ِ ق ً ، وجفً وجفي ِؾذي اطر س َ و ا و َٕرض‬ ‫َ َ َ َّل َ‬ ‫َ َّل ْ َ ْ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ ْ ْ‬ ‫َّل‬ ‫حـِقػو ُ سؾِ ً ، و َ و َكَو ِ ن ْ ـ ُ ْ ِ ِ َ ، ِن َ َ ِت وكُسؽِي‬ ‫ْ ل‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ِ َ ُ‬ ‫َ ً ْ‬ ‫031‬ .‫‪Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar‬‬ ‫‪Ṣalāh – Prayer‬‬ ‫:‪Duʿā after adhān‬‬ ‫ِ َ ِ ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ؾفم ر َّل َ ذه دَّل ْ وة َّلو َّل ي و ص َة ْ ؼوئؿي ، آا‬ ‫َ َّل‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َّل ُ َّل َ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َ قدَ كَو ُمَؿدً ْ و ِ قؾي و ْ ػضقؾي و ْبعثه َ ؼو ً و ُمْؿود َّل ذي‬ ‫َ ََ َ َ ََ َ َُْ َ َ ُ ً‬ ‫يِّن ُ َّل‬ ‫و َ دْ َته ، ِكَّلك َٓ ُتْؾِف دِقعود .

‫‪Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫َ ُ َ ٰ َ‬ ‫وُم َْقوي و َ َوِت ِ َّل ـه ر ّ ْ عودِ َ ، ٓ َ ِ ك َ ه وبِذ ِك‬ ‫َ َ َ َ ِ ل َ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ُ ِ را و َكَو ِ ن ْ ـؿسؾِؿ َ .‬ ‫ْ ُ َ‬ ‫ْ ُ ْ‬ ‫:‪Duʿā during ruku‬‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ُ ْحون رِّب ْ عظِقم وبِحؿده (‪)3 times‬‬ ‫َ َ يِّن َ‬ ‫َ َ ْ‬ ‫َ َ َْ ُ َ َ َ َ‬ ‫ؾفم َ ك ر َ عً وبِك آ َ ـًْ و َ ك َ ْ ؾؿً ، خشع َ ك‬ ‫َ ْ َ‬ ‫َّل ُ َّل‬ ‫َ َّل ْ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َ ؿعي و َبَصي وُميِّني و َ ظؿي و َ ص ِي و َ و ْ َؼؾً بِه‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ َ ِ َ ُ َ ْ َ َ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫َ دَ ِ ي .‬ ‫:‪Duʿā during ʿitidal‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ر ّبـَو و َ ك ْ َؿد ْحْدً َثِر َ ق ًو ُ َور ًو اِقه ، ِ لا‬ ‫ْ َ‬ ‫ً يِّن‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫ْ َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫سؿو ا و ِ لا َٕرض و ِ لا َ و ِ ئً ِ ن َشا َبعدُ .‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ْ َ ْ ْ‬ ‫َّل َ َ‬ ‫َ ْ َ ْ ْ ِ َ ْ َ‬ ‫131‬ .

‫‪Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar‬‬ ‫:‪Duʿā during sitting between two sajdahs‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ْ ػر ِل و رْحـِي و جز ِ و راعـِي و رز ْ ـِي و ْ د ِ‬ ‫ِْ ِ َ ْ َْ َ ْ ُْ َ ْ َْ َ ْ ُ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ر يِّن‬ ‫َ‬ ‫و َ واِـِي و ْ ف َ ـيِّني .‬ ‫َ ُ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫:‪Duʿā during sajdah‬‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ُ ْحون رِّب َٕ ْ ذ وبِحؿده (‪)3 times‬‬ ‫َ َ َ يِّن ْ َ َ َ ْ‬ ‫ؾفم َ ك َ جدْ ا وبِك آ َ ـًْ و َ ك َ ْ ؾؿً ، َ جدَ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫َّل ُ َّل‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ َّل ِ‬ ‫وجفي ِؾذي خؾؼه و َ وره و َ ق َ ؿعه و َبَصه بِحو ِه‬ ‫َ َ َ ُ َ َّل َ ُ َ َّل ْ َ ُ َ َ َ ُ َ ْ‬ ‫َ ْ‬ ‫ْ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫و ُ وتِه ، َت َورك له َحسن ْلَو ِؼ َ .‬ ‫َ َ َّل ـ ُ ْ َ ُ‬ ‫َ َّل‬ ‫231‬ .

‬ ‫ُ َّل َ‬ ‫:‪Al-Salat al-Ibrahimiyyah‬‬ ‫ِ ُ ٍ َ ِ ِ ُ ٍ‬ ‫يِّن‬ ‫َّل َ‬ ‫َّل ُ َّل يِّن َ يِّن‬ ‫ؾفم َ ل َ ذ َ قدكَو ُمَؿد و َ ذ آل َ قدكَو ُمَؿد ، َ َ‬ ‫َّل‬ ‫َ ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َ ؾقً َ ذ َ قدكَو ْبر ِ قم و َ ذ آل َ قدكَو ْبر ِ قم ،‬ ‫يِّن‬ ‫َ َ َ‬ ‫َ يِّن‬ ‫َّل ْ‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫ِ ُ ٍ َ ِ ِ ُ ٍ‬ ‫و َبورك َ ذ َ قدكَو ُمَؿد و َ ذ آل َ قدكَو ُمَؿد ، َ َ َبور ًْ‬ ‫يِّن‬ ‫َّل َ‬ ‫َ ِ ْ َ يِّن‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َّل‬ ‫331‬ .‫‪Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar‬‬ ‫:‪Al-Tashahhud‬‬ ‫َ ُ َّل ُ َّل ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َّلحقوا د َور َوا صؾو ا طق َوا ِؾـه ، س َ م‬ ‫يِّن‬ ‫َّل ُ ُْ َ ُ َّل َ‬ ‫َّل ُ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َّل ُ َ ْ َ َ‬ ‫َ ؾقك َُّيو ـَّل ِي ورْحي ؾـه و َبر َو ُته ، س َ م َ ؾقـَو و َ ذ‬ ‫ُّ َ َ ْ َ ُ َّل َ َ ُ‬ ‫َ ْ َ ُّ َ‬ ‫ِ َّل ِ‬ ‫َ ْ َ َ َّل َّل ُ َ َ َّل‬ ‫ِ َود ؾـه صو ِ َ ، َ ْ فدُ َن ٓ َ ه ٓ ؾـه و َ ْ فدُ َن‬ ‫َّل‬ ‫ُ َّل ِ‬ ‫ُمَؿدً ر ُ ول ؾـه.

‬ ‫َ‬ ‫:‪Duʿā after tashahhud before salām‬‬ ‫َّل ُ َّل ِ ْ ِ‬ ‫ؾفم ْ ػر ِل َ و َ دَّل ْ ً و َ و َخرا ، و َ و َْسرا و َ و‬ ‫ُ َ َّل ْ ُ‬ ‫َْ ْ َ‬ ‫َ َ ِ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ ْ ؾـًْ ، و َ و َْساً و َ و َكًْ َ ْ ؾم بِه ِ ـيِّني ، َكًْ دؼديِّن م‬ ‫َ َْ ْ َ‬ ‫َ ُْ َ ُ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫و َكًْ دمخر ٓ َ ه ٓ َكًْ .‫‪Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar‬‬ ‫َ ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫َ ذ َ قدكَو ْبر ِ قم و َ ذ آل َ قدكَو ْبر ِ قم ، ِِف ْ عودِ َ‬ ‫يِّن‬ ‫َ َ َ‬ ‫َ يِّن‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫كَّلك ْحِقدٌ َ ِ قدٌ .‬ ‫َ َ ُْ َ يِّن ُ َ َ َّل َ‬ ‫َّل‬ ‫ُْ‬ ‫ً َ َ ْ ِ ُ ُّ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ؾفم يِّن ظؾؿً َكػ ِ ظؾ ً َثِر وٓ َ غػر ذكُو َ ٓ‬ ‫ََْ‬ ‫َّل ُ َّل‬ ‫َكًْ او ْ ػر ِل َ غػرة ِ ن ِ ـْدك و رْحـِي كَّلك َكًْ ْ غػور‬ ‫َ َ ِْ ِ َِْ ً ْ ِ َ ْ َْ‬ ‫َ َ َُ ُ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫رحقم .‬ ‫َّل ُ‬ ‫431‬ .

‬ ‫َّل َ‬ ‫َ ْ َ َّل َ‬ ‫531‬ .‫‪Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar‬‬ ‫:‪Duʿā Qunūt‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ؾفم ْ د ِ اِقؿن َ دَ ْ ً و َ واِـِي اِقؿن َ واقً وتَو َّل ـِي‬ ‫َ ْ َْ َ َ َ‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫َ ْ‬ ‫َّل ُ َّل‬ ‫َ ْ َ ْ َ َ ِ ْ ِ‬ ‫اِقؿن تَو َّل قً و َبورك ِل اِق َ َ ْ طقً و ِـِي َ َّل َ و َ ضقً‬ ‫َ ْ َ‬ ‫َْ َ َ‬ ‫َ ْ َ َ ُ َ ِ ُّ ْ َ ْ َ َ َ‬ ‫ِ َك ْ‬ ‫فَّلك َتؼ ِ وٓ ُ ؼه َ ؾقك و ِ َّلكه ٓ َ ذل َ ن و َ قً وٓ‬ ‫ََ ْ َ‬ ‫ِ ُّ ْ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ ْ َ َ َ َ‬ ‫ْ َ‬ ‫َ عز َ ن َ ود ْ ً َت َور ًْ ر َّلبـَو و َتعو َ قً اؾك ْ َؿدُ َ ذ َ و‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ْ َ َ َّل َّل ُ َ‬ ‫َ ضقً َ ْ َغػرك و َتُو ُ َ قك و َ ذ لـه َ ذ َ قدكَو‬ ‫َ ْ َ‬ ‫يِّن‬ ‫ْ ُ َ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ُ ٍ َ ِ‬ ‫ُمَؿد و َ ذ آ ِه و َ ح ِه و َ ؾم .

Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar Duʿā and Dhikr after ṣalāh: It is especially recommended to recite dhikr and duʿā after ṣalāh silently: Istighfār – recite three times. ِ . ّ‫َ ـَعً، وٓ َ ـْػع ذ ْلديِّن ِ ـْك ْلد‬ َ َ ْ َْ َ َْ َ ُ َ 136 . ‫َ ْ َغػر ؾـه ْ عظِقم‬ َ َ َ ‫ْ ُ َّل‬ Dhikr to be recited one times ِ ْ َ َ ‫ؾفم َكًْ س م و ِ ـْك س م َت َور ًْ َ و ذ ْل ل‬ َ ُ ‫َّل ُ َّل َ َّل‬ َ َ ُ ‫َّل‬ ِ ِ َ َ ‫َ ِ َ ِ َّل ُ َّل‬ ‫و ا ْر م ، َ ؾفم ٓ َ وكِع لـ َ و َ ْ طقً ، وٓ ُ عطِي ل ـ َ و‬ َ َ َ َ ْ .

‫‪Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar‬‬ ‫‪Ayat al-kursi‬‬ ‫َّللَّلُ َٓ ِ َ ه َِّٓل ُ و ْ َي ْ ؼقوم َٓ تَلخذه ِ ـَي وَٓ كَوم َ ه َ و‬ ‫َ ُّ َ ُّ ُ ْ ُ ُ ُ ٌ َ ْ ٌ ُ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِِف س َ و ا و َ و ِِف َْٕرض َ ن ذ َّل ذي َ شػع ِ ـْدَ ه َِّٓل‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫ْ َ ُ‬ ‫ْ ِ ْ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َّل َ‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫بِنِذكِه َ عؾم َ و َب ْ َ َ ْ دُّيِم و َ و خؾػفم وَٓ ُ ِقطون بَِشا‬ ‫ْ َ َ َُْ ْ َ‬ ‫ْ َُْ‬ ‫ُ َ َ ْ‬ ‫ِِْ‬ ‫ِ ن ِ ؾؿه َِّٓل بِ َ َ وا و ِ ع ُر ِ قه س َ و ا و َٕرض‬ ‫َ َ َ ْ ُّ ُ َّل َ ِ َ ْ َ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ْ عظقم ‪‬‬ ‫َ ُ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫وَٓ َ ئوده حػظف َ و ُ و ْ ع ِِل‬ ‫َ ُ ُ ُ ْ ُ ُ َ َ َ ُّ‬ ‫‪Sūrah al-Ikhlās‬‬ ‫بسم َّلل رْحن رحقم‬ ‫ََ‬ ‫َ ِ ََ‬ ‫ْ َ َ َ‬ ‫َّل َ‬ ‫ُ ل ُ و َّللَّلُ حدٌ ‪َّ ‬للَّلُ صؿدُ ‪َ ‬ل ْ َ ؾدْ وَل ْ ُ و َ دْ ‪ ‬وَل ْ‬ ‫َ ؽُن َ ه ُ ػو َحدٌ ‪‬‬ ‫ْ ُ ًُ َ‬ ‫731‬ .

‫‪Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar‬‬ ‫‪Sūrah al-Falaq‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َ ْ‬ ‫‪ ‬و ن َ يِّن‬ ‫بسم َّلل رْحن رحقم‬ ‫ََِ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ُ ل َ ُ وذ بِر يِّن ْ ػؾق ‪ ِ ‬ن َ يِّن َ و خؾق‬ ‫َ ََ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ُ َ‬ ‫َِ‬ ‫َّل ِ‬ ‫َ و ِ ق ِذ و َ ى ‪ ‬و ِ ن َ يِّن ـَّلػو َثوا ِِف ْ عؼد ‪ ‬و ِ ن‬ ‫َ ْ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫َ ْ‬ ‫ٍ َ َ َ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪Sūrah al-Nas‬‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫َ يِّن حو ِ د ِذ حسدَ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ َ َ‬ ‫بسم َّلل رْحن رحقم‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫ُ ل َ ُ وذ ب َِر يِّن ـَّلوس ‪ َ ‬ؾِك ـَّلوس ‪ َ ِ ‬ه ـَّلوس ‪ ِ ‬ن‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َ َ ِ ْ ِ‬ ‫َ يِّن ْ و ْ و س ْلَـَّلوس ‪َّ ‬ل ذي ُ و ْ وس ِِف ُ دُ ور‬ ‫َ ِ ُ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ـَّلوس ‪ ‬ن ْلـَّلي و ـَّلوس ‪‬‬ ‫َ ِْ َ‬ ‫831‬ .

‫، و ُ و َ ذ ُل َشا َ د ر‬ َ َ ٌ ْ 139 . ‫ُ ْحون ؾـه‬ َ ِ ‫َّل‬ .Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar Dhikr each to be recited 33 times: ِ ‫َ َّل‬ . ‫َ ْ َؿدُ ِؾـه‬ ْ . ‫َ ؾـه َ ْز‬ ُ َ ُ ‫َّل‬ Dhikr to be recited one time: َ ُ ْ َ ُ ‫َّل‬ َ ُ‫ٓ ِ ٰ ه َّٓل ؾـه وحدَ ه ٓ َ ِ ك َ ه ، َ ه ْ ـؿؾك و َ ه ْ َؿد‬ ْ ُ َ ُ ُْ ُ ُ َ ِ ٍ َ ‫َ يِّن‬ .

‫‪Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar‬‬ ‫:‪Prophetic Duʿā‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َ ؾفم آتِـَو ِِف دُّ ْكقو حسـَي و ِِف ٔخرة حسـَي و ِـَو‬ ‫َ َ َ ً َ ْ َ َ َ ً َ‬ ‫َّل ُ َّل‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫َ َ ْ‬ ‫ـَّلور ، ؾفم ِ يِّن َ ْ ل ُ ك هلُدَ ى و ُّؼى‬ ‫َّل ُ َّل‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َذ َ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫و ْ عػوف و ْ غـَى، َ ؾفم ْ ػر ِل و ر َ ـ ْ ـِي و ْ د ِ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ ََ َ َ‬ ‫َّل ُ َّل ْ ِ َ ْ‬ ‫َ يِّن ف‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫و َ واِـِي و رز ْ ـِي ، َ ؾفم ُ َصف ْ ؼؾو ِ‬ ‫َّل ُ َّل َ يِّن َ ُ ُ‬ ‫َ ُْ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُ ؾو َبـَو َ ذ َ و َ ِك ، ؾفم َ ُ وذ بِك ِ ن جفد ْ َ َ ا‬ ‫ْ َ ْ‬ ‫َّل ُ َّل‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ ْ‬ ‫ودرك شؼوا و ُ وا ْ ؼضوا و َ َ تَي َٕ ْ دَ ا ، َ ؾفم‬ ‫َ َ َ‬ ‫َّل َ َ‬ ‫َّل ُ َّل‬ ‫َ ََ‬ ‫َ َ ْ ِ َ َ ِ َ ُْ ِ َ ْ ِ‬ ‫ُ َ‬ ‫ِ يِّن َ ُ وذ بِك ِ ن ْ عجز و ْ ؽَسل و ْل ْن و هل ََرم‬ ‫041‬ .

‬ ‫ِ َ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫َ َْ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َ َّل‬ ‫َ ْ ِ َ َ َ‬ ‫َ ؾفم ْ ػر ِل جديِّن ى و َ زِل وخطلِى و َ ؿدي و ُل‬ ‫َّل ُ َّل ْ ِ َ‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫َ َ ِ‬ ‫َّل ُ َّل ِ ْ ِ‬ ‫ذ ِك ِ ـْدي ؾفم ْ ػر ِل َ و َ دَّل ْ ً و َ و َخرا ، و َ و‬ ‫ُ َ َّل ْ ُ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫141‬ .‬ ‫ِ ْـ َ‬ ‫يِّن‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ُْ‬ ‫ََْ ُ ْ‬ ‫َ ؾفم يِّن ظؾؿً َكػ ِ ظؾ ً َثِر َ ِر و ِ َّلكه ٓ َ غػر‬ ‫ً َ ُ َ ْ ُ‬ ‫َّل ُ َّل‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ُّ‬ ‫ذكُو َ ٓ َكًْ او ْ ػر ِل َ غػرة ِ ن ِ ـْدك و رْحـِي‬ ‫َّل َ َ ِ ْ ِ ْ ِ َ ً ْ ِ َ ْ َ ْ‬ ‫كَّلك َكًْ ْ غػور رحقم َ ؾفم ْ ػر ِل خطِقئ ِي‬ ‫َ َ َ ُ ُ َّل ِ ُ َّل ُ َّل ِ ْ ِ َ َ‬ ‫َ َ ِ‬ ‫و ِْس ِِف ِِف َ ْ رى و َ و َكًْ َ ْ ؾم بِه ِ ـيِّنى .‫‪Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar‬‬ ‫ْ َ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫ُ َ‬ ‫و ْ ُخل و َ ُ وذ بِك ِ ن َ ذ ِ ْ ؼز و َ ُ وذ بِك ِ ن‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫َ ِْ َ‬ ‫َ ْ ِ َ‬ ‫ِ َ َ ِ َ ِ‬ ‫َ ْـ ِ َ ْ ِ‬ ‫اِ ْـَي لُم َْقو و ل َ َوا وخؾع ديِّن ْ ن و َ ؾ َي رجول .

‬ ‫ْـ َ يِّن ُ َ‬ ‫ٌ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫ؾفم ِ يِّن َ ُ وذ بِك ِ ن َ يِّن َ و َ ؿؾً ، و ِ ن َ يِّن َ و َل‬ ‫ْ ُ َ ْ‬ ‫ُ َ ْ‬ ‫َّل ُ َّل‬ ‫َ ُّ ِ‬ ‫ُ َ ْ َ َ ِ‬ ‫َ ْ ؿل ؾفم ِ يِّن َ ُ وذ بِك ِ ن زو ل كِعؿ ِك و َ َ ول‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫َ َّل ُ َّل‬ ‫َ َ َ َِْ ْ َ َ َ ِ َ َ‬ ‫َ وا َِق ِك واجلة كِؼؿ ِك و َ ِقع َ خطِك .‬ ‫َّل ُ َّل ِ ْ‬ ‫ؾفم آا َكػ ِ َتؼو َ و ، وز يِّنفو َكًْ خر َ ن ز َّلو َ و ،‬ ‫َ َ َ َ َ ُْ ْ َ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫ُ َ ْ ْ ٍ َ‬ ‫َ َ َ َ َْ‬ ‫َكًْ و ُِّقفو و َ وٓ َ و ، ؾفم ِ يِّن َ ُ وذ بِك ِ ن ِ ؾم ٓ‬ ‫َّل ُ َّل‬ ‫َ ـْػع ، و ِ ن َ ؾى ٓ َ ْشع ، و ِ ن َكػس ٓ تَش َع و ِ ن‬ ‫َ ْ َ ْ ْ ٍ َ َ ْ َ ْ ْ ٍ َ ْ ْ َ ْ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫241‬ .‫‪Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar‬‬ ‫َ َ ِ‬ ‫َْسرا و َ و َكًْ َ ْ ؾم بِه ِ ـيِّني ، َكًْ لـ ُ ؼديِّن م و َكًْ‬ ‫َ ْ َ ُ َ َ‬ ‫َْ ْ َ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫َ َ يِّن َ ٍ ِ‬ ‫ل ُ مخر و َكًْ َ ذ ُل َشا َ د ر .

‫‪Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar‬‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫َ َ ْ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫د ْ وة ٓ ُ س َجو ُ هلَو ، ؾفم ِ يِّن َ ْ ل ُ ك هلُدَ ى‬ ‫َ َ َ ْ َ‬ ‫َّل ُ َّل‬ ‫و سدَ د.‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫َ ؾفم ِ يِّن َ ُ وذ بِك ِ ن َ يِّن ْ غـَى و ْ ػؼر ؾفم ِ يِّن‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫َ َ ْ ِ َّل ُ َّل‬ ‫َّل ُ َّل‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ْ ِ َ ْ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫َ ُ وذ بِك ِ ن ُ ـْؽِر ا َْٕخ َ ق و َٕ ْ َ ل و َٕ ْ و ا‬ ‫ِ َ ْ َ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫341‬ .‬ ‫َ َّل َ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َ ؾفم َ ْ ؾ ْ ِل د ـي َّل ذى ُ و صؿي َ ْ رى و َ ْ ؾ ْ‬ ‫َ ْ َُ ِ َ‬ ‫َّل ُ َّل‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ َِ‬ ‫ِل د ْكقوى َّل ِي اِقفو َ عوَش و َ ْ ؾِ ْ آخرِت َّل ِي اِقفو‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫ِ ُ َ َ‬ ‫َ عودي و جعل ْ َقوة ز َ ودة ِ ِِف ُل خر و دوا‬ ‫َ ِ َ ْ َ ِ َ َ ِ ًَ‬ ‫يِّن َ ْ ٍ َ َْ ْ َ‬ ‫َ َ ً ِ ْ يِّن‬ ‫ر حي ِل ِ ن ُل َ .

‬ ‫َ َ ْ‬ ‫ْ َ َ ْ َ ف َ‬ ‫َّل‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ؾفم ْػـِي بِح َ ِك َ ن حر ِ ك و ْ ـَـِي بِػضؾِك‬ ‫َ ْ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ْ ََ‬ ‫َّل ُ َّل‬ ‫ْ ْ‬ ‫َ َ ُُ‬ ‫َ ِ َ‬ ‫َ ؿن ِ و ك َ و ُ ث يِّنً ْ ؼؾو َ َث يِّنً َ ؾ ِى َ ذ د ـِك‬ ‫َّل ْ َ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫َ َ َ َ‬ ‫َ ؾفم يِّن َ ْ ل ُ ك ْ عوا َِقي ِِف دُّ ْكقو ، و ٔخرة َ ؾفم يِّن‬ ‫َ َ ْ َ َّل ُ َّل‬ ‫َّل ُ َّل‬ ‫ِ ِ َ ْ َ َ َ َ ِ َ ْ ِ َ َ َ َّل َ‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫َ ْ ل ُ ك ُ وج َوا رْح ِك و َ ز ئم َ غػرتِك و س َ َ ي‬ ‫ْ يِّن ٍ َ َ َ َ ْ يِّن‬ ‫ِ ن ُل ِ ْثم و ْ غـِقؿي ِ ن ُل بِر و ْ ػوز بِوْلـَّلي و ـَّلجوة‬ ‫َ َ ْ َ َْ ِ َ َ َ‬ ‫َ ِ‬ ‫ِ ن ـَّلور .‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫441‬ .‫‪Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ْ ِ َ َ ِ‬ ‫َ ْ‬ ‫َ ِ َ ْ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫و ِ َْٕ ْ ؼوم و ن َ يِّن َ ؿعي و َبَصى و ن َ يِّن‬ ‫َ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ِسو ِ و ِ ن َ يِّن َ ؾ ِى و ِ ن ْلقوكَي ِ ََّنَو ب ِْئسً ْ ِطوكَي.

‬ ‫َ‬ ‫:‪Duʿā Janāzah Ṣalāh – to be recited in third takbīr‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ؾفم ْ ػر َ ه و رْحه و َ واِه و ْ ف َ ـْه .‫‪Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar‬‬ ‫َّل ُ َّل ِ ْ ِ ِ ُ َّل ٍ ْ ِ َ ً ً‬ ‫ؾفم ْ ػر ُٕ َّل ي ُمَؿد َ غػرة َ و َّل ي ، ُ ْحون ر يِّنبك ر يِّن‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ َ َ‬ ‫ـِ‬ ‫ِ َّل ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ْ عزة َ َّل َ صػون و َ َ م َ ذ ل ُ ر َ ؾِ َ و ْ َؿدُ َّلِله‬ ‫ُ َ َ‬ ‫َ ْ‬ ‫ٌ َ ْـ ْ‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫ر يِّن ْ عودِ َ .‬ ‫َ ُ ُ‬ ‫َّل ُ َّل ْ ُ َ ْ َ ْ ُ َ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫و َ ْرم كُز َ ه وو يِّن ع َ دْ خؾه و ْ سؾه بِ ـْ َ وا و ثؾٍِ و ْ زد،‬ ‫َ ِ ْ ُ ُ َ َ ْ َ َُ َ‬ ‫ْ ُ ول َ َّل ْ َ َ َ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َ يِّن ِ ْ ْ َ‬ ‫و َكؼه ِ ن ْلَطو َ و َ َ ُ ـَؼى ثو ُ َٕ ْبقض ِ ن دَّل كَس ،‬ ‫َّل َّل ْ ْ َ ُ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫و َ ْبد ْ ه د ر خر ِ ن د ره ، و َ ْ ً خر ِ ن َ ْ ؾِه وزوجو‬ ‫ََ ْ ً‬ ‫َ ًْ ْ‬ ‫ُ َ ً َ ًْ ْ َ ِ َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ ِْ‬ ‫َ ْ ً ْ َ ْ ِ ِ َ ْ ِ ْ ُ َْ َ َ ْ ُ ْ َ‬ ‫خر ِ ن زوجه ، و َدخؾه ْلـَّلي و َ ِ ذه ِ ن َ ذ ِ ْ ؼز‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫َ ِ َ ْ َ‬ ‫واِ ْـَ ِه و ِ ن َ ذ ِ ـَّلور .‬ ‫541‬ .

‬ ‫َّل ُ َ َّل ُ َ ُ َّل ُ َ ُ َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫641‬ .‫‪Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar‬‬ ‫:‪Takbīr to be recited on ʿEid‬‬ ‫له َ ْز ؾـه َ ْز ؾـه َ ْز ، َٓ َ ه ٓ ؾـه و ؾـه‬ ‫َ َّل َّل ُ َ َّل ُ‬ ‫َّل ـ ُ َ ُ َّل ُ َ ُ َّل ُ َ ُ‬ ‫َّل ِ‬ ‫َ ْز ، ؾـه َ ْز و ِؾـه ْ َؿدُ .‬ ‫َ ُ َّل ُ َ ُ َ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ؾـه َ ْز َ ِر و ْ َؿدُ ؾـه َثِر و ُ ْحون لـه ُبؽْرة‬ ‫َّل ُ َ ُ ً َ ْ َّل ِ ً َ َ َ َّل ِ َ ً‬ ‫ُ ِ‬ ‫و َ ِ ق ً ، َٓ َ ه َّٓل ؾـه وَٓ َكع ُدُ َّٓل َّل وه ُمْؾِص َ َ ه‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫َّل ُ َ ْ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُ َ‬ ‫ديِّن ن و َ و َره ْ ؽَواِرون ، َٓ َ ه َّٓل ؾـه وحدَ ه َ دَ ق‬ ‫َّل ُ َ ْ ُ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ َ ْ َِ‬ ‫و ْ دَ ه وكََص َ ْدَ ه و َ َ ز جـْدَ ه و َ زم َٕحز َ وحدَ ه َٓ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫َ ْ ُ‬ ‫ُ َ َّل ُ ُ َ َ َ‬ ‫َ ُ َ َ َ‬ ‫َّل ِ‬ ‫َ ه َّٓل ؾـه و َ ؾـه َ ْز ، َ ؾـه َ ْز و ِؾـه ْ َؿدُ .

ًْ‫ٓ َ غػر ذكُو َ َّٓل َك‬ َ ْ ُّ ُ ْ It is sunnah to end the duʿā with ṣalāh (Salutation) and Hamd (Praise): َ َ ٍ ‫َ َّل َّل ُ َ يِّن ِ ُ َّل‬ ‫و َ ذ ؾـه َ ذ َ قدكَو ُمَؿد و َ ذ آ ِه و َ ؾم‬ َ ‫َّل‬ ِ َ َ َ ْ ِ‫و ْ َؿدُ ِؾـه ر يِّن ْ عود‬ َ ‫َ ْ َّل‬ 147 .Appendix 1:Selected Du’as and Adhkar Sayyid al-istighfār – The Paragon Of Istighfār : Recite Morning and Evening َ َْ َ َ ‫ؾفم كًْ رِّب ٓ َ ه َّٓل كًْ خؾؼ َـِي ، و كو َ ْدُ ك و كو‬ َ ‫َّل ُ َّل َ َ يِّن‬ َ ِ َ َ َ ِْ َ ‫َ ذ َ فدك وو ْ دك و ْ َطعً ، ُ وذ بِك ِ ن َ يِّن و‬ ُ َْ ْ َ ُ ِ َ ُ َ ‫ُ َ ْ َ َ َ َّل‬ ‫َ ـَعً َ ُبوا َ ك بِـِعؿ ِك َ ذ و َ ُبوا بِذ ْك ِي ، او ْ ػر ِل ان َّلكه‬ ُ ْ ُ َ ِ ْ ِ .

al-Wasīt the second and finally al-Wajīz. Rauḍat al-ṭālibīn wa ʿumdat al-muftiyyīn. Al-Imām al-Nawawī (676 H) abridged Fath al-ʿAziz in his book.Appendix 2:Authorized Books in Shafi’i Madhhab Appendix 2: Authorized Books in Shāfiʿī Madhhab The main aspect in the foundation of the madhhab is the verdict of the al-Imām. The first abridgement is al-Basīt. This book of Imām al-ḥarāmain has been abridged three times by his student. This was later 148 . al-Mukhtaṣar by al-Imām al-Buwaiṭī (231 H) and alMukhtaṣar by al-Imām al-Muzānī (264 H) in one book entitled Nihāyat al-Maṭlab. Al-Imām al-Rāfiʿī (623 H) summarized al-Wajīz and entitled it al-Muḥarrar. Hujjat al-Islām al-Imām al-Ghazālī (505 H). Imām al-ḥarāmain ʿAbd al-Malik ibn ʿAbdullah al-Juwaynī (478 H) has gathered all four main fiqh books of al-qawl al-jadīd (new verdict) of al-Imām al-Shāfiʿī (204 H) namely al-Umm. The ʿUlamāʾ and the books constitute the basis and source of strength of the madhhab. Al-Imām al-Rāfiʿī also had writen a commentary of al-Wajiz in two books namely Sharh al-kabir or Fath al-ʿAziz fi sharh al-Wajīz and Sharh al-ṣaghīr. alImlaʾ. The ʿUlamāʾ explain and elaborate the original verdict of the Imām and disseminate them while the books preserve and ensure that the authentic views of the madhhab are transmitted to a later generation.

Beside arRauḍ. It was thereafter abridged by Shaykh alIslām Zakariyyā al-Anṣārī in his book Manhaj al-ṭullab and he authored a commentary on it namely Fath al-Wahhāb bi sharḥ Manhaj al-ṭullab.Appendix 2:Authorized Books in Shafi’i Madhhab abridged by Ibn al-Muqrī (837 H) in Rauḍ al-ṭalib and Shaykh al-Islām Zakariyyā al-Anṣārī (925 H) compiled a commentary on it. If these two Imāms have a difference opinion. Rauḍah al-ṭālibīn also has been abridged by al-Imām Aḥmad ibn ʿUmar al-Muzajjad (930 H) in the book entitled. Al-Imām al-Jauharī abridged al-Manhaj and named it al-Nahj. Al-Sharaf al-Muqrī ṣāḥib alRauḍ abridged it second time in a book entitled al-Irshād. (2) 149 . Tarjīḥ (preference) in the madhhab rests upon the verdicts of al-Shaykhayn. A commentary on it was prepared by al-Imām Ibn Ḥajar al-Makkī named Fath al-jawād sharh al-Irshād. Al-Imām al-Nawawī had abridged al-Muharrar and entitled it Minhāj al-ṭālibīn. naming it Asna al-maṭālib sharh Rauḍ al-ṭālib. This is the unanimous view of muhaqqiqs (researchers) of the madhhab. If the writings of al-Imām al-Nawawī differ. al-Imām al-Rāfiʿī and al-Imām al-Nawawī. the verdict of al-Imām al-Nawawī will be given preference over the verdict of al-Imām al-Rafiʿī. generally the the order of what will be given preference to is (1) al-Tahqīq. alʿUbab and al-Imām Ibn Ḥajar al-Makkī prepared a commentary named al-Īʿāb sharh al-ʿUbāb.

The four main commentaries of al-Minhaj are (1) Tuḥfat al-muhtāj by al-Imām Aḥmad ibn ʿAlī ibn Ḥajar al-Haytamī al-Makkī (974 H). (3) Mughnī al-muhtāj ilā maʿrifat al-maʿāni alfāẓ sharh al-Minhāj by al-Imām Shams al-Dīn Muḥammad ibn Aḥmad al-Khāṭib al-Shirbīnī (977 H) and (4) Kanz al-rāghibīn sharh Minhāj al-ṭālibīn by al-Imām Jalāl alDīn Muḥammad ibn Aḥmad al-Maḥallī (864 H). preference is given to al-Tuḥfah of al-Imām Ibn Ḥajar al- 150 . (5) al-Minhāj and his fatāwā (legal verdicts). (3) al-Tanqīḥ. this book is the most excellent book for students and many scholars to understand the madhhab.Appendix 2:Authorized Books in Shafi’i Madhhab al-Majmūʿ.” There are almost one hundred commentaries of the alMinhāj. The view on which of his books are unanimous will be given preference over the view on which only a few of his books are unanimous. (4) al-Rauḍah. Al-Imām al-Subkī (765 H) mentioned regarding al-Minhaj of al-Imām al-Nawawī. (2) Nihāyat al-muhtāj ilā sharh al-Minhāj by al-Imām Shams al-Dīn Muḥammad ibn Aḥmad ibn Hamzah al-Ramlī (1004 H). It has been abridged. “In this era. and finally (8) Taṣḥīḥ al-Tanbīh and its nukāt (marginal note). The view discused under its relevant chapter is given preference over that which is discussed in another chapter. explained. However. (7) Sharh Muslim. The above mentioned books hold an authoritative position in the madhhab. annotated and compiled in the form of poetry. if there is difference opinion.

preference is given to Sharh al-ṣaghīr ʿalā al-Bahjah and then. then Shaykh ʿUmairah (957 H) marginal note on al-Maḥallī. Finally. giving preference to the commentary is better. the fatāwā (legal opinions) and sharh al-ʿUbāb have the same merit. Despite this. al-Imdād. deriving rulings from the book alone without studying under the ʿUlamāʾ is not permissible. al-ʿAnānī. Fath al-Wahhāb bi sharh Manhaj al-ṭullāb both by Shaykh al-Islām Zakariyyā al-Anṣārī. however. The order of merit among the ḥawāshī (marginal notes) is ḥāshiyah ʿalā Sharh al-Manhaj by al-Imām ʿAlī al-Ziyādī (1024 H) then Ibn Qasim al-ʿAbbādī (994 H) on al-Tuḥfah. the order of merit is al-Tuḥfah.Appendix 2:Authorized Books in Shafi’i Madhhab Haytamī and al-Nihayah of al-Imām Shams al-Dīn al-Ramlī. al-Shaubarī. Fatḥ al-Jawād. 151 . Ḥāshiyah al-Halabī. Thereafter. Thereafter. then the verdict of Shaykh ʿAlī al-Shabramillisī (1087 H) on al-Nihāyah. preference is given to Sharh al-Imām al-Khāṭib al-Shirbīnī and Sharh al-Imām alMaḥallī. Their opinions are taken if they do not differ with the original standpoint. Among the books of al-Imām Ibn Ḥajar. Rasūlullah  said: Knowledge is acquired through learning from the scholar.

Appendix 3: 'Alam Appendix 3: ʿAlam – Biographical Notes Al-Imām al-Shāfiʿī Al-Imām al-Shāfiʿī is Muḥammad ibn Idrīs ibn al-ʿAbbās ibn ʿUthmān ibn Shafiʿ ibn al-Sāʾib ibn ʿAbdullah ibn ʿAbd Yazid ibn Hāshim ibn al-Muttalib ibn ʿAbd Manaf. 152 . Palestine in 150 H. Abu ʿAbdillah alQurashī al-Makkī al-Shāfiʿī . where he grew up. the year of alImām Abū Hanīfah‟s death. At age thirteen he went to see alImām Mālik. beginning with hadīth. the offspring of the House of the Prophet. and moved to Makkah at the age of two. following his father‟s death. then he took to learn language and poetry until he gave himself to fiqh. He was born in Ghazza. He was early a skillful archer. at which time his teacher would deputize him to teach in his absence. the scrupulously pious ascetic and Friend of Allah. then al-Imām Mālik‟s Muwaṭṭaʾ at age ten. al-Imām Mālik ibn Anas and al-Imām Muḥammad ibn alHasan al-Shaybānī were among his most prominent teachers and he took position against both of them in fiqh. the peerless one of the great mujtahid imāms and jurisprudent par excellence. He memorized the Qurʾān at age seven. who was impressed by his memory and intelligence.

” al-Imām Ibn Rahuyah described him in Makkah as wearing bright white clothes with an intensely black beard. it was as if he had witnessed the revelation.” Similarly. and twice a day in the month of Ramaḍan. I fear you will never be able to find it elsewhere. If he grasped his beard it would not exceed his fist.Appendix 3: 'Alam Like al-Imām Abu Hanīfah and al-Imām al-Bukhārī. alImām al-Za`farani said that when he was in Baghdad in the year 195 he dyed his beard with henna. and I do not recall a single time I looked at it without learning some new benefit. Abu `Ubayd al-Qasim ibn Sallam said: “If the intelligence of an entire nation was brought together he would have encompassed it.” Aḥmad ibn 153 .” Yūnus ibn Abī Yaʿlā said: “Whenever al-Shāfiʿī went into tafsīr. al-Imām al-Muzānī said: “I never saw one more handsome of face than al-Shāfiʿī . Imām Aḥmad replied: “Keep quiet! If you miss a hadīth with a shorter chain you can find it elsewhere with a longer chain and it will not harm you.” Someone criticized al-Imām Aḥmad ibn Hanbal for attending the fiqh sessions of al-Shāfiʿī and leaving the hadīth sessions of al-Imām Sufyan ibn ʿUyaynah. al-Muzani said: “I have been looking into al-Shāfiʿī‟s Riṣalāh for fifty years. he recited the entire Qurʾān each day at prayer. But if you do not have the reasoning of this man [al-Shāfiʿī].

These two schools are known in the terminology of jurists as “al-Qadīm” (The Old) and “al-Jadīd” (The New). The most prominent transmitters of the Qawl al-Qadīm are alImām Aḥmad ibn Ḥanbal. al-Rāfiʿī or al- 154 . and Abū Thawr.Appendix 3: 'Alam Ḥanbal also said: “Not one of the scholars of hadīth touched an inkwell nor a pen except he owed a huge debt to al-Shāfiʿī . “Allah granted his wish. although both were established hadīth masters. for one seldom hears any position of his. Al-Imām Al-Shāfiʿī is the author of some 113 works. in Kitab al-Umm (The Motherbook). Al-Subkī related that the Shāfiʿī scholars considered alRabīʿs narration from al-Shāfiʿī sounder from the viewpoint of transmission.” and as Shaykh al-Islām Zakariyyā al-Anṣārī remarked. al-Rabīʿ al-Murādī. al-Zaʿfarānī. it was nonetheless al-Shāfiʿī‟s hope that “people would learn this knowledge without ascribing a single letter of it to me. The most prominent transmitters of the Qawl al-Jadīd among al-Shāfiʿī‟s students are al-Buwayṭī. and al-Bulqīnī. al-Muzānī.” Two schools of legal thought or madhāhīb are actually attributed to al-Imām al-Shāfiʿī. save that it is ascribed to others of his school with the words. al-Karābīsī. englobing his writings and legal opinions (fatāwā). while they considered al-Muzānī‟s sounder from the viewpoint of fiqh. corresponding respectively to his stays in Iraq and Egypt.

Imām al-ḥarāmain Imām al-ḥarāmain (The Imām of the Two Sanctuaries) Abū Maʿālī ʿAbd al-Mālik ibn ʿAbdullah ibn Yūsuf al-Juwaynī. He studied and taught Sacred Law in Cairo until his death at fifty-three year of age in 204 H.e. gaining his nickname. having built a first Niẓāmiyyah Academy in Baghdad for Abū Ishaq al-Shīrāzī to teach in. where the vizier Niẓām alMulk. though he was later forced to travel to Baghdad because of trouble between the Ashʿaris. Muʾtazilites. Makkah and Madīnah. after which he moved to Madīnah and taught and gave fatāwā (formal legal opinions). built a second one for Imām al- 155 . i. living in the Sacred Precint for four years. and after his death read his father‟s entire library and then took his place as teacher at Nishapur. originally from Juwain (in present-day Afghanistan). He was educated by his father. the Imām of the Two Sanctuaries.Appendix 3: 'Alam Nawawī or al-Zarkashī says …” and the like. he went on to Makkah. the end of a lifetime of service to Islām and the Muslims by one of the greatest in knowledge of the Qurʾān and Sunnah. After meeting the greatest scholar of Baghdad. born in 419 H. a scholar in tenets of faith and the Imām of the Shāfiʿī school of his time. At length he returned to Persia. and Shiites.

and he authored many works. he studied in Shiraz and Basra before coming to Baghdad where he displayed his genius in Sacred Law. It was here the Imām wrote in earnest. who is said to have surpassed even the Imām at the end of his life.Appendix 3: 'Alam ḥarāmain at Nishapur. and debater. in 393 H. Persia. Ashʿari theology. and Shāfiʿī law. Born in Fayruzābād. the sheikh of the Niẓāmiyyah Academy which the vizier Niẓām al-Mulk built in Baghdad to accommodate al-Imām Abū Ishaq‟s students. becoming the mufti of the Muslim Ummah (Islām ic Community) of his time. as well as other works in tenet of faith. Ibrāhīm ibn ʿAlī ibn Yūsuf al-Shīrāzī al-Fayruzābādī is a Shāfiʿī Imām. He was known for the persuasiveness with which he could urge a case in discussions. He died in Nishapur in 478 H. completing his fifteen-volume “Nihāyat al-maṭlab fi dirāyat almadhhab” which no one in the field of Islāmic law had ever produced the like of. teacher. Among his greates legacies to Islām and the Muslim was his student al-Imām al-Ghazālī. fundamentals of Islām ic legal methodology. among the most famous of them his two-volume al-Muhadhdhab fī fiqh al-Imām al-Shāfiʿī which took him fourteen years to produce. Al-Imām Abū Ishaq al-Shīrāzī Al-Imām Abū Ishaq. 156 .

taking fiqh from its master. among them Imām al-ḥarāmain al-Juwaynī. logic. Al-Imām al-Ghazālī Hujjatul Islām (Proof of Islām ) Abu Hamid Muḥammad ibn Muḥammad al-Ghazālī al-Ṭūsī is the Shāfiʿī Imām and Sufi adept born in Tabiran. to Baghdad. and then travelled the Islāmic world. The Imām of his time. and scholars journeyed to him. Damascus. becoming at his hands a scholar in Shāfiʿī law. 157 . al-Imām al-Ghazālī debated the Imāms and scholars of Baghdad in the presence of the vizier Niẓām al-Mulk. Alexandria. When Imām alḥarāmain died. Iran) in 450 H. which he was later called upon to refute.Appendix 3: 'Alam and which furnished the basic text for al-Imām al-Nawawī‟s alMajmūʿ Sharh al-Muhadhdhab. where word of his brilliance spread. near Ṭūs (just north of present-day Mashhad. nicknamed alShāfiʿī the Second for his legal virtuousity. Makkah and Madīnah. He died in Baghdad in 476 H. he was a brilliant intellectual who first studied jurisprudence at Ṭūs. Cairo. who was so impressed that he appointed him to a teaching post at the Niẓāmiyyah Academy in Baghdad. with whom he studied until the Imām‟s death. tenet of faith. debate and in the rationalistic doctrines of the philosophical school of his time. Jerusalem.

at the end of which he emerged to produce his masterpiece Ihyā ʿulūm al-dīn. Sufism. enganged in spiritual struggle and the remembrance of Allah. travelling first to Jerusalem and then to Damascus to purify his heart by following the way of Sufism. and his masterly treatment of hundreds of questions dealing with the inner life that no one had previously discussed or solved is a performance of sustained excellence that shows its author‟s well-disciplined. tenet of faith. Sacred Law. scholastic theology. He died in Tabiran in 505 H. after considerable reflection. 158 . refutation of philosophers. Qurʾānic exegesis. and in mid-carreer. and bases of Islām ic jurisprudence. In Damascus he lived in seclusion for some ten years. He also wrote nearly two hundred other works. and he resigned from his post. on the theory of government. legal intellect and profound appreciation of human psychology. the work shows how deeply al-Imām al-Ghazālī personally realized what he wrote about.Appendix 3: 'Alam His worldly success was something of a mixed blessing. he was gripped by an intense fear for his soul and his fate in the afterlife.

“Al-Imām al-Rāfiʿī was steeped to repletion in the sciences of Sacred Law. He represents. His main work.” He died in Qazvin in 623 H. towering above his contemporaries in the transmission of evidence. It was as if jurisprudence had been dead. the principle reference of the late Shāfiʿī School. with al-Imām alNawawī. guidance. and taught Qurʾānic exegesis and hadīth in Qazvin. where the hadīth master Imām Mundhīrī was among his students. Known as a purehearted ascetic who followed the mystic path. and in attainment…. a commentary on al-Imām al-Ghazālī al-Wajiz entitled Fath al-ʿAzīz fī sharh al-Wajīz was later to furnish the textual basis for al-Imām al-Nawawī‟s Minhāj al-ṭālibīn.Appendix 3: 'Alam Al-Imām al-Rāfiʿī Abū al-Qāsim ʿAbd al-Karīm ibn Muḥammad al-Rāfiʿī of Qazvin. and fundamentals of Islāmic legal methodology. Qurʾānic exegesis. al-Imām alNawawī observed of him that he “had a firm standing in righteous and many miracles were vouchsafed to him. in research. Persia. raising its foundation after ignorance had killed and buried it.” He authored works in Sacred Law and history. AlImām Taj al-Dīn al-Subkī noted of its author. hadīth. born in 557 H is the imām of his time in Sacred Law and Qurʾānic exegesis. and he revived it and spread it. 159 .

He was the imām of the later Shāfiʿī School. where he assiduously devoted himself to mastering the Islām ic sciences. lexicologist. and drilled himself on the lessons he learned by heart while walking along the street. ʿAbd al-Rahman ibn Qudāmah al-Maqdisī. night and day.. Arabic and other subjects from more than twenty-two scholars of the time. including Abū Ibrāhīm Ishaq al-Maghrībī.Appendix 3: 'Alam Al-Imām al-Nawawī Al-Imām Muhy al-Dīn Abū Zakariyyā Yahyā ibn Sharaf alNawawī. and abstinence. then visited Madīnah. and others. hadīth. al-Tanbīh in four and a half month. became proverbial. fundamentals of jurisprudence. tenets of faith. at a period of his life in which. He took Shāfiʿī Law. then the first quarter of al-Muhadhdhab. and Sufi. and then returned to Damascus. as al-Imām al-Dhahabī notes. piety. after which he accompanied his father on ḥajj. “his dedication to learning. a hadīth master (hāfiẓ). only dozed off in the night at moments when sleep overcame him. the scholar of his time in knowledge. he took some twelve lessons a day.” Spending all his time in either worship or gaining Sacred Knowledge. born in the village of Nawa on the Horan Plain of southern Syria in 631 H. He authored 160 . Fastidious in detail and deep in understanding of the subjects he thus mastered. he memorized the text of al-Imām Abū Ishaq al-Shīrāzī. biographer. When he first came to Damascus in 649 H.

bade his friends farewell. and his eighteen-volume Sharh Ṣahīh Muslim. and it is related that his entire wardrobe consisted of a turban and an ankle-length shirt with a single button at the collar. young in years but great in benefit to Islām and the Muslims. 161 . among the best known of which are his Minhāj alṭālibīn. he returned the books he had borrowed from charitable endowments. hadīth. Riyāḍ al-ṣālihīn and Kitab al-adhkār in hadīth. and departed. which he would wash and eat. He was the Shāfiʿī scholar of his time. in 823 H. where he became ill at his father‟s home and died at forty-four years of age in 676 H. Shaykh al-Islām Zakariyyā al-Anṣārī Shaykh al-Islām Abū Yahya Zakariyya ibn Muḥammad ibn Aḥmad al-Anṣārī. and legal opinion. going first to Jerusalem and then to his native Nawa. He lived simply. which has become a main reference for the Shāfiʿī School. After a residence in Damascus of twentyseven years. judge and Qurʾānic exegete.Appendix 3: 'Alam many great works in Shāfiʿī jurisprudence. visited the graves of his Shaykhs who had died. Egypt. a hadīth master (hāfiẓ). history. is known as the shaykh of shaykhs. He was educated in Cairo in circumstances of such poverty that he used to have to leave the mosque by night to look for watermelon rinds. born in Sanika.

but when the sultan later committed a wrong act and he sent him a letter upbraiding him. Al-Imām Ibn Ḥajar al-Haytamī Shihab al-Dīn Abū al-ʿAbbās Aḥmad ibn Muḥammad ibn ʿAlī ibn Hajar al-Haytamī al-Makkī is born in 909 H in Abū Haytam. logic. hadīth. but later moved to Makkah. teach and give financial help to the students who studied with him. western Egypt. When Sultan Quytubay al-Jurkasi appointed him as head of the judiciary in Cairo. which he spent to gather books. where he authored major works in Shāfiʿī jurisprudence. He was the Shāfiʿī Imām of his time. fundamentals of jurisprudence. he accepted the post with reluctance after being repeatedly asked. the sultan dismissed him and he returned to teaching. He died in 926 H at one hundred years of age. He authored works in Sacred Law. represents the foremost resource for fatwa (legal apinion) for the entire late Shāfiʿī School. Arabic. and with al-Imām Aḥmad al-Ramlī.Appendix 3: 'Alam When his knowledge later won him fame and recognition. the sciences of Qurʾān and hadīth. he was to receive so many gifts that his income before his appointment to the judiciary amounted to nearly three thousand dirhams a day. tenets of 162 . a brilliant scholar of in-depth applications of Sacred Law. and Sufism. and was the Shaykh of al-Imām Ibn Ḥajar Haytamī. He was educated at al-Azhar.

education. After a lifetime of outstanding scholarship. and al-Zawājir ʿan iqtirāf al-kabāʾir. Al-Imām Muḥammad al-Shirbīnī al-Khāṭib Shams al-Din Muḥammad ibn Aḥmad al-Shirbīnī al-Khāṭib of Cairo is a Shāfiʿī Imām and Qurʾānic exegete of knowledge and piety. a commentary on al-Imām al-Nawawī‟s Minhāj alṭālibīn whose ten volumes represent a high point in Shāfiʿī scholarship. He educated a multitude of scholars and his works won recognition in their author‟s lifetime for their outstanding clarity and reliability. which with its detailed presentation of Qurʾān and Hadīth evidence and masterful legal inferences. as well as Nur al-Dīn al-Maḥallī. he studied in Cairo under al-Imām Aḥmad al-Ramlī. the four volume al-Fatāwā al-kubrā al-fiqhiyyah. among the most famous of them his four-volume 163 . who authorized him to give formal legal opinion and instruction. the Imām died and was buried in Makkah in 974 H.Appendix 3: 'Alam faith. remains unique among Muslim works dealing with taqwa (godfearingness) and is even recognized by Hanafi scholars like al-Imām Ibn ʿĀbidīn as a source of authoritative legal texts valid in their own school. Aḥmad Burullusi and others. and formal legal opinion. His most famous works include Tuhfah al-muḥtāj bi sharh alMinhāj. hadīth commentary.

Appendix 3: 'Alam Mughnī al-muḥtaj ilā maʿrifat maʿānī alfāz al-Minhāj. a commentary on al-Imām al-Nawawī‟s Minhāj al-ṭālibīn. He died in Cairo in 977 H. and his Qurʾānic exegesis al-Sirāj al-munīr fi al-iʿāna ʿalā maʿrifa baʿd kalām Rabbina al-Hakīm al-Khabīr. 164 .

Shams al-dīn Muḥammad ibn Abī al-ʿAbbās Aḥmad ibn Hamzah ibn Shihāb al-dīn al-Ramlī. Beirut. 1994. al-Shaykh Ibn Samīr al-Haḍramī. Dar al-fikr. Aḥmad ibn ʿAbd 165 . Dar al-minhāj.    Reliance of the Traveller. Indonesia. Second edition 2007.  Nihāyat al-muḥtāj ilā sharh al-Minhāj. Shihāb al-dīn Abū al-ʿAbbās Aḥmad ibn Muḥammad ibn ʿAlī ibn Ḥajar al-Haytamī. al-Shaykh Nuh Ha Mim Keller. Sayyid Aḥmad ibn ʿUmar al-Shaṭirī. Dar ihya al-kutub al-ʿArabiyyah. Dar al-Qalam. Revised Edition. edited by Dr. Aamna Publisher. Beirut. Al-Fiqh al-manhaji ʿalā madhhab al-Imām al-Shāfiʿī . Mustafa al-Khīn. Eighth edition 2007. Dar al-kutub al-ʿilmiyyah. Delhi. al-Shaykh Muḥammad al-Nawawī. Kāshifat al-sajāʾ sharh Safīnat al-najāʾ. Dimashq. India.  Tuḥfat al-muḥtāj. Maktabah althaqafah al-dīniyyah. al-Imām Muhyid al-Dīn Abū Zakariyyā Yahyā ibn Sharaf al-Nawawī.  Minhāj al-ṭālibīn. Dr.Bibliography Bibliography Books of Fiqh:   Matn Safīnat al-najāʾ fī uṣūl al-dīn wa al-fiqh. Nail al-rajāʾ bi sharh Safīnat al-najāʾ.

Bibliography al-ʿAzīz al-Ḥaddād. Beirut. al-Imām Muhyi al-Dīn Abū Zakariyyā Yahyā ibn Sharaf al-Nawawī. 166 . Tuḥfatul Ikhwān. Beirut. wazn. al-Shaykh Muḥammad Shirbīnī Khāṭib. Dr. Second edition 2005. New Delhi.  Al-Maqādir al-sharʿiyyah wa al-ahkām al-fiqhiyyah almutaʿalliqah bihā kayl. Muḥammad Najm al-Dīn al-Kurdī. Dar ihyā al-turath al-ʿArabī. Adam Publisher and Distributor. 2002. Dar al-Fikr. miqyās. First Edition 2002. Dar al-fikr. Second Edition. 1998. Dar al-Bashāʾir al-Islāmiyyah. 2001. al-Imām Abū Bakr ibn Muḥammad Shatta al-Dimyātī. Ḥāshiyah iʿānat al-ṭālibīn. Dar al-fikr. Dar al-fikr. Shaykh al-Islām Abū Yahyā Zakariyyā al-Anṣārī. Al-Iqnāʿ fī ḥalli alfāẓ Abī Shujāʿ. first edition.  Ḥāshiyatan – Qalyūbī and ʿĀmīrah ʿalā sharh Jalāl alDīn al-Maḥallī ʿalā sharh al-Minhāj. Mawlānā Muḥammad Ibrahim Ba‟kathah translated by Shaykh Yousuf Abdullah Karaan.     Fatḥ al-Wahhāb sharh Manhaj al-ṭullāb. Beirut.  Al-Majmūʿ. Second edition 2002. Cairo. mundhu ʿahdi alNabi  wa taqwīmiha bi al-muʿāṣir. Beirut. Beirut. 2005.

alImām ʿAbd ar-Rahman ibn Ibrāhīm al-Fazarī Ibn al-Firkāh. 167 . Dar alBashāʾir al-Islāmiyyah. Muassasah alRiṣalāh. First edition 2002. al-Qahirah. Books of Introduction to the Madhhab:  Madkhāl ilā kutub al-fiqh al-Shāfiʿī. Khazain alsaniyyah. Shaykh ʿAbd al-Qadir ibn ʿAbd al-Muttalib alMindili al-Andunisi. ʿAlī Jumʿah Muḥammad al-Shāfiʿī . Al-Fawāʾid al-Makkiyyah Books of Usul al-fiqh:  Sharh al-Waraqāt li Imām al-ḥarāmain al-Juwainī. First Edition 2004.Bibliography Books of Usul al-din  Ḥāshiyat al-Imām al-Baijūrī ʿalā Jauharat al-tauhīd.   Al-Madkhāl ilā dirāsat al-madhhab al-fiqhiyyah. Cairo. Dar al-Salām. ʿAlī Jumuʿah. edited by Sarah Shāfi al-Ḥajirī. first edition 2002. edited by Dr. First Edition 2004. Beirut. Dr.

Beirut. Dr.  Al-Lumāʿ fī uṣūl al-fiqh.Bibliography  Al-Wajīz fī uṣūl al-tashrīʿi al-Islāmī. First Edition 2006.  168 . Imām Abū Ishaq al-Shīrāzī. Muassasah al-Riṣalāh. Muḥammad Hasan Hītū. Dar al-kalimah.

Notes Notes 169 .

Notes Notes 170 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful